2009 gmc acadia owner manual m · 2009 gmc acadia owner manual m. general motors, gm, the gm...

Seats and RestraintSystem ............................... 1-1

Head Restraints .............. 1-2Front Seats .................... 1-3Rear Seats ................... 1-10Safety Belts .................. 1-15Child Restraints ............. 1-30Airbag System .............. 1-50Restraint System

Check ...................... 1-63

Features and Controls ...... 2-1Keys ............................. 2-2Doors and Locks ............ 2-8Windows ...................... 2-14Theft-Deterrent

Systems ................... 2-16Starting and Operating

Your Vehicle ............. 2-20Mirrors ......................... 2-31Object Detection

Systems ................... 2-34OnStar® System ............ 2-41

Universal Home RemoteSystem ..................... 2-45

Storage Areas ............... 2-49Sunroof ........................ 2-54

Instrument Panel ............... 3-1Instrument Panel

Overview .................... 3-4Climate Controls ............ 3-22Warning Lights, Gages,

and Indicators ............ 3-33Driver Information

Center (DIC) ............. 3-47Audio System(s) ............ 3-76

Driving Your Vehicle ......... 4-1Your Driving, the Road,

and the Vehicle ........... 4-1Towing ........................ 4-20

Service and AppearanceCare ................................... 5-1

Service .......................... 5-3Fuel .............................. 5-5Checking Things Under

the Hood .................. 5-10

All-Wheel Drive ............. 5-35Headlamp Aiming .......... 5-35Bulb Replacement ......... 5-35Windshield Wiper Blade

Replacement ............. 5-36Tires ........................... 5-37Appearance Care .......... 5-80Vehicle Identification ...... 5-87Electrical System ........... 5-87Capacities and

Specifications ............ 5-94

Maintenance Schedule ...... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ..... 6-1

Customer AssistanceInformation ........................ 7-1

Customer Assistanceand Information ........... 7-1

Reporting SafetyDefects ..................... 7-14

Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy ............... 7-16

Index ................................... i-1

2009 GMC Acadia Owner Manual M

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GMEmblem, GMC, the GMC Emblem,and the name ACADIA, areregistered trademarks of GeneralMotors Corporation.

This manual includes the latestinformation at the time it wasprinted. GM reserves the right tomake changes after that timewithout further notice. For vehiclesfirst sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors ofCanada Limited” for GMC whereverit appears in this manual.

This manual describes featuresthat may or may not be on yourspecific vehicle.

Read this manual from beginning toend to learn about the vehicle’sfeatures and controls. Pictures,symbols, and words work togetherto explain vehicle operation.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123www.helminc.com

Propriétaires CanadiensOn peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès deconcessionnaire ou à l’adressesuivante:



ii Preface

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15919282 B Second Priinting ©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

IndexTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the index in the backof the manual. It is an alphabeticallist of what is in the manual and thepage number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings andSymbols

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this” or “Do not letthis happen.”

A box with the word CAUTION isused to tell about things that couldhurt you or others if you were toignore the warning.

{ CAUTION

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Cautions tell what the hazard is andwhat to do to avoid or reduce thehazard. Read these cautions.

A notice tells about something thatcan damage the vehicle.

Notice: These mean there issomething that could damageyour vehicle.

Many times, this damage wouldnot be covered by the vehicle’swarranty, and it could be costly.The notice tells what to do to helpavoid the damage.

There are also warning labels onthe vehicle which use the samewords, CAUTION or Notice.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols insteadof text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operationor information relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gage, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Preface iii

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering WheelControls or OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gage

+ : Fuses

i : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

g : Outside Power FoldawayMirrors

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

_ : Tow/Haul Mode

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid

iv Preface

Seats andRestraint System

Head RestraintsHead Restraints ....................1-2

Front SeatsManual Seats .......................1-3Seat Height Adjuster ..............1-3Power Seats .........................1-4Manual Lumbar .....................1-4Power Lumbar ......................1-5Heated Seats .......................1-5Heated and Cooled Seats ......1-6Memory Seat and Mirrors .......1-6Reclining Seatbacks ..............1-8

Rear SeatsRear Seat Operation ............1-10Third Row Seats .................1-12

Safety BeltsSafety Belts: They Are forEveryone ..........................1-15

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly ............................1-19

Lap-Shoulder Belt ................1-24Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy ........................1-29

Safety Belt Extender ............1-29

Child RestraintsOlder Children .....................1-30Infants and Young Children ....1-32Child Restraint Systems ........1-35Where to Put the Restraint .....1-36Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) ..........1-38

Securing a Child Restraintin a Rear Seat Position ......1-45

Securing a Child Restraintin the Right Front SeatPosition ............................1-47

Airbag SystemAirbag System ....................1-50Where Are the Airbags? .......1-52When Should an AirbagInflate? .............................1-53

What Makes an AirbagInflate? .............................1-55

How Does an AirbagRestrain? ..........................1-55

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? .............1-56

Passenger Sensing System ...1-57Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle .....1-61

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle .....1-62

Restraint System CheckChecking the RestraintSystems ...........................1-63

Replacing Restraint SystemParts After a Crash ............1-64

Seats and Restraint System 1-1

Head RestraintsThe vehicle’s front seats haveadjustable head restraints in alloutboard seating positions.

{ CAUTION

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinalinjury in a crash. Do not drive untilthe head restraints for alloccupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant’shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraint up to raise it.To lower the head restraint, pressthe release button, located onthe head restraint post on the top ofthe seatback, while you push thehead restraint down.

Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

1-2 Seats and Restraint System

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{ CAUTION

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver’s seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver’s seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

A. Manual Seat Adjustment BarB. Driver Seat Height Adjuster. See

Seat Height Adjuster onpage 1-3.

C. Manual Reclining SeatbackLever. See Reclining Seatbackson page 1-8.

If the vehicle has a manual bucketseat you can adjust the seatforward or rearward with the barlocated under the front of the seatcushion.

Lift the bar to unlock the seat. Slidethe seat to where you want itand release the bar. Try to movethe seat with your body to besure the seat is locked in place.

Seat Height AdjusterIf the vehicle has a manual driverseat height adjuster, it is located onthe outboard side of the seat.See Manual Seats on page 1-3 formore information. To raise theseat, move the lever upwardrepeatedly until the seat is at thedesired height. To lower theseat, move the lever downwardrepeatedly until the seat is atthe desired height.


Power Seats

A. Power Seat Adjustment ControlB. Reclining Seatbacks on

page 1-8.C. Power Lumbar on page 1-5.

If the vehicle has power seats, thecontrols are located on theoutboard side of the seats.

Move the seat forward or rearwardby sliding the power seat adjustmentcontrol (A) forward or rearward.

The vehicle may have additionalfeatures to adjust the power seat:

• Raise or lower the entireseat by moving the power seatadjustment control (A)up or down.

• Raise or lower the front part of theseat cushion by moving the frontof the control up or down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of theseat cushion by moving the rearof the control up or down.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction which allows seat settingsto be saved and recalled. SeeMemory Seat and Mirrors onpage 1-6 for more information.

Manual Lumbar

If the vehicle has this feature, thehandle is located on the inboard sideof the seatback. See Manual Seatson page 1-3 for more information.

Turn the handle rearward todecrease lumbar support. Turn thehandle forward to increase lumbarsupport.

The lumbar support may need to beadjusted when changing theseating position.

Driver Seat with Power SeatControl, Power Recline, and

Power Lumbar shown


Power LumbarIf the seats have power lumbar, thecontrols used to operate thisfeature are located on the outboardside of the seats. See “PowerLumbar” under Power Seats onpage 1-4 for more information.

To increase or decrease lumbarsupport, press and hold the front orrear of the control (C).

Release the control when theseatback reaches the desired levelof lumbar support.

The lumbar support may need to beadjusted when changing theseating position.

Heated SeatsOn vehicles with heated front seats,the controls are located on the centerconsole. To operate the heated seatsthe engine must be running.

I (Heated Seatback): Press toturn on the heated seatback.

J (Heated Seat and Seatback):Press to turn on or off the heatedseat and seatback.

The light on the button will come onto indicate that the feature is on.Each time the button is pressed, thetemperature settings change fromhigh, to medium, to low, to off.Indicator lights above the button willshow the level of heat selected: threefor high, two for medium, and onefor low.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

If the vehicle has remote vehiclestart and is started using the remotekeyless entry transmitter, the frontheated seats will be turned on to thehigh setting if it is cold outside.See “Remote Vehicle Start” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-4.When the ignition is turned on, theheated seat feature will turn off.To turn the heated seat feature backon, press the desired button.


Heated and Cooled SeatsIf the front seats have the heatedand cooled seat feature, the buttonsused to control this feature arelocated on the front doors near thedoor handle.

H (Cooled Seat): To cool the entireseat, press the button with thecooled seat symbol.

This symbol will appear on theclimate control display to indicatethat the feature is on. Pressthe button to cycle through thetemperature settings of high,medium, and low and to turn thecooled seat off. Indicator bars nextto the symbol designate thelevel of cooling selected: three forhigh, two for medium, and onefor low.

z (Heated Seat and Seatback): Toheat the entire seat, press thebutton with the heated seat andseatback symbol.

This symbol will appear on theclimate control display to indicatethat the feature is on. Press thebutton to cycle through thetemperature settings of high,medium, and low and to turn theheated seat off. Indicator bars next tothe symbol designate the level ofheat selected: three for high, two formedium, and one for low.

The heated and cooled seats will becanceled after the ignition isturned off. To use the heated andcooled seat feature after the vehicleis started, you will need to pressthe appropriate seat button again.

Memory Seat and Mirrors

On vehicles with the memorypackage, the controls for this featureare located on the driver doorpanel. The controls are used toprogram and recall memory settingsfor the driver seat and outsidemirrors.


To save positions in memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, includingthe seatback recliner and bothoutside mirrors to a comfortableposition.See Outside Power Mirrors onpage 2-32 for more information.Not all mirrors will have theability to save and recallthe mirror positions.

2. Press and hold button 1 until twobeeps let you know that theposition has been stored.

A second seating and mirrorposition can be programmed byrepeating the above steps andpressing button 2.

To recall the memory positions, thevehicle must be in P (Park). Pressand release either button 1 orbutton 2 corresponding to thedesired driving position. The seatand outside mirrors will move to theposition previously stored. You willhear a single beep.

Using the RKE transmitter to enterthe vehicle, with the remoterecall memory feature on, causesautomatic seat and mirroradjustment. There is no adjustmentwhen the position has not beenchanged by another seating positionor the easy exit feature. See“MEMORY SEAT RECALL” underDIC Vehicle Customization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 3-67 for moreinformation.

To stop recall movement of thememory feature at any time, pressone of the power seat controls,memory buttons, or power mirrorbuttons.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling a memoryposition, the driver seat recall maystop working. If this happens, pressthe appropriate control for the areathat is not recalling for two seconds,after the obstruction is removed.Then try recalling the memoryposition again by pressing theappropriate memory button. If the

memory position is still not beingrecalled, see your dealer/retailer forservice.

Easy Exit SeatThe control for this feature islocated on the driver door panelbetween buttons 1 and 2.

With the vehicle in P (Park), the exitposition can be recalled bypressing the exit button. You willhear a single beep. The driver seatwill move back.

If the easy exit seat feature is on inthe Driver Information Center (DIC),automatic seat movement will occurwhen the key is removed from theignition. See “EASY EXIT SEAT”under DIC Vehicle Customization(With DIC Buttons) on page 3-67 formore information.


Further programming for thememory seat feature can be doneusing the DIC. You can selector cancel the following:

• The automatic easy exit seatfeature.

• The remote memory seat recallfeature.

For programming information, seeDIC Vehicle Customization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 3-67.

Reclining SeatbacksManual Reclining Seatbacks

{ CAUTION

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver’s seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver’s seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ CAUTION

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

In vehicles with seats that havemanual reclining seatbacks, the leverused to operate them is located onthe outboard side of the seat.

To recline the seatback, do thefollowing:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desiredposition, then release the lever tolock the seatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to an uprightposition, do the following:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.



Power Reclining SeatbacksIn vehicles with seats that havepower reclining seatbacks,the control used to recline them islocated on the outboard side ofthe seat behind the powerseat control. See Power Seats onpage 1-4 for more information.

• To recline the seatback, tilt thetop of the control rearward.

• To bring the seatback forward, tiltthe top of the control forward.

{ CAUTION

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifyour vehicle is moving.


Rear Seats

Rear Seat Operation

A. Seat Adjustment HandleB. Reclining Seatback StrapC. Sliding Seat Lever

Entering and Exiting theThird Row

{ CAUTION

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or folded and tumbled,could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to returnthe seat to the passenger seatingposition. Push and pull on theseat to make sure it is locked intoplace.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To access the third row:

1. Remove objects on the floor infront of or on the second rowseat, or in the seat tracks onthe floor.

2. Move the front center consolearmrest completely forward.See Center Console Storage onpage 2-50.


3. Place folding armrests in theupright position.

4. Ensure that the safety belt isunfastened and in the stowedposition.

5. Pull the sliding seat lever (C)forward and move the seatbackforward. The seat cushionwill fold, and the entire seat willslide forward.

Returning the Seat to theSeating PositionTo return the second row seat to itsnormal seating position:

1. Remove objects on the floorbehind the second row seator in the seat tracks on the floor.

2. Pull the seatback rearward until itis locked in place.

3. Slide the seat rearward bypushing on the seatback until it islocked into place.

4. Push down on the rear of theseat cushion until it is lockedin place.

5. Push and pull on the seatbackand seat cushion to make surethey are locked in place.

6. Check that the safety belt is notunder the seat cushion.

Reclining the SeatbacksTo recline the seatback:

1. Leaning forward in the seat, pullthe reclining seatback strap (B).

2. Move the seatback to the desiredposition, then release the strapto lock the seatback in place.


Folding the Rear SeatTo fold the second row seats:

1. Remove anything on or underthe seat.

2. Place the armrest in the uprightposition, and unfasten thesafety belt.

3. Pull forward on the recliningseatback strap (B) and pushdown on the seatback.If the headrest touches the frontseat, slide the second rowseat rearward.

To return the seatback to theseating position, lift the upper cornerof the seatback and push itrearward until it locks into place.Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked.


Adjusting the SeatsTo adjust the second row seats, pulloutward on the seat adjustmenthandle (A). Slide the seat forward orrearward to the desired position.Release the handle and pushand pull on the seat to make sure itis locked.

Third Row Seats

{ CAUTION

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or pushed forward in theentry position, could cause injuryin a sudden stop or crash. Besure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position. Pushand pull on the seat to make sureit is locked into place.

The third row seats can be foldedforward or removed.


To fold the seatback:


2. Disconnect the rear safety beltmini-latch, using a key in the sloton the mini-buckle, let the beltretract into the headliner. Stowthe mini-latch in the holderlocated in the headliner.


3. Pull up on the release leverlocated on the back of theseat. The headrest movesforward automatically.

4. Push the seatback forward tolay flat.

To return the seatback to theseating position:

1. Raise the seatback into place byusing the pullstrap from the rearof the vehicle, or by pushingit into place from inside thevehicle.

2. The headrest must be lockedinto place before sitting inthe seat.

{ CAUTION

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.

{ CAUTION

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached, ortwisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. After raisingthe rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety beltsare properly routed and attached,and are not twisted.

4. Reconnect the center safety beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle.Do not let it twist.

5. Pull on the safety belt to be surethe mini-latch is secure.


Removing the Third Row Seats1. Remove the cargo management

system, if it is in the vehicle.See Cargo Management Systemon page 2-52.



3. Fold the seatback down. See“Folding the Seatback” earlierin this section.

4. Remove the rear bolts located onthe floor on each side of the seat.

5. Remove the seat by tilting itslightly upward, and thenpulling it out of the rear of thevehicle in one motion.

6. Replace the bolts in the floorholes for storage.

Installing the Third Row Seats1. Before installing the seat the

seatback must be foldedforward. See “Folding theSeatback” earlier in this section.The seats must be placed inthe proper locations to attachcorrectly. The wider seat must beinstalled on the driver side andthe narrower seat on thepassenger side. Remove thebolts from the holes in the floorbefore installing the seats.

2. Place the seat on the vehiclefloor so that the front seathooks are on the vehicle bars.

3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to55 Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on theseat to make sure it is lockedin place.

4. Raise the seatback to its uprightposition. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure it islocked into place.

5. Push the headrest up intoposition. Push and pull onthe headrest to make sure it islocked into place.

6. Reconnect the center safety beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle. Donot let it twist.


Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Arefor EveryoneThis section of the manual describeshow to use safety belts properly.It also describes some things not todo with safety belts.

{ CAUTION

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or beejected from the vehicle. You andyour passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be, ifyou are buckled up. Always fastenyour safety belt, and check thatyour passenger(s) are restrainedproperly too.

{ CAUTION

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 3-35 for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requireswearing safety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will bein a crash. If you do have a crash,you do not know if it will be aserious one.

A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes arein between. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter... a lot!


Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.


The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down asthe vehicle does. You get more timeto stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take theforces. That is why safety belts makesuch good sense.


Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safetybelt, even if you are upside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags,why should I have to wearsafety belts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupantsstill have to buckle up to get themost protection. That is truenot only in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver does notprotect you from things beyondyour control, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km) of home. Andthe greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur atspeeds of less than 40 mph(65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.


How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety belts andchildren. And there are different rulesfor smaller children and infants. If achild will be riding in the vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 1-30 orInfants and Young Children onpage 1-32. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehiclein a crash. And they can strikeothers in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important information youshould know.

Sit up straight and always keep yourfeet on the floor in front of you.The lap part of the belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strong pelvicbones and you would be lesslikely to slide under the lap belt.

If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to take beltrestraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.


Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously hurt if yourshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.


A: The lap belt is too loose. It willnot give nearly as muchprotection this way.


{ CAUTION

You can be seriously hurt if yourlap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lap beltand apply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The lap belt shouldbe worn low and snug on thehips, just touching the thighs.


A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt is buckled in the wrongplace like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there,not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your beltinto the buckle nearest you.



A: The belt is over an armrest.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt goes over an armrestlike this. The belt would be muchtoo high. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.


A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.


{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured if youwear the shoulder belt under yourarm. In a crash, your body wouldmove too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head andneck injury. Also, the belt wouldapply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong asshoulder bones. You could alsoseverely injure internal organs likeyour liver or spleen. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest.


A: The belt is behind the body.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could move toofar forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. Youmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

If you are using a rear seatingposition with a detachable safetybelt and the safety belt is notattached, see Third Row Seats onpage 1-12 for instruction onreconnecting the safety belt to themini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not letit get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across youvery quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly tounlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.


3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

4. Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 1-29.Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you.See “Shoulder Belt HeightAdjustment” later in this sectionfor instructions on use andimportant safety information.

6. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull thestitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.Slide the latch plate up the safetybelt webbing when the safety beltis not in use. The latch plate shouldrest on the stitching on the safetybelt, near the guide loop on theside wall.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.


Shoulder Belt Height AdjusterThe vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driverand right front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so that theshoulder portion of the belt iscentered on the shoulder. The beltshould be away from the faceand neck, but not falling off of theshoulder. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reducethe effectiveness of the safetybelt in a crash.

To move it down, push down onthe button (A) and move the heightadjuster to the desired position. Youcan move the height adjuster up bypushing up on the shoulder beltguide.

After the adjuster is set to the desiredposition, try to move it down withoutpushing the button to make sure ithas locked into position.

Safety Belt PretensionersThis vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safetybelt pretensioners cannot be seen,they are part of the safety beltassembly. They can help tightenthe safety belts during the earlystages of a moderate to severefrontal, near frontal, or rear crash ifthe threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.And, for vehicles with side impactairbags, safety belt pretensionerscan help tighten the safety belts in aside crash or a rollover event.


Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced,and probably other new parts for thevehicle’s safety belt system. SeeReplacing Restraint SystemParts After a Crash on page 1-64.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guidesmay provide added safety beltcomfort for older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

There is a guide for each outboardpassenger position in the second rowseat and all passenger positions inthe third row. Here is how to install acomfort guide to the safety belt:

1. For the outboard positions,remove the guide from its storageclip on the interior body.For the third row center position,locate the comfort guide which islocated in a storage pocket, atthe top of the seat, under theheadrest on the driver’s side ofthe vehicle. To access the

comfort guide, you will first needto move the headrest forward bypulling on the handle behind theseatback. The comfort guide willnow be accessible.

Pull the comfort guide out of itsstorage location and thenreturn the headrest to its uprightposition.The elastic cord on the comfortguide is adjustable. You canmake it longer or shorterby squeezing both ends of theplastic adjuster.

Outboard Positions Third Row Center Position


2. Place the guide over the belt andinsert the two edges of the beltinto the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. The elasticcord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

{ CAUTION

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.


4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure that the shoulder beltcrosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide.Slide the guide into its storagelocation or on its storage clip.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lap portionshould be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When asafety belt is worn properly,it is more likely that the fetus will notbe hurt in a crash. For pregnantwomen, as for anyone, the key tomaking safety belts effective iswearing them properly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer/retailer willorder you an extender. When yougo in to order it, take the heaviestcoat you will wear, so the extenderwill be long enough for you.To help avoid personal injury, donot let someone else use it, and useit only for the seat it is made to fit.The extender has been designed foradults. Never use it for securingchild seats. To wear it, attach it tothe regular safety belt. For moreinformation, see the instructionsheet that comes with the extender.


Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle’s safety belts.

The manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the booster seat, statethe weight and height limitations for

that booster. Use a booster seatwith a lap-shoulder belt untilthe child passes the below fit test:

• Sit all the way back on theseat. Do the knees bend at theseat edge? If yes, continue.If no, return to the booster seat.

• Buckle the lap-shoulderbelt. Does the shoulder belt reston the shoulder? If yes,continue. If no, try using the rearsafety belt comfort guide. See“Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belton page 1-24 for moreinformation. If the shoulder beltstill does not rest on the shoulder,then return to the booster seat.

• Does the lap belt fit low and snugon the hips, touching the thighs?If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

• Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length ofthe trip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force tothe child’s pelvic bones in acrash. It should never be wornover the abdomen, whichcould cause severe or even fatalinternal injuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belton page 1-24.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.


In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safetybelts properly.

{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly.In a crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ CAUTION

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck and thesafety belt continues to tighten.Never leave children unattended ina vehicle and never allow childrento play with the safety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young childrenride in vehicles, they should havethe protection provided byappropriate child restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people, orcan be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg)infant will suddenly become a240 lb (110 kg) force on aperson’s arms. An infant shouldbe secured in an appropriaterestraint.


{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Children who are up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.


Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which arepurchased by the vehicle’sowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint will becompatible with the motor vehiclein which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used in amotor vehicle. If it is, the restraintwill have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehiclesafety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weightand height limitations for aparticular child restraint. Inaddition, there are many kinds ofrestraints available for childrenwith special needs.

{ CAUTION

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant’s neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash, aninfant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant’s body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ CAUTION

A young child’s hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle’s regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.


Child Restraint Systems

A rear-facing infant seat (A) providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned inthe restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child’s bodywith the harness.

A booster seat (C) is a childrestraint designed to improve the fitof the vehicle’s safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

(A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats


Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ CAUTION

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child restraintis not properly secured in thevehicle. Secure the child restraintproperly in the vehicle using thevehicle’s safety belt or LATCHsystem, following the instructionsthat came with that child restraintand the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. Child restraint systemsmust be secured in vehicle seats bylap belts or the lap belt portion of alap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCHsystem. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 1-38 for more information.

A child can be endangered in a crashif the child restraint is not properlysecured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructions thatcome with the restraint which maybe on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ CAUTION

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the child properlyfollowing the instructions thatcame with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child restraintsystem or infant restraint systemsecured in a rear seating position.


We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facing childseat; an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says, “Neverput a rear-facing child restraint in thefront.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{ CAUTION

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the right front passengerairbag inflates. This is because theback of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint can

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

be seriously injured or killed ifthe right front passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbag isoff. If you secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 1-57 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it is compatiblewith this vehicle.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move aroundin a collision or sudden stopand injure people in the vehicle.Be sure to properly secure any childrestraint in the vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.


Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchorsin the vehicle and attachmentson the child restraint that are madefor use with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle’s safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also use eitherthe lower anchors or the safety beltsto properly secure the child restraint.A child restraint must never beattached using only the top tetherand anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with these attachmentsin your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There aretwo lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraintwith lower attachments (B).


Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchorin the vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotationof the child restraint during drivingor in a crash.

Your child restraint may havea single tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use with orwithout the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions for yourchild restraint.

If the child restraint does not have atop tether, one can be obtained,in kit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturerwhether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seating positionswith two lower anchors.

Second Row — Bucket



j (Lower Anchor): Seating positionswith two lower anchors.


To assist you in locating the loweranchors, each second rowanchor position has a label, nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.

To assist you in locating the toptether anchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is located on the cover ornear the anchor.

Second Row — 60/40 Bench Third Row


The top tether anchors are locatedat the bottom rear of the seatbackfor each seating position in thesecond row. Open the coverto access the anchors. Be sure touse an anchor located on thesame side of the vehicle as theseating position where thechild restraint will be placed.

The third row has one top tetheranchor located at the bottom rear ofthe center seatback. This anchorshould be used for the centerseating position only. Never installtwo top tethers using the sametop tether anchor.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tetheranchor if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether beattached, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say thatthe top tether must be attached.

Accident statistics show that childrenare safer if they are restrained inthe rear rather than the frontseat. See Where to Put the Restrainton page 1-36 for additionalinformation.Second Row — Bucket Shown,

Bench SimilarThird Row Seat


Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCH System

{ CAUTION

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that camewith the child restraint and theinstructions in this manual.

{ CAUTION

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor could

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

cause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break duringa crash. A child or others couldbe injured. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, attach only one childrestraint per anchor.

{ CAUTION

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock, ifyour vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lower attachmentsor the desired seating positiondoes not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with thetop tether and the safety belts.Refer to your child restraintmanufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.1.1. Find the lower anchors

for the desired seatingposition.


1.2. Recline the seatback to thefull reclined position.Make sure the second rowbench seatbacks are alignedat the same angle beforeplacing the child restraint onthe seat. Make sure the thirdrow bench seatbacks areboth upright before placingthe child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.4. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if the vehicle has one.Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. If the anchor is covered,

flip open the cover toexpose the anchor.

2.3. Route, attach and tightenthe top tether accordingto your child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether over the seatback.


If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint andyou are using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a dual tether,route the tether around theheadrest or head restraint.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether,route the tether over theheadrest or head restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions to be sureit is secure.


Securing a ChildRestraint in a Rear SeatPositionWhen securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it is compatiblewith this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH)on page 1-38 for how and where toinstall the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint is securedin the vehicle using a safety beltand it uses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 1-38 for top tetheranchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if theinstructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top strap mustbe anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will be usingthe safety belt to secure the childrestraint in this position. Be sure tofollow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure thechild in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraint needsto be installed in the rear seat, besure to read Where to Put theRestraint on page 1-36.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.


4. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of thebelt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful to useyour knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tightenthe belt.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH)on page 1-38 for moreinformation.


To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.


Securing a ChildRestraint in the RightFront Seat PositionThe vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 1-36.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbagunder certain conditions. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 1-57 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 3-36for more information, includingimportant safety information.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ CAUTION

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the right front passengerairbag inflates. This is because theback of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if theright front passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)


See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 1-57 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 1-38 for how and where toinstall the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint is securedusing a safety belt and it uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 1-38 for top tether anchorlocations.


Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if theinstructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top strap mustbe anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back asit will go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off theright front passenger frontalairbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag, the off indicator onthe passenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen the vehicle is started.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 3-36.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.


5. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of thebelt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful to useyour knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tightenthe belt.


If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come onand stay on when the vehicle isstarted.

If a child restraint has beeninstalled and the on indicator is lit,see “If the On Indicator is Lit fora Child Restraint” under PassengerSensing System on page 1-57for more information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right frontpassenger.

• A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver.

• A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the right frontpassenger.

• A roof-rail airbag for the driver,passenger seated directlybehind the driver, and the thirdrow outboard passenger position.

• A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger, passengerseated directly behind the rightfront passenger, and the third rowoutboard passenger position.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attachedlabel near the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel forthe driver and on the instrumentpanel for the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAGwill appear on the side of theseatback closest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today’s airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags mustinflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ CAUTION

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt — even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 1-53.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.


{ CAUTION

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ CAUTION

Children who are up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer protection for adults andolder children, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neitherthe vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its airbag system is designedfor them. Young children andinfants need the protection that achild restraint system can provide.Always secure children properly inyour vehicle. To read how, seeOlder Children on page 1-30 orInfants and Young Children onpage 1-32.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 3-36 formore information.


Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger side. The seat-mounted side impact

airbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar


The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, passengersbehind the driver and right frontpassenger, and the third rowoutboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

{ CAUTION

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properly orit might force the object into thatperson causing severe injury oreven death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver’s or rightfront passenger’s head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severea crash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based onhow fast your vehicle is traveling. Itdepends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.

Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar


Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationaryobject, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits amoving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits anobject that does not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers,rear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags. SeeAirbag System on page 1-50.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intendedto inflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof-railairbags are intended to inflate duringa rollover or in a severe frontal

impact. Seat-mounted side impactand roof-rail airbags will inflate if thecrash severity is above thesystem’s designed threshold level.The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate infrontal impacts, near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-railairbags are not intended to inflate inrear impacts. A seat-mountedside impact airbag is intended todeploy on the side of the vehicle thatis struck. Both roof-rail airbagswill deploy when either side of thevehicle is struck, or if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicleis about to roll over, or in a severefrontal impact.


In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag shouldhave inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were.For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down. Forseat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deploymentis determined by the location andseverity of the side impact. Ina rollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined bythe direction of the roll.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fillsthe airbag causing the bag to breakout of the cover and deploy. Theinflator, the airbag, and relatedhardware are all part of the airbagmodule.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags,there are airbag modules in the sideof the front seatbacks closest tothe door. For vehicles with roof-railairbags, there are airbag modulesin the ceiling of the vehicle, near theside windows that have occupantseating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel.In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupantscan contact the inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts.

Frontal airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly overthe occupant’s upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly overthe occupant’s upper body.


Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help containthe head and chest of occupants inthe outboard seating positions inthe first, second, and third rows. Therollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help reduce the riskof full or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant’s motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 1-53 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some timeafter they deploy. Some componentsof the airbag module may be hotfor several minutes. For location ofthe airbag modules, see WhatMakes an Airbag Inflate? onpage 1-55.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ CAUTION

When an airbag inflates, there maybe dust in the air. This dust couldcause breathing problems forpeople with a history of asthma orother breathing trouble. To avoidthis, everyone in the vehicle shouldget out as soon as it is safe to doso. If you have breathing problemsbut cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then getfresh air by opening a window or adoor. If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors,turn the interior lamps on, and turnthe hazard warning flashers onwhen the airbags inflate. You canlock the doors, turn the interiorlamps off, and turn the hazardwarning flashers off by using thecontrols for those features.


In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshieldsare broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.• Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbag inflates,you will need some new parts forthe airbag system. If you do notget them, the airbag system willnot be there to help protect you inanother crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules andpossibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle coversthe need to replace other parts.

• The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after a crash.See Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy on page 7-16 and EventData Recorders on page 7-16.

• Let only qualified technicians workon the airbag systems. Improperservice can mean that an airbagsystem will not work properly. Seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem for the right front passengerposition. The passenger airbagstatus indicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicle isstarted.

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, are visibleduring the system check. If you are

using remote start, if equipped, tostart the vehicle from a distance, youmay not see the system check.When the system check is complete,either the word ON or OFF, or thesymbol for on or off, will be visible.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 3-36.

The passenger sensing system turnsoff the right front passenger frontalairbag under certain conditions.The driver airbag, seat-mountedside impact airbags and the roof-railairbags are not affected by thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seat. Thesensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger frontal airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

United States

Canada


We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ CAUTION

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in a

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

forward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed ifthe right front passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seatis in a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.


The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat isunoccupied.

• The system determines that aninfant is present in a childrestraint.

• A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seatfor a period of time.

• Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 3-36.The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sitting properlyin the right front passenger seat.


When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you thatthe airbag is active.

For some children, including childrenin child restraints, and for very smalladults, the passenger sensingsystem may or may not turn off theright front passenger frontal airbag,depending upon the person’s seatingposture and body build. Everyone inthe vehicle who has outgrown childrestraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is anairbag for that person.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 3-36 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild RestraintIf a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraint manufacturerand refer to Securing a ChildRestraint in the Right Front SeatPosition on page 1-47.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion, ifadjustable, to make sure that thevehicle seatback is not pushingthe child restraint into the seatcushion.Also make sure the child restraintis not trapped under the vehiclehead restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint. SeeHead Restraints on page 1-2.

6. Restart the vehicle.The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off the airbagfor a child in a child restraintdepending upon the child’sseating posture and body build.It is better to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.


If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat.

If this happens, use the followingsteps to allow the system to detectthat person and enable the rightfront passenger frontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright in theseat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after theon indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem OperationSafety belts help keep the passengerin position on the seat during vehiclemaneuvers and braking, which helpsthe passenger sensing systemmaintain the passenger airbagstatus. See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion, oraftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipmentto Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 1-62 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.


A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:

• The passenger sensing systemmay turn off the passenger airbagwhen liquid is soaked into theseat. If this happens, the offindicator will be lit, and the airbagreadiness light on the instrumentpanel will also be lit.

• Liquid pooled on the seat that hasnot soaked in may make it morelikely that the passenger sensingsystem will enable (turn on) thepassenger airbag while a childrestraint or child occupant is onthe seat. If the passenger airbagis turned on, the on indicator willbe lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If theairbag readiness light is lit, do notinstall a child restraint or allowanyone to occupy the seat. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 3-36 for important safetyinformation.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put on anunoccupied seat. If this is not desiredremove the object from the seat.

{ CAUTION

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer/retailer and the servicemanual have information aboutservicing the vehicle and the airbagsystem.

To purchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 7-15.

{ CAUTION

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.


Adding Equipment toYour Airbag-EquippedVehicleQ: Is there anything I might add to

or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle’s frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillargarnish trim, front sensors, sideimpact sensors, rolloversensor module, or airbag wiringcan affect the operation ofthe airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position,which includes sensors that arepart of the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system maynot operate properly if the originalseat trim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as anaftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad or device,installed under or on top of theseat fabric, could also interferewith the operation of thepassenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing system fromproperly turning off the passengerairbag(s). See PassengerSensing System on page 1-57.

If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phonenumbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 7-1.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 5-53 for additionalimportant information.


Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phonenumbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 7-1.

In addition, your dealer/retailer andthe service manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Restraint SystemCheck

Checking the RestraintSystemsSafety BeltsNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.

Look for any other loose or damagedsafety belt system parts that mightkeep a safety belt system from doingits job. See your dealer/retailer tohave it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 3-35 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Care of Safety Belts onpage 5-82.

AirbagsThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure theairbag readiness light is working.See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 3-36 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are any openedor broken airbag covers, have theairbag covering and/or airbagmodule replaced. For the locationof the airbag modules, see WhatMakes an Airbag Inflate? onpage 1-55. See your dealer/retailerfor service.


Replacing RestraintSystem Parts After aCrash

{ CAUTION

A crash can damage therestraint systems in your vehicle.A damaged restraint system maynot properly protect the personusing it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To helpmake sure your restraint systemsare working properly after a crash,have them inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has been in a crash, doyou need new safety belts or LATCHsystem (if equipped) parts?

After a very minor crash, nothingmay be necessary. But the safetybelt assemblies that were usedduring any crash may have beenstressed or damaged. See yourdealer/retailer to have the safety beltassemblies inspected or replaced.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety belt orLATCH system (if equipped), was notbeing used at the time of the crash.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seethe part on the airbag system earlierin this section.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has beenin a crash, if the airbag readinesslight stays on after the vehicleis started, or while you are driving.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 3-36.


Features andControls

KeysKeys ...................................2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System ..............................2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation ................2-4

Remote Vehicle Start .............2-6

Doors and LocksDoor Locks ..........................2-8Power Door Locks .................2-8Delayed Locking ...................2-8Programmable AutomaticDoor Locks .........................2-9

Rear Door Security Locks ........2-9Lockout Protection .................2-9Liftgate ...............................2-10Power Liftgate .....................2-11

WindowsWindows ............................2-14Power Windows ..................2-14Sun Visors .........................2-16

Theft-Deterrent SystemsTheft-Deterrent Systems .......2-16Content Theft-Deterrent ........2-16PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizer .......................2-17

PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizer Operation .........2-18

Starting and OperatingYour VehicleNew Vehicle Break-In ...........2-20Ignition Positions .................2-20Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) .....................2-21

Starting the Engine ..............2-22Engine Coolant Heater .........2-23Automatic TransmissionOperation ..........................2-24

Tow/Haul Mode ...................2-26Parking Brake .....................2-27Shifting Into Park .................2-28Shifting Out of Park .............2-29Parking Over ThingsThat Burn .........................2-29

Engine Exhaust ...................2-30Running the Vehicle WhileParked .............................2-30

MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror ........2-31Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror .................2-31

Outside Power Mirrors ..........2-32Outside Power FoldawayMirrors .............................2-33

Park Tilt Mirrors ..................2-34Outside Convex Mirror ..........2-34Outside Heated Mirrors .........2-34

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) ...................2-34

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) ...................2-37

OnStar® SystemOnStar® System ..................2-41

Universal Home RemoteSystemUniversal Home RemoteSystem .............................2-45

Universal Home RemoteSystem Operation ..............2-45

Features and Controls 2-1

Storage AreasGlove Box ..........................2-49Cupholders .........................2-49Instrument Panel Storage ......2-49Center Console Storage .......2-50Second Row CenterConsole ............................2-50

Floor Mats ..........................2-51Luggage Carrier ..................2-51Rear Seat Armrest ...............2-52Convenience Net .................2-52Cargo Cover .......................2-52Cargo Tie Downs ................2-52Cargo ManagementSystem .............................2-52

SunroofSunroof ..............................2-54

Keys

{ CAUTION

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons, children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key is used for the ignition andall door locks.

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer/retailer or qualifiedlocksmith can use to make newkeys. Store this information in asafe place, not in the vehicle.

2-2 Features and Controls

See your dealer/retailer if areplacement key or additional keyis needed.

Notice: If you ever lock yourkeys in the vehicle, you may haveto damage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.

If you are locked out of the vehicle,call the Roadside AssistanceCenter. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 7-6.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system operates on a radiofrequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:

1. This device may not causeinterference.

2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to thissystem by other than an authorizedservice facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range, try this:

• Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle. Stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal. Take a fewsteps to the left or right, holdthe transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check the transmitter’s battery.See “Battery Replacement”later in this section.

• If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer/retailer or a qualifiedtechnician for service.


Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to195 feet (60 m) away from thevehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance ofthe transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2-3.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start):For vehicles with this feature, seeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2-6for additional information.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors.

If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), theparking lamps flash once to indicatelocking has occurred. If enabledthrough the DIC, the horn soundswhen Q is pressed again withinfive seconds. See DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons)on page 3-67 for additionalinformation.

Pressing Q may arm the contenttheft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 2-16.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlockonly the driver door. If K ispressed again within five seconds,all remaining doors unlock.

The interior lamps come on andstay on for 20 seconds or until theignition is turned on.

If enabled through the DIC, theparking lamps flash twice to indicateunlocking has occurred. See DICVehicle Customization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 3-67.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the content theft-deterrentsystem. See Content Theft-Deterrenton page 2-16.

& (Power Liftgate): Press andhold for about one second to openand close the liftgate. The taillampsflash and a chime sounds to indicatewhen the liftgate is opening andclosing.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm):Press and release to locate thevehicle. The parking lamps flash andthe horn sounds three times.

With Remote Start and Liftgate(Without Remote Start or

Liftgate Similar)


Press and hold L for more thantwo seconds to activate the panicalarm. The parking lamps flash andthe horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turnsoff when the ignition is moved toON/RUN or L is pressed again.The ignition must be in LOCK/OFFfor the panic alarm to work.

Programming Transmitters tothe VehicleOnly RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchasedand programmed through yourdealer/retailer. When thereplacement transmitter isprogrammed to this vehicle usingthe DIC, all remaining transmittersmust also be reprogrammed.

Any lost or stolen transmitters willno longer work once the newtransmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up toeight transmitters programmed to it.See “Relearn Remote Key” underDIC Operation and Displays(With DIC Buttons) on page 3-47 orDIC Operation and Displays(Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-53for instructions on how to programtransmitters to this vehicle.

Battery ReplacementReplace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter.Static from your body coulddamage the transmitter.

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object inserted into thenotch on the side.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace witha CR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.


Remote Vehicle StartThis vehicle may have a remotestarting feature that starts the enginefrom outside of the vehicle.

If the vehicle has an automaticclimate control system, the climatecontrol system defaults to aheating or cooling mode dependingon the outside temperatures.If the vehicle does not have anautomatic climate control system,the system turns on at thesetting the vehicle was set to whenthe vehicle was last turned off.

If the vehicle has an automaticclimate control system and heatedseats, the heated seats turn onduring colder outside temperaturesand shut off when the key isturned to ON/RUN. See HeatedSeats on page 1-5 or Heated andCooled Seats on page 1-6 formore information.

The rear window defogger andheated mirrors, if the vehicle hasthem, turn on during colder outsidetemperatures and turn off whenthe key is turned to ON/RUN.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.For example, some laws may requirea person using the remote start tohave the vehicle in view when doingso. Check local regulations for anyrequirements on remote starting ofvehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature ifthe vehicle is low on fuel. The vehiclecould run out of fuel.

If the vehicle has the remote startfeature, the RKE transmitterfunctions have an increased range ofoperation. However, the range maybe less while the vehicle is running.

There are other conditions which canaffect the performance of thetransmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2-3 foradditional information.

/ (Remote Start): This button islocated on the RKE transmitterif the vehicle has remote start.To start the vehicle:1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release Q, thenimmediately press and hold /until the parking lamps flash. If thevehicle’s lights can not be seen,press and hold / for at leastfour seconds. The vehicle’s doorslock. When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps turn on and remainon while the vehicle is running.Pressing / again, after thevehicle has started, shuts thevehicle off.

3. If it is the first remote start sincethe vehicle has been driven,repeat these steps whilethe engine is still running, toextend the time by 10 minutes forthe engine to continue to run.Remote start can be extendedone time.


After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto the ON/RUN position to drivethe vehicle.

If the vehicle is left running itautomatically shuts off after10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done.

To manually shut off a remote start:

• Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle and press / until theparking lamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

• Turn the ignition switch on andthen off.

The vehicle can be started using theremote start feature two separatetimes between driving sequences.The engine runs for 10 minutes aftereach remote start. Or, the enginerun time can be extended another10 minutes within the first 10 minuteremote start time frame, and beforethe engine stops.

For example, if Q and then / arepressed again after the vehiclehas been running for five minutes,10 minutes are added, allowingthe engine to run for 15 minutes.

The additional 10 minutes areconsidered a second remote start.

The vehicle must be started with thekey once two remote starts, or asingle remote start with onetime extension has been done.

The vehicle can be started using theremote start feature again afterthe key is removed from the ignition.

The vehicle cannot be startedusing the remote start feature if thekey is in the ignition, the hood isopen, or if there is an emissioncontrol system malfunction.

The engine turns off during a remotestart if the coolant temperaturegets too high or if the oil pressuregets low.

Vehicles that have the remotevehicle start feature are shippedfrom the factory with the remotevehicle start system enabled.The system may be enabled ordisabled through the DIC ifthe vehicle has DIC buttons.See “REMOTE START” underDIC Vehicle Customization(With DIC Buttons) on page 3-67for additional information. If thevehicle does not have DIC buttons,see your dealer/retailer to enableor disable the remote start system.


Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{ CAUTION

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.

• Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if the doorsare not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

• Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock or unlock a door, use thekey from the outside or the door lockfrom the inside.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switches arelocated on the front doors.

" (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Remove the key fromthe ignition and press to lockthe doors.

Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with thepower lock switch and a door or theliftgate is open, the doors willlock five seconds after the last dooris closed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switchtwice or the lock button on theRKE transmitter twice will overridethe delayed locking feature andimmediately lock all the doors.


This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

This feature can be programmedby using the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “DELAY DOORLOCK” under DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons)on page 3-67.

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksVehicles with an automaticlock/unlock feature enable you toprogram the vehicle’s powerdoor locks. This feature can beprogrammed through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DICVehicle Customization (With DICButtons) on page 3-67 for moreinformation.

Rear Door Security LocksThe vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengersfrom opening the rear doors fromthe inside.

Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edgeof each door.

To set the locks, insert a key intothe slot and turn it to the horizontalposition. The door can only beopened from the outside with thedoor unlocked. To return the door tonormal operation, turn the slot tothe vertical position.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature protects you fromlocking the key in the vehicle whenthe key is in the ignition and afront door is open.

If the driver side power door lockswitch is pressed when the driver’sdoor is open and the key is in theignition, all of the doors will lock andthen the driver door will unlock.

If the passenger side power doorlock switch is pressed when the frontpassenger door is open and thekey is in the ignition, all of the doorswill lock and then the frontpassenger door will unlock.


Liftgate

{ CAUTION

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

• Close all of the windows.• Fully open the air outlets

on or under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

• If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 2-30.

If the vehicle has a power liftgate,see Power Liftgate on page 2-11.

To unlock the liftgate, use thepower door lock switch or pressthe door unlock button on theRKE transmitter twice. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-4.

To open the liftgate, press thetouchpad on the underside of theliftgate handle. The vehicle must bein P (Park) to open the liftgate.To close the liftgate, use the pull cupor strap.

The liftgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected or haslow voltage, the liftgate will notopen. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.

If the battery is properly connectedand has adequate voltage, andthe liftgate still will not function,the vehicle should be takento a dealers/retailer for service.


Power LiftgatePower Liftgate Operation

{ CAUTION

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

• Close all of the windows.• Fully open the air outlets

on or under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

• If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.


The vehicle may have a powerliftgate. The vehicle must bein P (Park) to use this feature.

The taillamps will flash and a chimewill sound when the power liftgateis used.

{ CAUTION

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make sure thearea above and behind the liftgateis clear before opening it.


The power liftgate can be poweropened and closed in thefollowing ways:• Press and hold the power liftgate

button on the RKE transmitteruntil the liftgate starts moving.Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-4for more information.

• Press the liftgate button on thecenter console.

• Press the touchpad switch on theoutside liftgate handle.

Pressing the buttons or touchpadswitch a second time while theliftgate is moving reverses thedirection.

The liftgate can also be closedby pressing the power liftgate buttonnext to the liftgate latch. Press thebutton a second time duringliftgate operation to reverse theoperation.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled under extremetemperatures or under low batteryconditions. If this occurs, the liftgatecan still be operated manually.

If the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park) while the power functionis in progress, the liftgate powerfunction will continue to completion.If the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park) and the vehicle acceleratesbefore the power liftgate latchesclosed, the liftgate may reverse tothe open position. Cargo couldfall out of the vehicle. The powerliftgate must be closed and latchedbefore driving.

If the liftgate is power openedand the support struts have lostpressure, the lights will flash anda chime will sound. The liftgate willstay open temporarily, then slowlyclose. See your dealer/retailerfor service before using the liftgateif this occurs.

Obstacle Detection Features

A warning chime will sound and theliftgate will automatically reversedirection to the full closed oropen position if the liftgateencounters an obstacle during apower open or close cycle.

Power Liftgate Button onCenter Console

Power Liftgate Button nearLiftgate Latch


After removing the obstruction, thepower liftgate operation can beused again.

If the liftgate comes across moreobstacles on the same power cycle,the power function deactivates,and you must manually openor close the liftgate. A messagedisplays, LIFTGATE OPEN,to indicate that the liftgate is open.See Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 3-47 for moreinformation. After removing theobstructions, manually openthe liftgate to the full open positionor close the liftgate to the fullyclosed and latched position.The liftgate resumes normal poweroperation.

Pinch sensors are located on theside edges of the liftgate. If anobject is caught between the liftgateand the vehicle and pressesagainst this sensor, the liftgate willreverse direction and open fully.

The liftgate will remain open until itis activated again or closedmanually. Do not force the liftgateopen or closed during a power cycle.

Manual Operation of PowerLiftgate

To change the liftgate to manualoperation, press the switch onthe center console to OFF.

With the power liftgate disabledand all of the doors unlocked,the liftgate can be manually openedand closed.

To open the liftgate, press thetouchpad on the handle onthe outside of the liftgate and lift thegate open. To close the liftgate,use the pull cup to lower the liftgateand close. The liftgate latch willpower close. Always close theliftgate before driving.

If the RKE button or the powerclose button on the liftgate ispressed while power operation isdisabled, the lights will flashthree times, but the liftgate willnot move.

It is not recommended that youdrive with the liftgate open.However, if you must drive with theliftgate open, the liftgate shouldbe set to manual operation bypressing the OFF switch on thecenter console.


Windows

{ CAUTION

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

Power Windows

{ CAUTION

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move.The windows will function andthey could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavekeys in a vehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

The power window controls arelocated on each of the side doors.

The driver door also has switchesthat control the passenger andrear windows. The powerwindows work with the ignition inACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUNor when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 2-21.

Uplevel shown, base similar


Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull up on the front edge ofthe switch to raise the window.

Express-Down WindowsThe express-down feature allowsthe windows to be lowered withoutholding the switch. Press thewindow switch fully and release it toactivate the express-down feature.The express mode can be canceledby pressing or pulling the switch.

Express-Up WindowThe express-up feature allows thewindows to be raised all theway without holding the switch up.Pull the switch up fully and release itto activate the express-up feature.The express-up mode can becanceled by pressing or pulling theswitch.

Programming the PowerWindowsIf the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged, disconnected, orreplaced, windows with theexpress-up feature need to bereprogrammed for this feature towork. To program the window:

1. Close all doors with the ignition inthe ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUNposition, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 2-21.

2. Press and continue to hold thewindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull up and hold the windowswitch to close the window.Continue to hold it briefly afterthe window is fully closed.

4. Repeat for each window that hasthe express-up feature.

Anti-Pinch FeatureThe anti-pinch feature is on windowswith the express-up feature. If anobject is in the way of the window asit is express-closing, or in certainweather conditions like severeicing, the window will stop andopen to a factory preset position.The window functions normally oncethe obstruction is removed.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): Thewindow lockout switch is locatedwith the power window switches onthe driver door armrest. This featureprevents the rear passengerwindows from operating thewindows, except from the driverposition. Press the switch to turnthe lockout feature on or off.An indicator light will come on toshow the lockout feature is on.


Sun VisorsPull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount and slide it alongthe rod from side-to-side to coverthe driver or passenger side ofthe front window. Swing thesun visor to the side to cover theside window. It can be moved alongthe rod from side-to-side in thisposition also.

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorThe vehicle has lighted visor vanitymirrors on both the driver andpassenger sun visors. Pull thesun visor down and lift the mirrorcover to turn the lamps on.

Theft-DeterrentSystemsVehicle theft is big business,especially in some cities.This vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures, however, they do notmake it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentThis vehicle may have a contenttheft-deterrent alarm system.

To activate the theft-deterrentsystem, do one of the following:

• Press Q on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter or thepower door lock switch when anydoor is open.

The security light flashes.

When the door is closed, thesecurity light stops flashing andstays on solid for approximately30 seconds. The content theftdeterrent alarm is not armed untilthe security light goes off.If the delayed locking featureis active, the alarm is notactivated until all doors areclosed and the security lightgoes off.

• Press Q when the driver door isclosed. The security light comeson solid for approximately30 seconds and then goes off.The content theft deterrent alarmis not armed until the securitylight goes off.

The theft-deterrent system will notactivate if the doors are lockedwith the vehicle’s key or the manualdoor lock.

If a locked door is openedwithout using the RKE transmitter,a ten second pre-alarm occurs.


The horn chirps and the lights flash.If the key is not placed in theignition and turned to START or thedoor is not unlocked by pressing Qduring the ten second pre-alarm,the alarm goes off. The headlampsflash and the horn sounds forabout two minutes, then turns off tosave the battery power.

The vehicle can be started with thecorrect ignition key if the alarmhas been set off.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

• Lock the vehicle with the doorkey after the doors are closed.

• Unlock the door with the RKEtransmitter. Unlocking a doorany other way sets off the alarmif the system has been armed.

Press K or place the key inthe ignition and turn it to START toturn off the alarm.

Testing the AlarmTo test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, lowerthe driver side window andopen the driver door.

2. Press Q.

3. Get out of the vehicle, close thedoor and wait for the securitylight to go out.

4. Then reach in through thewindow, unlock the door with themanual door lock and openthe door. This should set off thealarm.

If the alarm does not sound when itshould, but the vehicle’s headlampsflash, check to see if the hornworks. The horn fuse may be blown.To replace the fuse, see Fusesand Circuit Breakers on page 5-88.

If the alarm does not sound orthe vehicle’s headlamps do notflash, see your dealer/retailerfor service.

PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizerThe PASS-Key III+ systemoperates on a radio frequencysubject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry Canada.


1. This device may not causeharmful interference.

2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation.


This device complies with RSS-210of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following twoconditions:




PASS-Key III+ uses a radiofrequency transponder in the keythat matches a decoder in thevehicle.

PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizer OperationThis vehicle has PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed fromthe ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turned toON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY orSTART from the LOCK/OFFposition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light comes on if thereis a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrent system.

When the PASS-Key® III+ systemsenses an incorrect key, the vehicledoes not start. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start thevehicle will be discouraged becauseof the high number of electricalkey codes.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light on the instrumentpanel comes on when trying to startthe vehicle, there may be aproblem with your theft-deterrentsystem. Turn the ignition offand try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key and checkthe fuses. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 5-88 for additionalinformation. If the engine stilldoes not start with the other key,the vehicle needs service.


If the vehicle does start, the firstkey may be faulty. See yourdealer/retailer who can service thePASS-Key® III+ to have a new keymade. In an emergency, contactRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 7-6.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+decoder to learn the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmedto the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programmingadditional keys only. If all thecurrently programmed keys are lostor do not operate, you must seeyour dealer/retailer or a locksmithwho can service PASS-Key® III+ tohave keys made and programmedto the system.

See your dealer/retailer or alocksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new keyblank that is cut exactly as theignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new additional key:

1. Verify that the new key hasa 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmedkey in the ignition and start theengine. If the engine does notstart, see your dealer/retailer forservice.

3. After the engine has started,turn the key to LOCK/OFF,and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmedand turn it to the ON/RUNposition within five seconds ofthe original key being turnedto the LOCK/OFF position.The security light turns off oncethe key has been programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4if additional keys are to beprogrammed.

If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost ordamaged, see your dealer/retaileror a locksmith to have a newkey made.

The SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEM message displays onthe Driver Information Center (DIC)when there is a problem withthe theft-deterrent system.See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-58 for additionalinformation.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.


Starting andOperating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle doesnot need an elaborate break-in.But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow theseguidelines:

• If you have all-wheel drive,keep your speed at 55 mph(88 km/h) or less for thefirst 500 miles (805 km).

• Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 500 miles (805 km).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops forthe first 200 miles (322 km)or so. During this time thenew brake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops with newlinings can mean prematurewear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you getnew brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Towing aTrailer on page 4-24 for thetrailer towing capabilitiesof your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

In order to shift out of P (Park),the ignition must be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY and thebrake pedal must be applied.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switchor break the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the


way in, and turn it only withyour hand. If the key cannot beturned by hand, see yourdealer/retailer.

( (LOCK/OFF): This position locksthe ignition and transmission. Thekey can be removed in LOCK/OFF.

The shift lever must be in P (Park)to turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turningthe key to ACC/ACCESSORY.If this doesn’t work, then the vehicleneeds service.

ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This isthe position in which you canoperate the electrical accessories oritems plugged into the accessorypower outlets. This position unlocksthe ignition and steering wheel.Use this position if the vehicle mustbe pushed or towed.

R (ON/RUN): This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel warning andindicator lights. The switch stays inthis position when the engine isrunning. The transmission isalso unlocked in this position.If you leave the key in theACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNposition with the engine off,the battery could be drained.You may not be able to start thevehicle if the battery is allowedto drain for an extended periodof time.

/ (START): This is the positionthat starts the engine. When theengine starts, release the key.The ignition switch will return toON/RUN for driving.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes afterthe ignition key is turned off:

• Audio System

• Power Windows

• Sunroof (if equipped)

Power to the windows and sunroofwill work up to 10 minutes oruntil a door is opened.

The radio continues to work for10 minutes or until the driver’s dooris opened.

For an additional 10 minutes ofoperation, close all the doors andturn the key to ON/RUN andthen back to LOCK/OFF.

All these features will work whenthe key is in the ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY positions.


Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damagethe transmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator

pedal, turn the ignition to START.When the engine starts, let goof the key. The idle speedwill slow down as the enginewarms. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricateall moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assistsin starting the engine andprotects components. If theignition key is turned to theSTART position, and thenreleased when the enginebegins cranking, the enginewill continue cranking for afew seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does notstart and the key is held inSTART, cranking will be stoppedafter 15 seconds to preventcranking motor damage.To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switchto the ACC/ACCESSORYor LOCK/OFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after5-10 seconds, especially in verycold weather (below 0°F or−18°C), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all theway to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the keyin START for up to a maximumof 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor tocool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and


accelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again,repeat these steps. This clearsthe extra gasoline from theengine. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates.Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer/retailer. If you do not,the engine might not performproperly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Engine Coolant HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heater shouldbe plugged in at least four hoursbefore starting. Some models mayhave an internal thermostat inthe cord which will prevent enginecoolant heater operation attemperatures above 0°F (−18°C).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord islocated on the driver side of theengine compartment. It isrouted around the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ CAUTION

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engineparts. If you do not, it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer/retailerin the area where you will beparking the vehicle for the bestadvice on this.


Automatic TransmissionOperationThe automatic transmission has ashift lever located on the consolebetween the seats.

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ CAUTION

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless you haveto. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, always set theparking brake and move the shiftlever to P (Park). See Shifting IntoPark on page 2-28. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 4-24.

Make sure the shift lever is fullyin P (Park) before starting theengine. The vehicle has anautomatic transmission shift lockcontrol system. You must fully applythe regular brake first and then

press the shift lever button beforeshifting from P (Park) when theignition key is in ON/RUN. If youcannot shift out of P (Park),ease pressure on the shift lever,then push the shift lever all the wayinto P (Park) as you maintainbrake application. Then press theshift lever button and move theshift lever into another gear.See Shifting Out of Park onpage 2-29.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse)only after the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back andforth to get out of snow, ice or sandwithout damaging the transmission,see If Your Vehicle is Stuck inSand, Mud, Ice, or Snow onpage 4-15.


N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect withthe wheels. To restart the enginewhen the vehicle is already moving,use N (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ CAUTION

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift intoa drive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be surethe engine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph(56 km/h), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

Notice: If the vehicle seems toaccelerate slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehiclethat way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away. You can drivein L (Low) when you are drivingless than 35 mph (56 km/h) andD (Drive) for higher speedsuntil then.

L (Low): This position gives youaccess to gear ranges. Thisprovides more engine braking butlower fuel economy than D (Drive).You can use it on very steephills, or in deep snow or mud.

Electronic Range Select(ERS) ModeERS mode allows you to choose thetop-gear limit of the transmissionand the vehicle’s speed whiledriving down hill or towing a trailer.The vehicle has an electronicshift position indicator within theinstrument panel cluster. Whenusing the ERS Mode a number willdisplay next to the L, indicatingthe current gear that has beenselected.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).

2. Press the plus/minus buttonlocated on the shift lever, toincrease or decrease the gearrange available.


When you shift from D (Drive) toL (Low), the transmission will shift toa pre-determined lower gear range.The highest gear available forthis pre-determined range isdisplayed next to the L in the DIC.See Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 3-47 and DICOperation and Displays (With DICButtons) on page 3-47 or DICOperation and Displays (WithoutDIC Buttons) on page 3-53 for moreinformation. The number displayedin the DIC is the highest gearthat the transmission will be allowedto operate in. This means that allgears below that number areavailable. For example, when4 (Fourth) is shown next to the L,1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gearsare automatically shifted by thevehicle. the transmission willnot shift into 5 (Fifth) until the+ (Plus) button is used or you shiftback into D (Drive).

While in L (Low), the transmissionwill prevent shifting to a lowergear range if the engine speed istoo high. You have a brief period oftime to slow the vehicle. If vehiclespeed is not reduced within the timeallowed, the lower gear rangeshift will not be completed. You mustfurther slow the vehicle, thenpress the − (Minus) button to thedesired lower gear range.

Automatic Engine Grade braking isnot available when the ERS isactive. It is available in D (Drive) forboth normal and Tow/Haul mode.While using the ERS, cruise controland the tow/haul mode can beused. See Tow/Haul Mode onpage 2-26 for more information.

Tow/Haul Mode

_ (Tow/Haul): The vehicle mayhave a Tow/Haul mode.

The button is located on theinstrument panel under the climatecontrols.

Push the button to activate thesystem. Push it again to deactivatethe system. You can use thisfeature to assist when towing orhauling a heavy load.

When Tow/Haul is activated theTow/Haul symbol will come on theinstrument panel cluster. See“Tow/Haul Mode” under Towing aTrailer on page 4-24 for moreinformation.


Automatic Engine GradeBrakingAutomatic Engine Grade Brakingassists when driving on a downhillgrade. It maintains vehicle speedby automatically implementinga shift schedule that uses theengine and the transmission toslow the vehicle. The system willautomatically command downshiftsto reduce vehicle speed, untilthe brake pedal is no longer beingpressed.

While in the Electronic RangeSelect (ERS) mode, grade brakingis deactivated, allowing the driverto select a range and limitingthe highest gear available. Gradebraking is available for normaldriving and in Tow/Haul mode.

See Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 2-24.

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down, then pushthe parking brake pedal down.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Lighton page 3-38.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat thebrake system and causepremature wear or damage tobrake system parts. Makesure that the parking brake isfully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

To release the parking brake,hold the regular brake pedal down,then push down momentarily onthe parking brake pedal untilyou feel the pedal release.Slowly pull your foot up off thepark brake pedal. If the parkingbrake is not released when youbegin to drive, the brake systemwarning light will be on and a chimewill sound warning you that theparking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see Towing aTrailer on page 4-24.


Shifting Into Park

{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-24.

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 2-27 formore information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by holding in the button on theshift lever and pushing theshift lever all the way toward thefront of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running,it could overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), holdthe regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shiftlever away from P (Park) withoutfirst pushing the button.

If you can, it means that the shiftlever was not fully locked in P (Park).

Torque LockTorque lock is when the weight ofthe vehicle puts too much forceon the parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shiftingthe transmission into P (Park) isnot done properly and then itis difficult to shift out of P (Park).


To prevent torque lock, set theparking brake and then shift intoP (Park). To find out how, see“Shifting Into Park” listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, yourvehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, soyou can shift out of P (Park).

Shifting Out of ParkThe vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release is designed to:

• Prevent ignition key removalunless the shift lever is in P (Park)with the shift lever button fullyreleased, and

• Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unlessthe ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY and theregular brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case ofan uncharged or low voltage(less than 9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 5-30 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift leverbutton again.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), see yourdealer/retailer.

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ CAUTION

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass, orother things that can burn.


Engine Exhaust

{ CAUTION

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:• The vehicle idles in areas

with poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

• The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

• The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• The vehicle’s exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

• There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

• Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

• Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ CAUTION

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation.For more information, see EngineExhaust on page 2-30.


{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless you haveto. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, always set theparking brake and move the shiftlever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 2-28.

If parking on a hill and pullinga trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 4-24.

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorAdjust the inside rearview mirrorto see clearly behind your vehicle.Hold the mirror in the center to moveit up or down and side to side.Use the day/night adjustment to helpprevent glare from the headlampsbehind you. Move the lever tothe right for nighttime use and to theleft for daytime use.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threeadditional control buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer/retailer for more informationabout OnStar and how to subscribeto it. See OnStar® System onpage 2-41 for more information onthe services OnStar provides.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.

Vehicles with OnStar® havethree additional control buttons forthe OnStar® system. See yourdealer/retailer for more informationabout OnStar® and how to subscribeto it. See OnStar® System onpage 2-41 for more information aboutthe services OnStar® provides.

O (On/Off): Press to turn thedimming feature on or off.

The vehicle may also have a RearVision Camera (RVC). See RearVision Camera (RVC) on page 2-37for more information.

If the vehicle has RVC, the O buttonwill not be available.


Automatic Dimming MirrorOperationAutomatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature comes on and the indicatorlight illuminates each time theignition is turned to start.

Cleaning the MirrorDo not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Outside Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on the driverdoor armrest.

To adjust each mirror:

1. Press (A) or (B) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrowslocated on the control pad toadjust the mirror.

3. Adjust each outside mirror sothat a little of the vehicle andthe area behind it can be seen.

4. Press either (A) or (B) again todeselect the mirror.

Manually fold the mirrors inwardto prevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash.To fold, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward,to return it to the original position.

Using hood-mounted air deflectorsand add-on convex mirrorattachments could decrease mirrorperformance.

Turn Signal IndicatorThe vehicle may have a turn signalindicator lamp that is built intothe mirror housing. The turn signallamp flashes with the use of thevehicle’s turn signal and hazardflashers.


Outside Power FoldawayMirrors

Vehicles with outside powerfoldaway mirrors have the controlslocated on the driver door armrest.

Mirror Adjustment1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out

to the driving position.

2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in tothe folded position.

Resetting the Power FoldawayMirrorsReset the power foldaway mirrors if:

• The mirrors are accidentallyobstructed while folding.

• They are accidentally manuallyfolded/unfolded.

• The mirrors vibrate at normaldriving speeds.

Fold and unfold the mirrors one timeusing the mirror controls to resetthem to their normal position.A popping noise may be heardduring the resetting of the powerfoldaway mirrors. This soundis normal after a manual foldingoperation.

Automatic Dimming FeatureThe driver outside mirror adjusts forthe glare of the headlamps behindyou. See Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror on page 2-31 forinformation on how to turn thisfeature on.

Turn Signal IndicatorThe vehicle may have a turn signalindicator lamp that is built into themirror housing. The turn signal lampflashes with the use of the vehicle’sturn signal and hazard flashers.


Park Tilt MirrorsIf the vehicle has the memorypackage, the outside mirrors have apark tilt feature. This feature tilts theoutside mirrors to a preselectedposition when the vehicle is inR (Reverse). This allows the driver toview the curb for parallel parking.

The passenger and/or driver mirrorreturns to its original positionwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or the ignition is turnedoff or to OFF/LOCK.

This feature can be turned on or offthrough the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons)on page 3-67 and Memory Seatand Mirrors on page 1-6 for moreinformation.

Outside Convex Mirror

{ CAUTION

A convex mirror can make things(like other vehicles) look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror’s surfaceis curved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Outside Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 3-25 for moreinformation.

Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA)For vehicles with the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,it operates at speeds less than5 mph (8 km/h), and assists thedriver with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse).The sensors on the rear bumperare used to detect the distanceto an object up to 8 feet (2.5 m)behind the vehicle, and at least10 inches (25.4 cm) off the ground.


{ CAUTION

The Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system does notreplace driver vision. It cannotdetect:

• objects that are below thebumper, underneath thevehicle, or if they are tooclose or far from the vehicle

• children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

If you do not use proper carebefore and while backing; vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Even with URPA, alwayscheck behind the vehicle beforebacking up. While backing, besure to look for objects and checkthe vehicle’s mirrors.

The display is located in theheadliner and can be seen bylooking over your right shoulder.

URPA uses three color-coded lightsto provide distance and systeminformation.

How the System WorksURPA comes on automaticallywhen the shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). The rear display brieflyilluminates to indicate the systemis working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 5 mph (8 km/h). If the vehicleis above this speed, the red light onthe rear display flashes.

To be detected, objects must be atleast 10 inches (25.4 cm) off theground and below liftgate level.Objects must also be within 8 feet(2.5 m) from the rear bumper.This distance may be less duringwarmer or humid weather.

A single beep sounds the first timean object is detected. Beepingmay occur beginning at 23 inches(0.6 m). Beeping occurs for ashort time when the vehicle is closerthan 23 inches (0.6 m) and againat 1 foot (0.3 m) from the object.


The following describes how the URPA display lights appear as the vehiclegets closer to a detected object:

Description English Metricamber light 8 ft 2.5 m

amber/amber lights 40 in 1.0 mamber/amber/red lights 23 in 0.6 m

amber/amber/red lights flashing 1 ft 0.3 m

The system can be disabledthrough the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “Park Assist”under DIC Operation and Displays(With DIC Buttons) on page 3-47or DIC Operation and Displays(Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-53for more information.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work ProperlyIf the URPA system does notactivate due to a temporarycondition, the message PARKASSIST OFF displays on the DIC

and a red light will be shown on therear URPA display when the shiftlever is moved into R (Reverse).This may occur under the followingconditions:

• The driver disables the system.

• The ultrasonic sensors arenot clean. Keep the vehicle’s rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Washing YourVehicle on page 5-83.

• A trailer was attached to thevehicle, or a bicycle or anobject was hanging out of theliftgate during the last drive cycle,the red light may illuminate inthe rear display. Once theattached object is removed,URPA will return to normaloperation.

• A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

• The vehicle’s bumper isdamaged. Take the vehicle toyour dealer/retailer to repairthe system.

• Other conditions may affectsystem performance, suchas vibrations from a jackhammeror the compression of airbrakes on a very large truck.

If the system is still disabled, afterdriving forward at least 15 mph(25 km/h), take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer.


Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The vehicle may have a Rear VisionCamera system. Read this entiresection before using it.

{ CAUTION

The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)system does not replace drivervision. RVC does not:

• Detect objects that areoutside the camera’s field ofview, below the bumper, orunderneath the vehicle.

• Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Do not back the vehicle by onlylooking at the rear vision camerascreen, or use the screen duringlonger, higher speed backingmaneuvers or where there couldbe cross-traffic. Your judgeddistances using the screen willdiffer from actual distances.

So if you do not use proper carebefore backing up, you could hit avehicle, child, pedestrian, bicyclist,or pet, resulting in vehicledamage, injury, or death. Eventhough the vehicle has the RVCsystem, always check carefullybefore backing up by checkingbehind and around the vehicle.

Vehicles Without NavigationSystemThe rear vision camera systemis designed to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a viewof the area behind the vehicle. Whenthe key is in the ON/RUN positionand the driver shifts the vehicleinto R (Reverse), the video imageautomatically appears on theinside rear view mirror. Once thedriver shifts out of R (Reverse),the video image automaticallydisappears from the insiderear view mirror.


Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem Off or On

To turn off the rear vision camerasystem, press and hold z, locatedon the inside rearview mirror,until the left indicator light turns off.The rear vision camera displayis now disabled.

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on again, press andhold z until the left indicator lightilluminates. The rear vision camerasystem display is now enabledand the display will appear in themirror normally.

Vehicles With NavigationSystemThe rear vision camera systemis designed to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a viewof the area behind the vehicle.

When the driver shifts the vehicleinto R (Reverse), the video imageautomatically appears on thenavigation screen. Once the drivershifts out of R (Reverse), thenavigation screen will go back tothe last screen that had beendisplayed, after a delay.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).

2. Press the MENU button to enterthe configure menu options, thenpress the MENU hard key toselect Display or touch theDisplay screen button.

3. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen displays.

4. Select the Video screen button.When the Video screen button ishighlighted the RVC system is on.

The delay that is received aftershifting out of R (Reverse) isapproximately 10 seconds.The delay can be cancelled byperforming one of the following:

• Pressing a hard key on thenavigation system.

• Shifting in to P (Park).

• Reach a vehicle speed of5 mph (8 km/h).


There is a message on the rearvision camera screen that states“Check Surroundings for Safety”.

Adjusting the Brightness andContrast of the Screen

To adjust the brightness andcontrast of the screen, press theMENU button while the rear visioncamera image is on the display.Any adjustments made will onlyaffect the rear vision camera screen.

] (Brightness): Touch the + (plus)or – (minus) screen buttons toincrease or decrease the brightnessof the screen.

_ (Contrast): Touch the + (plus)or – (minus) screen buttons toincrease or decrease the contrastof the screen.

Symbols

The navigation system may have afeature that lets the driver viewsymbols on the navigation screenwhile using the rear vision camera.The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist(URPA) system must not bedisabled to use the caution symbols.If URPA has been disabled andthe symbols have been turned on,the Rear Parking Assist SymbolsUnavailable error message maydisplay. See Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) on page 2-34.

The symbols appear when an objecthas been detected by the URPAsystem. The symbol may cover theobject when viewing the navigationscreen.

To turn the symbols on or off:

1. Make sure that URPA has notbeen disabled.

2. Shift into P (Park).

3. Press the MENU hard key toenter the configure menuoptions, then press the MENUhard key repeatedly until Displayis selected or touch the Displayscreen button.

4. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen will display.

5. Touch the Symbols screenbutton. The screen button will behighlighted when on.

Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

Service Rear Vision CameraSystem: This message can displaywhen the system is not receivinginformation it requires from othervehicle systems.

If any other problem occurs orif a problem persists, see yourdealer/retailer.


Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is located above thelicense plate.

The area displayed by the camerais limited and does not displayobjects that are close to eithercorner or under the bumper.The area displayed can varydepending on vehicle orientation orroad conditions. The distance ofthe image that appears on thescreen differs from the actualdistance.

The following illustration shows thefield of view that the camera provides.

A. View displayed by the camera.B. Corner of the rear bumper.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work ProperlyThe rear vision camera systemmight not work properly or displaya clear image if:• The RVC is turned off.

See “Turning the Rear CameraSystem On or Off” earlier inthis section.

• It is dark.• The sun or the beam of

headlights is shining directlyinto the camera lens.

• Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it with water,and wipe it with a soft cloth.

• The back of the vehicle is in anaccident, the position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera can beaffected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer/retailer.

• There are extreme temperaturechanges.


The rear vision camera systemdisplay in the rearview mirror mayturn off or not appear as expecteddue to one of the followingconditions. If this occurs the leftindicator light on the mirror will flash.

• A slow flash may indicate a loss ofvideo signal, or no video signalpresent during the reverse cycle.

• A fast flash may indicate thatthe display has been on for themaximum allowable time during areverse cycle, or the display hasreached an Over Temperaturelimit.The fast flash conditions are usedto protect the video device fromhigh temperature conditions.Once conditions return to normalthe device will reset and the greenindicator will stop flashing.

During any of these fault conditions,the display will be blank and theindicator will continue to flashas long as the vehicle is inR (Reverse) or until the conditionsreturn to normal.

Pressing and holding z when theleft indicator light is flashing willturn off the video display along withthe left indicator light.

OnStar® System

OnStar uses several innovativetechnologies and live advisors toprovide a wide range of safety,security, information, andconvenience services. If the airbagsdeploy, the system is designed tomake an automatic call to OnStarEmergency advisors who canrequest emergency services be sentto your location. If the keys arelocked in the vehicle, call OnStarat 1-888-4-ONSTAR to have asignal sent to unlock the doors.OnStar Hands-Free Calling,including 30 trial minutes good for60 days, is available on mostvehicles. OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation service, with one trialroute, is available on most vehicles.


Press the OnStar button to have anOnStar advisor contact RoadsideService.

OnStar service is provided subjectto the OnStar Terms and Conditionsincluded in the OnStar Subscriberglove box literature.

Some services such as RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance may not beavailable until the owner of thevehicle registers with OnStar.After the first prepaid year, contactOnStar to select a monthly orannual subscription payment plan.If a payment plan is not selected,the OnStar system and all services,including airbag notification andemergency services, may bedeactivated and no longer available.For more information visitonstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca(Canada), or press the OnStarbutton to speak with an advisor.

Not all OnStar services are availableon all vehicles. To check if thisvehicle is able to provide theservices described below, or for afull description of OnStar servicesand system limitations, see theOnStar Owner’s Guide in theglove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.)or onstar.ca (Canada), contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY1-877-248-2080, or press theOnStar button to speak with anOnStar advisor 24 hours a day,7 days a week.

OnStar Services Available withthe Safe & Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag

Deployment

• Advanced Automatic CrashNotification (AACN) (If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle LocationAssistance

• Remote Door Unlock/VehicleAlert

• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email

• GM Goodwrench On DemandDiagnostics

• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with30 trial minutes

• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

OnStar Services Included withDirections & Connections Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation(If equipped) or DrivingDirections - Advisor delivered

• RideAssist

• Information and ConvenienceServices


OnStar Hands-Free CallingOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowseligible OnStar subscribers tomake and receive calls using voicecommands. Hands-Free Callingis fully integrated into the vehicle,and can be used with OnStarPre-Paid Minute Packages. Mostvehicles include 30 trial minutesgood for 60 days. Hands-FreeCalling can also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan in theU.S. or a Bell Mobility serviceplan in Canada, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer tothe OnStar Owner’s Guide inthe vehicle’s glove box, visitonstar.com or onstar.ca, or speakwith an OnStar advisor by pressingthe OnStar button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigationVehicles with the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation systemcan provide voice-guided drivingdirections. Press the OnStar buttonto have an OnStar advisor locatea business or address and downloaddriving directions to the vehicle.Voice-guided directions to thedesired destination will play throughthe audio system speakers.See the OnStar Owner’s Guide formore information.

OnStar Virtual AdvisorOnStar Virtual Advisor is a featureof OnStar Hands-Free Callingthat uses minutes to accesslocation-based weather, local trafficreports, and stock quotes. Pressthe phone button and give afew simple voice commands tobrowse through the various topics.

See the OnStar Owner’sGuide for more information.This feature is only available inthe continental U.S.

OnStar Steering WheelControlsThis vehicle may have a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used tointeract with OnStar Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering WheelControls on page 3-128 for moreinformation.

On some vehicles, the mute buttoncan be used to dial numbersinto voice mail systems, or todial phone extensions. See theOnStar Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.


How OnStar Service WorksThe OnStar system can recordand transmit vehicle information.This information is automaticallysent to an OnStar Call Center whenthe OnStar button is pressed, theemergency button is pressed,or if the airbags or AACN systemdeploy. This information usuallyincludes the vehicle’s GPS locationand, in the event of a crash,additional information regardingthe crash that the vehicle wasinvolved in (e.g. the direction fromwhich the vehicle was hit). When theVirtual Advisor feature of OnStarHands-Free Calling is used,the vehicle also sends OnStar thevehicle’s GPS location so theycan provide services whereit is located.

OnStar service cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area. OnStar service alsocannot work unless the vehicle is ina place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar has hired forthat area has coverage, networkcapacity and reception whenthe service is needed, andtechnology that is compatible withthe OnStar service. Not all servicesare available everywhere,particularly in remote or enclosedareas, or at all times.

Location information about thevehicle is only available if the GPSsatellite signals are unobstructedand available.

The vehicle must have a workingelectrical system, includingadequate battery power, for theOnStar equipment to operate.

There are other problems OnStarcannot control that may preventOnStar from providing OnStarservice at any particular time orplace. Some examples are damageto important parts of the vehiclein a crash, hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather or wireless phonenetwork congestion.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar advisor cannot be heard.If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system may notbe functioning properly. Pressthe OnStar button and request avehicle diagnostic. If the lightappears clear (no light is appearing),your OnStar subscription hasexpired and all services have beendeactivated. Press the OnStarbutton to confirm that the OnStarequipment is active.


Universal HomeRemote SystemThe Universal Home RemoteSystem provides a way toreplace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmittersused to activate devices suchas garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.




This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:




Universal Home RemoteSystem Operation

If there is one triangular LightEmitting Diode (LED) indicator lightabove the Universal HomeRemote buttons, follow theinstructions below.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activate devicessuch as garage door openers,security systems, and homeautomation devices.


Do not use the Universal HomeRemote with any garage dooropener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includesany garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to programthe Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved,it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in theprogramming the Universal HomeRemote.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future UniversalHome Remote programming.It is also recommended thatupon the sale of the vehicle, theprogrammed Universal HomeRemote buttons should be erasedfor security purposes. See “ErasingUniversal Home Remote Buttons”later in this section.

When programming a garage door,park outside of the garage. Parkdirectly in line with and facing thegarage door opener motor-heador gate motor-head. Be surethat people and objects are clear ofthe garage door or gate that isbeing programmed.

It is recommended that a newbattery be installed in yourhand-held transmitter for quickerand more accurate transmission ofthe radio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalHome Remote SystemFor questions or help programmingthe Universal Home Remote System,call 1-800-355-3515 or go towww.homelink.com.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions,so read the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the devicewill time out and the procedure willhave to be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, pressand hold down the two outsidebuttons at the same time,releasing only when theUniversal Home Remote indicatorlight begins to flash, after20 seconds. This step will erasethe factory settings or allpreviously programmed buttons.Do not hold down the buttonsfor longer than 30 secondsand do not repeat this step toprogram the remaining twoUniversal Home Remote buttons.


2. Hold the end of your hand-heldtransmitter about 1 to 3 inches(3 to 8 cm) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttonswhile keeping the indicatorlight in view. The hand-heldtransmitter was supplied by themanufacturer of your garage dooropener receiver (motor head unit).

3. At the same time, press and holdboth the Universal Home Remotebutton to be used to controlthe garage door and thehand-held transmitter button.Do not release the UniversalHome Remote button orthe hand-held transmitter buttonuntil Step 4 has been completed.Some entry gates and garagedoor openers may requiresubstitution of Step 3 with theprocedure noted in “GateOperator and CanadianProgramming” later in thissection.

4. The indicator light on theUniversal Home Remotewill flash slowly at first and thenrapidly after Universal HomeRemote successfully receivesthe frequency signal fromthe hand-held transmitter.Release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trainedUniversal Home Remote buttonand observe the indicator light.If the indicator light stays oncontinuously, the programmingis complete and the garagedoor should move when theUniversal Home Remote buttonis pressed and released.There is no need to continueprogramming Steps 6 through 8.If the Universal Home Remoteindicator light blinks rapidlyfor two seconds and then turnsto a constant light, continuewith the programming Steps 6through 8.

It may be helpful to have anotherperson assist with the remainingsteps.

6. After Steps 1 through 5 havebeen completed, locate insidethe garage the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit). Locate the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name andcolor of the button may varyby manufacturer.

7. Firmly press and release the“Learn” or “Smart” button.After you press this button,you will have 30 secondsto complete Step 8.


8. Immediately return to the vehicle.Firmly press and hold theUniversal Home Remote button,chosen in Step 3 to controlthe garage door, for two seconds,and then release it. If thegarage door does not move,press and hold the same buttona second time for two seconds,and then release it. Again, ifthe door does not move, pressand hold the same button a thirdtime for two seconds, andthen release.The Universal Home Remoteshould now activate thegarage door.

To program the remainingtwo Universal Home Remotebuttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming the Universal HomeRemote System.” Do not repeatStep 1, as this will erase all previousprogramming from the UniversalHome Remote buttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingIf you have questions or need helpprogramming the UniversalHome Remote System, call1-800-355-3515 or go towww.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency lawsrequire transmitter signals to timeout or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not belong enough for Universal HomeRemote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly,some U.S. gate operators aremanufactured to time out in thesame manner.

If you live in Canada, or you arehaving difficulty programming a gateoperator or garage door openerby using the “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote”procedures, regardless of where

you live, replace Step 3 under“Programming Universal HomeRemote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold theUniversal Home Remote buttonwhile you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-heldtransmitter button until the frequencysignal has been successfullyaccepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal HomeRemote indicator light will flashslowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under“Programming Universal HomeRemote” to complete.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriateUniversal Home Remote buttonfor at least half of a second.The indicator light will come onwhile the signal is being transmitted.


Erasing Universal HomeRemote ButtonsThe programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is soldor the lease ends.

To erase all programmed buttons onthe Universal Home Remote device:

1. Press and hold down thetwo outside buttons untilthe indicator light begins to flash,after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Home RemoteButtonTo reprogram any of the threeUniversal Home Remote buttons,repeat the programming instructionsearlier in this section, beginningwith Step 2.

For help or information on theUniversal Home Remote System,call the customer assistance phonenumber under Customer AssistanceOffices on page 7-5.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxLift the glove box handle up toopen it. Use the key to lock andunlock the glove box.

CupholdersThere are two cupholders, withremovable liners, located in front ofthe center console. There may becupholders located in the second rowseat armrest. To access, pull thearmrest down. There are additionalcupholders located on each side ofthe third row seat and in each door.There may be cupholders located atthe rear of the center console.To access, pull the handle down.

Instrument Panel StorageThis vehicle has an instrument panelstorage area located above theradio. To open the cover, press thebutton.


Center Console Storage

Pull up on the lever, located on thefront of the center consolearmrest, to slide it forward andbackward. To open the armreststorage area, press the buttonlocated on the front of the armrest.There is additional storage underthe armrest. Move the armrestall the way to the rear position,slide the cover back and removethe tray.

Second Row CenterConsole

For vehicles with a second rowcenter console, open each area toaccess the storage compartmentinside.

To access the upper storage area,press the upper button (B) andlift up. To access the lower storagearea, press the lower button (C)and lift up. The top of the consolecan be folded forward for increasedstorage area. Lift up on handleon the rear of the console (A) andpull forward.


{ CAUTION

Never open more than one of thethree latches at a time to helpavoid personal injury and damageto the console.

Notice: Slide the front consoleas far forward as it will go beforefolding the second row consoleforward to help prevent damageto the consoles.

Floor MatsIf the floor mat has a snap retainer,a grommet in the driver sidefloor mat attaches to a hook on thefloor of the vehicle to secure thefloor mat. To remove the floor mat,pull the mat towards the rear ofthe vehicle until the grommet can beremoved from the hook.

If the floor mat has a knob retainer,a grommet in the floor matattaches to a knob on the floor ofthe vehicle to secure the floormat. To remove the floor mat,turn the knob till it is alignedwith the slot in the floor matgrommet and pull the floor mat up.To reinstall, center the slot inthe floor mat grommet with the knobon the floor and set the mat inplace. Then turn the knob until it isperpendicular to the slot in thegrommet to lock the mat in place.

Luggage Carrier

{ CAUTION

If something is carried on topof the vehicle that is longeror wider than the luggagecarrier — like paneling, plywood,or a mattress — the wind cancatch it while the vehicle is beingdriven. This can cause a driver tolose control. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collision,and damage the vehicle. Itemsmay be carried inside. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the luggage carrier on top ofthe vehicle.

The luggage carrier allows theloading of things on top of thevehicle. Crossrails are available atyour dealer/retailer.


Notice: Loading cargo on theluggage carrier that weighs morethan 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangsover the rear or sides of thevehicle can damage the vehicle.Load cargo so that it rests asfar forward as possible andagainst the side rails, makingsure to fasten it securely.

Do not exceed the maximum vehiclecapacity when loading the vehicle.For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-16.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhile driving, check to make surethe cargo is still securely fastened.

Rear Seat ArmrestVehicles with a rear seat armrest,have two cupholders. Pull thearmrest down from the rearseatback to access the cupholders.

Convenience NetUse the convenience net, located inthe rear, to store small loads asfar forward as possible. The netshould not be used to store heavyloads.

Cargo CoverFor vehicles with a cargo cover,it can be used to cover items inthe rear of the vehicle. To installthe cover, place the loops oneach corner of the cover on thefour hooks in the rear of thevehicle. The cover should bestored securely when not in use.

Cargo Tie DownsFour cargo tie-downs are locatedin the rear compartment of thevehicle. The tie-downs can be usedto secure small loads.

Cargo ManagementSystemThis vehicle has one of these cargomanagement systems located inthe rear of the vehicle.

To open, pull the handle towardthe rear of the vehicle and lift thecover up.

Cargo Management System witha Removable Storage Area


There is an additional storagecompartment on each side of thesystem. To open, unlatch and liftthe panel up.

To remove the cargo managementsystem:

1. Open the cover. It remains openwhen lifted.

2. Remove the side panels andplace inside.

3. Loosen the retaining nuts oneach side of the system byturning them counterclockwise.

4. Close the cover.

5. Pull up on the system by usingthe built in handles and removeit from the vehicle.

To remove the cargo managementcover:

1. Open the cover. It remains openwhen lifted.

2. Pull the cover up making sure tounhook the hinges at the rear ofthe cover.

{ CAUTION

An improperly latched and closedcargo cover, or cargo cover leftin the open position, could bethrown about the vehicle during acollision or sudden maneuver.Someone could be injured.Be sure to return the cover to theclosed position and latch beforedriving. If the cover is removed,always store it outside of thevehicle. When it is replaced,always be sure that it is securelyreattached.

3. Remove the cover from thevehicle and store outside ofthe vehicle.

Cargo Management System witha Removable Cover


SunroofThe vehicle may have a sunroofover the front seats and a rearsunroof over the second row seats.The rear sunroof does not open.The switches to operate thefront sunroof and rear sunshadeare located on the headlinerabove the rearview mirror.The ignition must be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY to operatethe sunroof. See Ignition Positionson page 2-20.

Vent: From the closed position,press and hold the front of the driverside switch to vent the sunroof.Press and hold the rear of the driverside switch to close the sunroof.

Express-open/Express-close:From the closed position, press andrelease the rear of the driver sideswitch to express-open the sunroof.Press and release the front ofthe driver side switch toexpress-close the sunroof.

The front sunshade must be openedand closed manually. Push up onthe sunshade handle to open thesunshade.

Notice: The rear sunshade couldbe damaged if you attempt toopen or close it manually. Do notmanually open or close the rearsunshade.

To open the rear sunshade,located over the second row seats,press and release the rear of thepassenger side switch. Press andrelease the front of the switch toclose the sunshade.


Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel OverviewInstrument Panel Overview .....3-4Hazard Warning Flashers .......3-5Horn ....................................3-5Tilt and TelescopicSteering Wheel ...................3-6

Turn Signal/MultifunctionLever .................................3-6

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals ...............................3-6

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger .............................3-7

Flash-to-Pass ........................3-7Windshield Wipers .................3-7Windshield Washer ................3-8Rear Window Wiper/Washer ....3-9Cruise Control ......................3-9Exterior Lamps ....................3-11Delayed Headlamps .............3-12Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)/AutomaticHeadlamp System ..............3-12

Fog Lamps .........................3-13

Instrument Panel Brightness ...3-13Courtesy Lamps ..................3-13Dome Lamps ......................3-14Dome Lamp Override ...........3-14Entry Lighting ......................3-14Delayed Entry Lighting .........3-14Delayed Exit Lighting ...........3-15Parade Dimming ..................3-15Reading Lamps ...................3-15Electric PowerManagement .....................3-15

Battery Run-DownProtection .........................3-16

Head-Up Display (HUD) ........3-16Accessory Power Outlet(s) .....3-20Power Outlet 115 VoltAlternating Current .............3-21

Climate ControlsClimate Control System ........3-22Dual Automatic ClimateControl System ..................3-25

Outlet Adjustment ................3-30Rear Air Conditioning andHeating System .................3-31

Rear Air Conditioning andHeating System andElectronic ClimateControls ............................3-32

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gages,and Indicators ...................3-33

Instrument Panel Cluster .......3-34Speedometer andOdometer .........................3-35

Tachometer ........................3-35Safety Belt Reminders ..........3-35Airbag Readiness Light .........3-36Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator ...........................3-36

Charging System Light .........3-37Voltmeter Gage ...................3-38Brake System WarningLight ................................3-38

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light ...........3-39

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ....3-40Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light ....................3-40

Engine CoolantTemperature Gage .............3-41

Tire Pressure Light ..............3-41MalfunctionIndicator Lamp ..................3-42

Oil Pressure Light ................3-44Security Light ......................3-45

Instrument Panel 3-1

Fog Lamp Light ...................3-45Cruise Control Light .............3-45Highbeam On Light ..............3-46Tow/Haul Mode Light ...........3-46Fuel Gage ..........................3-46

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Driver InformationCenter (DIC) .....................3-47

DIC Operation and Displays(With DIC Buttons) .............3-47

DIC Operation and Displays(Without DIC Buttons) .........3-53

DIC Compass .....................3-56DIC Warnings andMessages .........................3-58

DIC Vehicle Customization(With DIC Buttons) ..............3-67

Audio System(s)Audio System(s) ..................3-76Setting the Clock .................3-76Radio(s) .............................3-77Using an MP3(Radio with CD) .................3-94

Using an MP3 (Radio withCD and DVD Player) ..........3-99

XM Radio Messages ..........3-104Navigation/Radio System .....3-105Bluetooth® ........................3-105Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System ..................3-116

Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ......3-125Rear AudioController (RAC) ...............3-127

Theft-Deterrent Feature .......3-127Audio Steering WheelControls ..........................3-128

Radio Reception ................3-128Multi-Band Antenna ............3-129

3-2 Instrument Panel

✍ NOTES


Instrument Panel Overview


The main components of theinstrument panel are listed here:A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-30.B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

on page 3-6. Windshield Wiperson page 3-7.

C. Instrument Panel Cluster onpage 3-34.

D. Head-Up Display (HUD) onpage 3-16 (If Equipped).

E. Audio System(s) on page 3-76.Navigation/Radio System onpage 3-105 (If Equipped).

F. Exterior Lamps on page 3-11.G. Hood Release on page 5-11.H. Dome Lamp Override on

page 3-14. Instrument PanelBrightness on page 3-13.Windshield Washer on page 3-8(If Equipped).

I. Cruise Control on page 3-9.J. Tilt and Telescopic Steering

Wheel on page 3-6.K. Horn on page 3-5.

L. Audio Steering Wheel Controlson page 3-128.

M. Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 3-47.

N. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 3-25.

O. Center Console Shift Lever(If Equipped). See “Console ShiftLever” under Shifting Into Parkon page 2-28.

P. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 3-5.

Q. Cupholders on page 2-49.R. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on

page 3-20.S. Rear Window Wiper/Washer

on page 3-9. Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Disable Button.See StabiliTrak® System onpage 4-5. Tow/Haul Modeon page 2-26 (If Equipped).Power Liftgate on page 2-11(If Equipped).

T. Heated Seats on page 1-5(If Equipped).

U. Passenger Air Bag statusIndicator. See PassengerSensing System on page 1-57.

V. Glove Box on page 2-49.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| Hazard Warning Flasher: Pressthis button located on the instrumentpanel below the audio system, tomake the front and rear turn signallamps flash on and off. This warnsothers that you are having trouble.Press again to turn the flashers off.

The turn signals do not work whilethe hazard warning flashers are on.

HornPress near or on the horn symbolson the steering wheel pad to soundthe horn.


Tilt and TelescopicSteering WheelThe steering wheel can be adjusted.

The adjustment lever is located onthe left side of the steering column.

Pull the lever down to move thesteering wheel up or down and inor out. Pull the lever up to lockthe steering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Turn Signal/MultifunctionLever

The lever on the left side of thesteering column includes thefollowing:

G : Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

N : Windshield Wipers

L : Windshield Washer

Flash-to-Pass Feature.

Information for these features is onthe pages following.

For information on the headlamps,see Exterior Lamps on page 3-11.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, the turnsignal flashes three times.The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidlyor does not come on, a signal bulbmight be burned out.Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 5-88.


Turn Signal On ChimeIf either one of the turn signals areleft on and the vehicle has beendriven more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km),a chime will sound.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

23 Headlamp High/LowBeam Changer: Push the turnsignal/multifunction lever awayfrom you to turn the high beams on.

Pull the lever towards you to return tolow beams.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassWith the turn signal lever in thelow-beam position, pull the levertoward you momentarily to switchto high-beam, to signal that youare going to pass.

If the headlamps are on, they willreturn to low-beam when the leveris released.

For vehicles with High IntensityDischarge (HID) headlamps, theflash-to-pass feature does not workwhile the Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) are on.

Windshield WipersThe windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the right side of thesteering column.

Turn the band with the wiper symbolto control the windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Turn the band to mistfor a single wiping cycle and thenrelease. The wipers stop after onewipe. Hold the band on 8 longer,for more wipe cycles.

9 (Off): Turns the wipers off.

6 (Delay): Adjusts the delay time.The delay between wiping cyclesbecomes shorter as the bandis moved to the top of the lever.

1 (Low Speed): For steady wipingat low speed.

2 (High Speed): For steady wipingat high speed.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If theblades are frozen to the windshield,gently loosen or thaw them. If theybecome damaged, install new bladesor blade inserts. See WindshieldWiper Blade Replacement onpage 5-36.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewipers. A circuit breaker stops themuntil the motor cools.


Windshield Washer

J (Washer Fluid): Press thebutton located at the end of theturn signal/multifunction lever, tospray washer fluid on the windshield.The wipers clear the windshield andeither stop or return to the presetspeed. The ignition key must be inACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNfor this to work. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-26Windshield Washer Fluid.

{ CAUTION

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUIDis displayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) when the washer fluidis low. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-58.

Heated Windshield Washer

For vehicles with the heatedwindshield washer fluid system,it helps to clear ice, snow, tree sap,or bugs from the windshield.This feature only works withthe front wiper system.

The button is located to the leftof the steering column below theinstrument panel brightnesscontrol knob.

Press the heated washer fluid buttonto activate the heated windshieldwasher fluid system. This activationbegins four heated wash/wipecycles. The first heated wash/wipe

cycle can take up to 40 secondsto occur, depending on outsidetemperature. After the first wash/wipe cycle, it can take up to20 seconds for each of the remainingcycles. The system turns offautomatically after four wipe cyclesor the button can be pressed againto turn it off.

Under certain outside temperatureconditions, steam might flowout of the washer nozzles for ashort period of time before washerfluid is sprayed. This is normal.

HEATING WASH FLUID WASHWIPES PENDING is displayed onthe DIC when the washer system isheating the fluid. WASHER FLUIDLOW ADD FLUID is displayed whenthe washer fluid is low. See DICWarnings and Messages onpage 3-58.


Rear Window Wiper/WasherThe rear wiper and rear washbutton is located on the instrumentpanel below the climate controlsystem.

Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn therear wiper on and off. The wiperspeed cannot be changed.

Y (Wash): Press to spray washerfluid on the rear window. The windowwiper will also come on. Release thebutton when enough fluid has beensprayed on the window. The rearwiper will run a few more cyclesafter it is released. If the rear wiperfunction was already on, prior topressing the wash button, it stayson until the wiper button is pressedagain.

The rear window washer uses thesame fluid that is in the windshieldwasher reservoir. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-26.

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, a speed of about25 mph (40 km/h) or more can bemaintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 25 mph (40 km/h).

When the brakes are applied, thecruise control is disengaged.

{ CAUTION

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

The cruise control buttons arelocated on left side of the steeringwheel.

T (On/Off): Press to turn cruisecontrol on and off. The indicatorcomes on when cruise control is on.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press to make the vehicle accelerateor resume to a previously set speed.

SET– : Press to set the speed ormake the vehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruisecontrol.


Setting Cruise ControlCruise control will not work if theparking brake is set, or if the mastercylinder brake fluid level is low.The cruise control light on theinstrument panel cluster comeson after the cruise control hasbeen set to the desired speed.

{ CAUTION

If you leave your cruise controlon when you are not using cruise,you might hit a button and go intocruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruisecontrol switch off until you wantto use cruise control.

1. Press the I button.2. Get up to the speed desired.3. Press and release the

SET– button located onthe steering wheel.

4. Take your foot off theaccelerator.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged. But it does not needto be reset.

Once the vehicle speed is 25 mph(40 km/h) or greater, press the+RES button on the steering wheel.The vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

There are two ways to increase thevehicle speed while using cruisecontrol:

• Press and hold the +RES buttonon the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached,then release it.

• To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, press the+RES button briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

There are two ways to reduce thevehicle speed while using cruisecontrol:

• Press and hold the SET– buttonon the steering wheel until thelower speed desired is reached,then release it.

• To slow down in very smallamounts, press the SET– buttonbriefly. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1 mph(1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal,the vehicle will slow down to thepreviously set cruise speed.


Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control will workon hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steephills, you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When going downhill,you might have to brake or shift to alower gear to keep the vehicle speeddown. When the brakes are appliedthe cruise control is disengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.

• Press the [ button.

• Press the T button.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speedmemory is erased when the cruisecontrol or the ignition is turned off.

Exterior Lamps

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to the leftof the steering wheel.

It controls the following systems:

• Headlamps

• Taillamps

• Parking Lamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

• Fog Lamps

The exterior lamps control has fourpositions:

9 (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic light controloff or on again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns theheadlamps on automatically atnormal brightness, together withthe following:

• Parking Lamps

• Taillamps



; (Parking Lamps): Turns theparking lamps on together with thefollowing:

• Taillamps




2 (Headlamps): Turns theheadlamps on together withthe following lamps listed below.A warning chime sounds if thedriver’s door is opened whenthe ignition switch is off andthe headlamps are on.

• Parking Lamps

• Taillamps



# (Fog Lamps): Push the foglamps control in to turn on the foglamps.

See Fog Lamps on page 3-13.

Delayed HeadlampsDelayed headlamps provide aperiod of exterior lighting as youleave the area around your vehicle.This feature is activated when theheadlamps are on due to theautomatic headlamps control feature,and when the ignition is turned off.The headlamps remain on until theexterior lamps control is moved tothe parking lamps position or untilthe pre-selected delayed headlamplighting period has ended.

If the ignition is turned off with theheadlamps switch in the parkinglamps or headlamps position, thedelayed headlamps cycle will notoccur.

To disable the delayed headlampsfeature or change the time of delay,see DIC Vehicle Customization(With DIC Buttons) on page 3-67.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)/AutomaticHeadlamp SystemDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system makes either thelow-beam headlamps come on ata reduced brightness or the DRLlights, for vehicles with High IntensityDischarge (HID) headlamps whenthe following conditions are met:

• The ignition is in the ON/RUNposition.

• The exterior lamps control isin AUTO.

• The engine is running.


When the DRL are on, the regularheadlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,and other lamps will not be on.The instrument panel and clusterwill also not be lit.

For vehicles with HID headlamps,if the DRL are on and the left or rightturn signal lamp is turned on, theleft or right DRL will go off.

The headlamps automaticallychange from DRL to the regularheadlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings.The other lamps that come onwith the headlamps will alsocome on.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will go off andthe DRL will come on.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Do not cover the light sensor ontop of the instrument panel becauseit works with the DRL.

Fog LampsUse the fog lamps for better visionin foggy or misty conditions.

The fog lamps button is located onthe exterior lamps control to theleft of the steering column.

# (Fog Lamps): Press the exteriorlamps button to turn the fog lampson or off. A light comes on in theinstrument panel cluster when thefog lamps are in use. The ignitionmust be on for the fog lamps to work.

When the headlamps are changedto high-beam, the fog lamps willturn off. The fog lamps come backon again when the high-beamheadlamps are turned off.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to beon along with the fog lamps.

Instrument PanelBrightnessD (Instrument Panel Brightness):The knob with this symbol on it islocated next to the exterior lampscontrol to the left of the steeringwheel. Push the knob in all the wayuntil it extends out and then turn theknob clockwise or counterclockwiseto brighten or dim the lights. Push theknob back in when finished.

Courtesy LampsWhen a door is opened, thecourtesy lamps automaticallycome on. They make it easierwhen entering and exiting thevehicle. The lamps can also beturned on manually by fully turningthe instrument panel brightnesscontrol clockwise.

The reading lamps, located onthe headliner above the rearviewmirror, can be turned on or offindependent of the automaticcourtesy lamps, when the doorsare closed.


Dome LampsThe dome lamps automaticallycome on when a door is opened,unless the dome lamp overridebutton is pressed in.

The lamps can also be turned onand off by turning the instrumentpanel brightness control clockwiseto the farthest position.

Dome Lamp OverrideThe dome lamp override button islocated next to the exterior lampscontrol.

The dome lamp override sets thedome lamps to remain off or come onautomatically when a door is opened.

E (Dome Lamp Override): Pressthe button in and the dome lampsremain off when a door is opened.Press the button again to return itto the extended position so that thedome lamps come on when a dooris opened.

Entry LightingFor vehicles with courtesy lamps,they come on and stay on for a settime whenever the unlock symbolis pressed on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehiclehas one.If a door is opened, the lamps stayon while it is open and then turn offautomatically about 20 seconds afterthe door is closed. If the unlocksymbol is pressed and no door isopened, the lamps turn off afterabout 20 seconds.Entry lighting includes a featurecalled theater dimming. With theaterdimming, the lamps do not turn offat the end of the delay time. Instead,they slowly dim and then go out.The delay time is canceled if theignition key is turned to ON/RUNor the power door lock switchis pressed. The lamps will dimright away.When the ignition is on, illuminatedentry is inactive, which means thecourtesy lamps will not come onunless a door is opened.

Delayed Entry LightingDelayed entry lighting illuminatesthe interior for a period of time afterall the doors have been closed.

The ignition must be off for delayedentry lighting to work. Immediatelyafter all the doors have been closed,the delayed entry lighting featurecontinues to work until one of thefollowing occurs:

• The ignition is in ON/RUN.

• The doors are locked.

• An illumination period of about25 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination perioda door is opened, the timedillumination period is canceledand the interior lamps remain on.


Delayed Exit LightingThis feature illuminates the interiorfor a period of time after the keyis removed from the ignition.

The ignition must be off for delayedexit lighting to work. When the keyis removed, interior illuminationactivates and remains on untilone of the following occurs:

• The ignition is in ON/RUN.

• The power door locks areactivated.

• An illumination period of20 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination perioda door is opened, the timedillumination period will be canceledand the interior lamps will remainon because a door is open.

Parade DimmingParade mode automatically prohibitsthe dimming of the instrument paneldisplays during the daylight whilethe headlamps are on so that thedisplays are still able to be seen.

Reading LampsThe vehicle has reading lamps thatalso act as the dome lamp. Pressthe button to turn them on and off.

Electric PowerManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery’s temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery’s state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.

When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to preventovercharging. If the vehicle has avoltmeter gage or a voltage displayon the Driver Information Center(DIC), you may see the voltage moveup or down. This is normal. If there isa problem, an alert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles. Thisis because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough atidle to produce all the power that isneeded for very high electrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on,such as: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.


EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It doesthis by balancing the generator’soutput and the vehicle’s electricalneeds. It can increase engineidle speed to generate more power,whenever needed. It can temporarilyreduce the power demands ofsome accessories.

Normally, these actions occurin steps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable tothe driver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If this message is displayed, it isrecommended that the driver reducethe electrical loads as much aspossible. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-58.

Battery Run-DownProtectionThis feature helps preventthe battery from being drained,if the interior courtesy lamps,reading/map lamps, visor vanitylamps or trunk lamp are accidentallyleft on. If any of these lamps are lefton, they automatically turn off after10 minutes, if the ignition is off. Thelamps will not come back on againuntil one of the following occurs:

• The ignition is turned on.

• The exterior lamps control isturned off, then on again.

The headlamps will timeout after10 minutes, if they are manuallyturned on with the ignition on or off.

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{ CAUTION

If the HUD image is too brightor too high in your field of view,it may take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.

For vehicles with the Head-UpDisplay (HUD), some informationconcerning the operation ofthe vehicle is projected ontothe windshield. This includesthe speedometer reading, RPMreading, transmission position,outside air temperature, the tapshift gear, and a brief display ofthe current radio station, includingXM information or CD track.


It will also display turn-by-turnnavigation information if the vehiclehas a navigation radio. The imagesare projected by the HUD lenslocated on the driver’s side of theinstrument panel.

The tap shift gear will also appearon the HUD if the vehicle has tapshift and it is active.

The HUD information can bedisplayed in one of three languages,English, French, or Spanish.The speedometer reading andother numerical values can bedisplayed in either English ormetric units.

The language selection and theunits of measurement are changedthrough the trip computer in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See DIC Vehicle Customization(With DIC Buttons) on page 3-67.

The HUD information appears as animage focused out toward the front ofthe vehicle.

When the ignition key is turned toON/RUN, the HUD will display anintroductory message for a shorttime, until the HUD is ready.

The following indicator lightscome on the instrument panelwhen activated and also appearon the HUD:

• Turn Signal Indicators

• High-Beam Indicator Symbol

The HUD temporarily displaysCHECK GAGES and ICE POSSIBLEwhen these messages are on theDIC trip computer.

The HUD also displays the followingmessages on vehicles with thesesystems, when they are active:

• TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE

• STABILITRAK ACTIVE

Notice: If you try to use theHUD image as a parking aid, youmay misjudge the distance anddamage your vehicle. Do not usethe HUD image as a parking aid.

HUD Display on the VehicleWindshield


When the HUD is on, thespeedometer reading is continuallydisplayed. The current radio stationor CD track number will display fora short period of time after the radioor CD track status changes. Thishappens whenever radio informationis changed. The speedometer size isreduced when radio, CD information,warnings, or turn-by-turn navigationinformation are displayed onthe HUD.

The HUD control is located to theright of the steering wheel.

To adjust the HUD image so thatitems are properly displayed, do thefollowing:1. Adjust the driver’s seat to a

comfortable position.2. Start the engine.3. Adjust the HUD controls.Use the following settings to adjustthe HUD.

9 (Off): To turn HUD off, rotate thedimming knob fully counterclockwiseuntil the HUD display turns off.Brightness: Turn the knobon the HUD control clockwiseor counterclockwise to brightenor dim the display.

w (Up): x (Down): Press the upor down arrows to center the HUDimage in your view. The HUD imagecan only be adjusted up and down,not side to side.

? (Page): Press this button toselect the display formats. Releasethe page button when the formatnumber with the desired display isshown on the HUD.

The three formats are as follows:

Format One: This display gives thespeedometer reading (in English ormetric units), turn signal indication,high beam indication, transmissionpositions, and the outside airtemperature.

Format Two: This display includesthe information in Format Onewithout the transmission informationand the outside air temperature.


Format Three: This displayincludes all the information inFormat One along with a circulartachometer, but without outsideair temperature.

All formats will show theturn-by-turn navigation informationand provide details about thenext driving maneuver to be made.When you near your destination,the HUD will display a distancebar that will fill in the closer youget to your destination. All navigationinformation is provided to the HUDby the navigation radio, if the vehiclehas one.

The HUD image displayed on thewindshield will automatically dim andbrighten to compensate for outsidelighting.

The HUD image can temporarilylight up depending on the angleand position of the sunlight on theHUD display. This is normal andwill change when the angle ofthe sunlight on the HUD displaychanges.

Polarized sunglasses could makethe HUD image harder to see.

Care of the HUDClean the inside of the windshield asneeded to remove any dirt or film thatcould reduce the sharpness or clarityof the HUD image.

To clean the HUD lens, use a soft,clean cloth that has household glasscleaner sprayed on it. Wipe the HUDlens gently, then dry it. Do not spraycleaner directly on the lens becausethe cleaner could leak into the unit.

If You Cannot See the HUDImage When the Ignition Is On• Is anything covering the

HUD lens?

• Is the HUD dimmer setting brightenough?

• Is the HUD image adjusted to theproper height?

• Are you wearing polarizedsunglasses?

• Still no HUD image? Check thefuse in the instrument panel fuseblock. See Instrument Panel FuseBlock on page 5-88.

If the HUD Image Is Not Clear• Is the HUD image too bright?

• Are the windshield and HUDlens clean?

If the HUD image is not correct,contact your dealer/retailer.

Keep in mind that the windshield ispart of the HUD system.


Accessory PowerOutlet(s)The vehicle has three 12-voltoutlets which can be used to plugin electrical equipment, such as acellular telephone, a compact discplayer, etc.

The power outlets are locatedon the instrument panel belowthe climate controls, at the rearof the center console, and in therear cargo area. Lift the cover toaccess the outlet. Close the coverwhen not using the outlet.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain the battery.

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain accessory plugs may notbe compatible to the accessorypower outlet and could result inblown vehicle and adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer/retailer for additionalinformation on the power accessoryoutlets.

Notice: Adding any electricalequipment to the vehiclecan damage it or keep othercomponents from working asthey should. The repairs would

not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not use equipmentexceeding maximum amperagerating of 20 amperes. Check withyour dealer/retailer before addingelectrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of thepower outlet can cause damagenot covered by the warranty.Do not hang any type of accessoryor accessory bracket from theplug because the power outletsare designed for accessory powerplugs only.


Power Outlet 115 VoltAlternating CurrentFor vehicles with this power outlet,it can be used to plug in electricalequipment that uses a maximumlimit of 150 watts.

The power outlet is located on therear of the center console.

An indicator light on the outletturns on to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN and equipment requiringless than 150 watts is plugged intothe outlet, and no system fault isdetected.

The indicator light does not comeon when the ignition is in LOCK/OFFor if no equipment is plugged intothe outlet.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off. To resetthe circuit, unplug the item andplug it back in or turn the RemoteAccessory Power (RAP) off andthen back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 2-21. The power restartswhen equipment using 150 wattsor less is plugged into the outletand a system fault is not detected.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following electrical equipmentand may not work properly if theseitems are plugged into the poweroutlet:

• Equipment with highinitial peak wattage such as:compressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

• Other equipmentrequiring an extremelystable power supply such as:microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets, touchsensor lamps, etc.

See High Voltage Devices andWiring on page 5-87.


Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with thissystem.

A. Fan ControlB. Temperature ControlC. Air Delivery Mode ControlD. Air ConditioningE. REAR (Rear Climate Control)F. RecirculationG. Rear Window Defogger

9 (Off): Turn the fan control all theway counterclockwise to turn thefront climate control system off.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the fan speed.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetemperature of the air flowingfrom the system.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwiseto change the current airflow mode.

By positioning the right knobbetween two modes, a combinationof those two modes is selected.

H (Vent): Air is directed tothe instrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneland floor outlets. Some air isdirected towards the windshieldand side window outlets. Coolerair is directed to the upper outletsand warmer air to the floor outlets.


6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some of the airdirected to the windshield, sidewindow, and second row flooroutlets. In this mode, the systemautomatically selects outside air.Recirculation cannot be selectedwhile in floor mode.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents.When this mode is selected, thesystem turns off recirculation andruns the air conditioning unless theoutside temperature is less than40°F (4°C). Recirculation cannot beselected while in the defog mode.Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

0 (Defrost): This mode quicklyclears the windshield of fog or frost.Air is directed to the windshieldand side window vents, with someto the floor vents. In this mode,outside air is pulled inside thevehicle. Recirculation cannot beselected while in the defrost mode.The air conditioning system runsautomatically in this setting, unlessthe outside temperature is less than40°F (4°C). Do not drive the vehicleuntil all the windows are clear.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. An indicator light comes onwhen A/C is on. The air conditioningsystem does not operate whenthe outside temperature is below40°F (4°C). The indicator lightflashes three times and turnsoff when outside conditionsaffect air conditioning operation.This is normal.

For quicker cool down on hot days:

1. Open the windows to let hotair escape.

2. Select H mode.

3. Select #.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

6. Close the windows after the hotair has escaped.

7. Once the vehicle’s interiortemperature is below the outsidetemperature, select @ modefor faster cooling.

Using recirculation for long periodsof time could cause the air insideof the vehicle to become too dry.To prevent this from happening, afterthe inside of the vehicle has cooled,turn the recirculation mode off.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, soa small amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while idling or afterturning off the engine. This is normal.


@ (Recirculation): Press toturn the recirculation mode on or off.An indicator light comes on whenrecirculation is on. When the engineis turned off, the recirculation modeautomatically turns off and mustbe re-selected when the engineis turned on again.

This mode recirculates and helps toquickly cool the air inside the vehicle.It can be used to prevent outside airand odors from entering the vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor, defrost, or defoggingmodes. If recirculation is selected inthese modes, the indicator flashesthree times and turns off. The airconditioning also comes on whenthis mode is activated unless theoutside air temperature is less than40°F (4°C). While in recirculationmode the windows can fog whenthe weather is cold and damp.To clear the fog, select either thedefog or defrost mode and increasethe fan speed.

REAR (Rear Climate Control):Press to turn the rear heating and airconditioning on or off. See Rear AirConditioning and Heating System onpage 3-31 or Rear Air Conditioningand Heating System and ElectronicClimate Controls on page 3-32.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog fromthe rear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. The rearwindow defogger stays on for about10 minutes, before automaticallyturning off. The defogger will alsoturn off when the engine is turned off.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, fog or frostis cleared from the surface ofthe mirror when < is pressed.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid,and the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.


Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with thissystem.

A. Fan ControlB. AUTOC. DefrostD. RecirculationE. REAR (Rear Climate Control)F. Air Delivery Mode ControlG. Driver Side Temperature Control

H. DisplayI. Power (On/Off)J. Rear Window DefoggerK. Air ConditioningL. PASS (Passenger)M. Passenger Side Temperature

Control

Display Function

Each time the temperature, mode,or fan control buttons are pressed,the climate control display showsthat function along with the insidetemperature setting. The outsidetemperature is displayed on theinstrument panel cluster.

O (On/Off): Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.While the system is off, outside airstill enters through the floor outlets,but the air delivery mode can beadjusted.

The climate control system will alsoturn on if either the fan control,defrost, AUTO, or air conditioningbuttons are pressed.


Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): The systemautomatically controls the insidetemperature, the air delivery,and the fan speed.

To use automatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.When AUTO is selected, thecurrent temperature(s) selectedand AUTO is shown on thedisplay. The current air deliverymode and fan speed also appearfor approximately five seconds.When AUTO is selected,the air conditioning and air inletare automatically controlled.The air conditioning runs whenthe outside temperature isover 40°F (4°C). The systemis automatically set to outsideair, unless it is hot outside andthen the air inlet changes torecirculation mode to help quicklycool the vehicle. The recirculationindicator light will come on.

2. Set the temperature for the driverand passenger.To find a comfortable setting,start with a 73°F (22°C)temperature setting and allowabout 20 minutes for the systemto regulate. Use the driver’s sideor passenger side temperaturebuttons to adjust the temperaturesetting as necessary. The systemwill remain at the selected setting.Choosing the warmest or coolesttemperatures does not causethe vehicle to heat or cool morequickly.To avoid blowing cold air incold weather, the system delaysturning on the fan until warm air isavailable. Press the fan control tooverride this delay and select thefan speed.

Temperature Control

The driver and passenger sidetemperature buttons are usedto adjust the temperature of theair coming through the system.The temperature can be adjustedeven if the system is turned off sinceoutside air still enters the vehicle,unless the recirculation mode isselected. See “Recirculation”later in this section.

Driver Side TemperatureControl: Press the + or − buttonsto increase or decrease the driverside temperature. The driver sidetemperature display will show thetemperature setting.

Passenger Side TemperatureControl: Press the + or − buttons toincrease or decrease the passengerside temperature. The passengerside display will show thetemperature setting.


PASS (Passenger): Press toset the passenger temperature tomatch the driver temperature setting.The PASS indicator will turn off.When the passenger temperaturesetting is different than the driversetting, the PASS indicatorcomes on.

Manual OperationThe air delivery mode or fan speedcan be manually adjusted.

D / C (Fan Control): Press toincrease or decrease the fan speed.

Pressing D or C while in automaticcontrol places the fan speedunder manual control.

The air delivery mode remains inautomatic control. The fan settingstill displays, but the word AUTOno longer displays, and the AUTObutton indicator light turns off.

H / G (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press to change the direction of theairflow in the vehicle. Repeatedlypress H or G until the desired modeappears on the display. Pressinga mode button while the system isoff changes the air delivery modewithout turning the system on.Press a mode button while inautomatic control to place thesystem into manual control.

The air delivery mode setting stilldisplays, but the word AUTO nolonger displays, and the AUTObutton indicator light turns off.

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneland floor outlets. Some air isdirected towards the windshieldand side window outlets. Coolerair is directed to the upper outletsand warmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed tothe floor outlets, with some ofthe air directed to the windshield,side window, and second row flooroutlets. In this mode, the systemuses outside air.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents.When this mode is selected, thesystem turns off recirculation andruns the air conditioning compressorunless the outside temperature isless than 40°F (4°C). Do not drivethe vehicle until all the windows areclear.


0 (Defrost): Press to turn thedefrost on or off. This mode quicklyclears the windshield of fog or frost.Air is directed to the windshield,side window, and floor vents. In thismode, outside air is pulled inside thevehicle. The air conditioning systemruns automatically in this setting,unless the outside temperature isless than 40°F (4°C).

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

While in defrost mode, if the PASSbutton is pressed, the PASS buttonindicator flashes three times to showthat the passenger climate controlsystem cannot be activated. If thepassenger temperature buttonsare adjusted while in defrost mode,the driver temperature indicator willchange. The passenger temperaturewill not be displayed.

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning (A/C) onand off. An indicator light comeson when A/C is on.

The A/C does not work whenthe outside temperature is below40°F (4°C). If # is pressed theindicator flashes three times andturns off to show that the A/C modeis not available. If the A/C is on andthe outside temperature drops belowa temperature which is too cool forair conditioning to be effective, theA/C indicator turns off to show thatthe A/C mode has been canceled.

On hot days, open the windowsbriefly to let hot inside air escape.This helps reduce the time it takesfor the interior of the vehicle tocool down.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, soa small amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while idling or afterturning off the engine. This is normal.

@ (Recirculation): Press toturn the recirculation mode on or off.An indicator light comes on whenrecirculation is on. When the engineis turned off, the recirculation modeautomatically turns off and mustbe re-selected when the engineis turned on again.

This mode recirculates and helps toquickly cool the air inside the vehicle.It can be used to prevent outside airand odors from entering the vehicle.


The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor, defog, or defrostingmodes. If recirculation is selected inthese modes, the indicator flashesthree times and turns off. The airconditioning compressor also comeson when this mode is activated.While in recirculation mode thewindows can fog when the weatheris cold and damp. To clear the fog,select either the defog or defrostmode and increase the fan speed.

REAR: Press to turn the rearheating and air conditioning onor off. See Rear Air Conditioningand Heating System on page 3-31or Rear Air Conditioning andHeating System and ElectronicClimate Controls on page 3-32.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. The rearwindow defogger stays on forabout 10 minutes, before turning off.The defogger also turns off whenthe engine is turned off. Do notdrive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, fog or frost iscleared from the surface of themirror when the rear windowdefog button is pressed.

Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actionsmay damage the rear defogger.Repairs would not be coveredby your warranty.

Sensors

The solar sensor, located in thedefrost grille in the middle of theinstrument panel, monitors the solarheat. Do not cover the solar sensoror the system will not work properly.


The interior temperature sensorlocated on the instrument panel tothe right of the steering column,measures the temperature of theair inside the vehicle.

There is also an exteriortemperature sensor locatedbehind the front grille. This sensorreads the outside air temperatureand helps maintain the temperatureinside the vehicle. Any cover onthe front of the vehicle could causea false reading in the displayedtemperature.

The climate control system usesthe information from these sensorsto maintain comfort settings byadjusting the temperature, fanspeed, and the air delivery mode.The system may also supply coolerair to the side of the vehicle facingthe sun. The recirculation mode willalso be used as needed to maintaincool outlet temperatures.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the slider switch in the centerof the outlet, to change the directionof the air flow. Use the thumbwheelnear the outlet to control the amountof air flow or to shut off the airflow.

Keep all outlets open wheneverpossible for best systemperformance.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow, or

leaves from the air inlets at thebase of the windshield that canblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.

• Keep the path under all seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside the vehicle moreeffectively.

• If fogging reoccurs while invent or bi-level modes with mildtemperature throughout thevehicle, turn on the air conditionerto reduce windshield fogging.


Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System

A. Fan ControlB. Temperature ControlC. Air Delivery Mode Control

For vehicles with the rear climatecontrol system, the controls arelocated on the rear of the centerconsole. The system can also becontrolled with the front controls.

Press the REAR button on the frontclimate control system to turn therear climate control system on or off.

An indicator comes on when therear system is on. The system alsoturns on if any of the rear controlsare adjusted.

Mimic Mode: This mode matchesthe rear climate control to the frontclimate control settings. It comes onwhen REAR is pressed.

Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflow accordingto the settings of the rear controls.It comes on when any rear controlis adjusted.

Fan Control: Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Turn theknob to 9 to turn the fan off.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the airflowtemperature.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnto the desired mode to changethe airflow direction.

H (Vent): Air is directed throughthe overhead outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is directedthrough the rear floor outlets,as well as the overhead outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed throughthe floor outlets. The rear systemfloor outlets are located underthe third row seats.


Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System andElectronic Climate Controls

A. Fan ControlB. Air Delivery Mode ControlC. Temperature Control

For vehicles with the rear climatecontrol system, the controls arelocated on the rear of the centerconsole.

Press the REAR button on the frontclimate control system to turn therear climate control system on or off.The system also turns on if any of therear controls, except for the C arepressed. An indicator comes onwhen the rear system is on.

The system can also be turned off,by pressing and holding the C button.

Mimic Mode: This mode matchesthe rear climate control to the frontclimate control settings. It comes onwhen REAR is pressed.

Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflow accordingto the settings of the rear controls.It comes on when any rear controlis adjusted.

D C (Fan Control): Press the fanup or down buttons to increaseor decrease the fan speed.

Temperature Control: Press +or − to increase or decrease theair temperature. The temperaturesettings will display in 0-12increments, going from thecoolest (0) to the warmest (12)setting.

Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls


N (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press to manually change thedirection of the airflow. Repeatedlypress the button until the desiredmode appears on the display.

H (Vent): Air is directed throughthe overhead outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is directedthrough the rear floor outlets, aswell as the overhead outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed throughthe floor outlets. The rear systemfloor outlets are located underthe third row seats.

Warning Lights,Gages, and IndicatorsWarning lights and gages can signalthat something is wrong before itbecomes serious enough to causean expensive repair or replacement.Paying attention to the warning lightsand gages could prevent injury.

Warning lights come on when theremay be or is a problem with oneof the vehicle’s functions. Somewarning lights come on briefly whenthe engine is started to indicate theyare working.

Gages can indicate when there maybe or is a problem with one of thevehicle’s functions. Often gagesand warning lights work together toindicate a problem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gagesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explainswhat to do. Follow this manual’sadvice. Waiting to do repairs canbe costly and even dangerous.


Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going, abouthow much fuel has been used, and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar


Speedometer andOdometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle’s speed in both milesper hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h).

The odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eithermiles or kilometers.

This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. If the vehicle needs a newodometer installed, the new one isset to the mileage total of the oldodometer. If this is not possible, it isset at zero and a label is put on thedriver’s door to show the old mileagereading when the new odometer wasinstalled. If the mileage is unknown,the label should then indicate“previous mileage unknown”.

TachometerThe tachometer displays theengine speed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Safety Belt RemindersDriver Safety Belt ReminderLightThe driver safety belt reminder lighton the instrument panel cluster.

When the engine is started this lightand the chime come on and stay onfor several seconds to remind thedriver to fasten the safety belt.The light also begins to flash.

This cycle repeats if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicleis moving.

If the driver safety belt is alreadybuckled, neither the light nor chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

When the engine is started this lightand the chime come on and stay onfor several seconds to remind thepassenger to fasten their safety belt.The light also begins to flash.

This cycle repeats if the passengerremains unbuckled and the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime northe light comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat such asa briefcase, handbag, grocery bag,laptop or other electronic device.To turn off the warning light and orchime, remove the object from theseat or buckle the safety belt.


Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor,the pretensioners, the airbagmodules, the wiring and the crashsensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System onpage 1-50.

This light will come on and stay onfor several seconds when the vehicleis started. Then the light shouldgo out.

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle has been startedor comes on when while driving,the airbag system may not workproperly. Have the vehicle servicedright away.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 1-57for important safety information.The instrument panel has apassenger airbag status indicator.

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check.

United States

Canada


If you are using remote start tostart the vehicle from a distance,if equipped, you may not see thesystem check. Then, after severalmore seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or eitherthe on or off symbol to let you knowthe status of the right front passengerfrontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the right frontpassenger frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbolis lit on the passenger airbagstatus indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passengerfrontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, bothstatus indicator lights remain on,or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lightsor the passenger sensing system.See your dealer/retailer for service.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 3-36 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turned on,but the engine is not running, as a

check to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comeson while driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer/retailer. Driving while this lightis on could drain the battery.

When this light comes on, theDriver Information Center (DIC) alsodisplays the SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM message.

See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-58 for more information.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.


Voltmeter Gage

When the engine is not running,but the ignition is turned on,this gage shows the battery’sstate of charge in DC volts.

When the engine is running, thisgage shows the condition of thecharging system. The vehicle’scharging system regulates voltagebased on the state of charge of thebattery. The voltmeter may fluctuate.This is normal. Readings betweenthe low and high warning zonesindicate the normal operating range.

Readings in the low warning zonemay occur when a large numberof electrical accessories areoperating in the vehicle and theengine is left idling for an extendedperiod.

If there is a problem with thebattery charging system, a SERVICEBATTERY CHARGING SYSTEMmessage will appear in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) and/or thecharging system light will come on.See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-58 and Charging SystemLight on page 3-37 for moreinformation.

However, readings in eitherwarning zone may indicate apossible problem in the electricalsystem. Have the vehicle servicedas soon as possible.

Brake System WarningLightThis vehicle’s hydraulic brakesystem is divided into two parts.If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop thevehicle. For good braking bothparts need to be working.

If the warning light comes on,there is a brake problem. Have thebrake system inspected right away.

This light should come on brieflywhen the ignition key is turnedto ON/RUN. If it does not comeon then, have it fixed so it will beready to warn if there is a problem.

United States Canada


This light may also come on dueto low brake fluid. See Brakeson page 5-27 for more information.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will also comeon when the parking brake is set.The light will stay on if the parkingbrake does not release fully. If itstays on after the parking brake isfully released, it means there is abrake problem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased. The pedal may be harderto push or, the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer tostop. If the light is still on, havethe vehicle towed for service.See Towing Your Vehicle onpage 4-20.

{ CAUTION

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on. Drivingwith the brake system warning lighton can lead to a crash. If the lightis still on after the vehicle has beenpulled off the road and carefullystopped, have the vehicle towedfor service.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comeson briefly when the engine is started.

If the light does not come on, haveit fixed so it will be ready to warnif there is a problem.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes on whiledriving, stop as soon as it is safelypossible and turn the ignition off.A chime may also sound when thelight comes on steady. Then startthe engine again to reset the system.If the ABS light stays on, or comeson again while driving, the vehicleneeds service. If the regular brakesystem warning light is not on, thevehicle still has brakes, but notantilock brakes. If the regular brakesystem warning light is also on,the vehicle does not have antilockbrakes and there is a problem withthe regular brakes. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 3-38.

For vehicles with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), seeDIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-58 for all brake related DICmessages.


StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer. If the system isworking normally the indicatorlight goes off.

If it stays on, or comes on whiledriving, there could be a problemwith the StabiliTrak system and thevehicle might need service. Whenthis warning light is on, the systemis off and will not limit wheel spin.

This light flashes when theStabiliTrak system is active.

If the StabiliTrak system warninglight comes on and stays on for anextended period of time when thesystem is turned on, the vehicleneeds service. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 4-5 for moreinformation.

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on whenthe engine has overheated.

If this happens pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating onpage 5-24 for more information.

Notice: Driving with the enginecoolant temperature warning lighton could cause the vehicle tooverheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 5-24. The vehicle’s enginecould be damaged, and it mightnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Never drive with theengine coolant temperaturewarning light on.

This light also comes on brieflywhen starting the vehicle. If it doesnot, see your dealer/retailer.


Engine CoolantTemperature Gage

This gage shows the enginecoolant temperature. Under normaldriving conditions the gage willread approximately 210°F (100 °C)or less. If the gage pointer is near260°F (125 °C), the engine is too hot.

It means that the engine coolanthas overheated. If the vehicle hasbeen operating under normal drivingconditions, pull off the road, stop thevehicle and turn off the engine assoon as possible.

See Engine Overheating onpage 5-24 for more information.

Tire Pressure Light

If the vehicle has a tire pressuremonitoring system, the tire pressurelight provides information about tirepressures and the Tire PressureMonitoring System. The light shouldcome on briefly as the engine isstarted. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one ormore of the tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message in theDriver Information Center (DIC),can accompany the light. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-58 for more information.Stop and check the tires as soonas it is safe to do so. If underinflated,inflate to the proper pressure.See Tires on page 5-37 for moreinformation.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there could bea problem with the Tire PressureMonitor System. The light flashes forabout a minute and stays on steadyfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. This sequence repeats withevery ignition cycle. See TirePressure Monitor System onpage 5-44 for more information.



MalfunctionIndicator LampCheck Engine LightA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operationof the fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It ensures thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment.

This light comes on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

If the check engine light comeson and stays on, while the engineis running, this indicates that thereis an OBD II problem and serviceis required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with thislight on, after a while, theemission controls might notwork as well, the vehicle’s fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not runas smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications madeto the engine, transmission,exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof the vehicle or the replacementof the original tires with otherthan those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle’s emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications to thesesystems could lead to costlyrepairs not covered by the vehiclewarranty. This could also resultin a failure to pass a requiredEmission Inspection/Maintenancetest. See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3.


This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

The following can prevent moreserious damage to the vehicle:

• Reduce vehicle speed.

• Avoid hard accelerations.

• Avoid steep uphill grades.

• If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauledas soon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash,when it is safe to do so, stop thevehicle. Find a safe place to park thevehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds, and restart the engine.If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction has beendetected on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

An emission system malfunctionmight be corrected by checking thefollowing items:

• Make sure the fuel cap is fullyinstalled. See Filling the Tank onpage 5-8. The diagnostic systemcan determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missingfuel cap allows fuel to evaporateinto the atmosphere. A fewdriving trips with the cap properlyinstalled should turn the light off.

• If the vehicle has been driventhrough a deep puddle of water,the vehicle’s electrical systemmight be wet. The condition isusually corrected when theelectrical system dries out.A few driving trips shouldturn the light off.

• Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brandused. It will require at least onefull tank of the proper fuel to turnthe light off.See Gasoline Octane onpage 5-5.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer/retailer cancheck the vehicle. The dealer/retailerhas the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanicalor electrical problems that mighthave developed.


Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and localgovernments have or might beginprograms to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on the vehicle.Failure to pass this inspectioncould prevent getting a vehicleregistration.

Here are some things to know tohelp the vehicle pass an inspection:

• The vehicle will not pass thisinspection if the check enginelight is on with the engine running,or if the key is in ON/RUN and thelight is not on.

• The vehicle will not pass thisinspection if the OBD II (on-boarddiagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. The vehicle wouldbe considered not ready forinspection. This can happenif the battery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic systemis designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the vehiclefor inspection.

Oil Pressure Light

{ CAUTION

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engineoil maintenance can damagethe engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule in thismanual for changing engine oil.


The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on have the vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem.

Security Light

This light flashes when the securitysystem is activated.

For more information, seeTheft-Deterrent Systems onpage 2-16.

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 3-13 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes on whenever thecruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 3-9 for moreinformation.


Highbeam On Light

The highbeam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlampsare in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 3-7 for moreinformation.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

This light comes on when theTow/Haul mode has been activated.For more information, seeTow/Haul Mode on page 2-26.

Fuel Gage

When the ignition is on, the fuelgage shows how much fuel is leftin the tank.

An arrow in the fuel gage indicatesthe side of the vehicle the fueldoor is on.

The gage will first indicate emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel,the vehicle’s fuel tank shouldbe filled soon.

When the fuel tank is low on fuel,the FUEL LEVEL LOW messagewill appear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). For more informationsee DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-58.

Here are some situations thatmay occur with the fuel gage.None of these indicate a problemwith the fuel gage.

• At the gas station, the fuelpump shuts off before the gagereads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel tofill up than the fuel gage indicated.For example, the gage may haveindicated the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more orless than half the tank’s capacityto fill the tank.

• The gage goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.



Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Your vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC).

The DIC displays information aboutyour vehicle. It also displays warningmessages if a system problem isdetected.

All messages will appear in the DICdisplay located at the top of theinstrument panel cluster.

The DIC comes on when theignition is on. After a short delay,the DIC will display the informationthat was last displayed beforethe engine was turned off.

The DIC also displays a shift leverposition indicator on the bottomline of the display. See AutomaticTransmission Operation onpage 2-24 for more information.

The outside air temperatureand compass, if equipped, alsodisplays on the DIC when viewingthe trip and fuel information.

The outside air temperatureautomatically appears in the topright corner of the DIC display.If there is a problem with the systemthat controls the temperature display,the numbers will be replaced withdashes. If this occurs, have thevehicle serviced. The compasswill be shown in the bottom rightcorner of the DIC display. See DICCompass on page 3-56 for moreinformation.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see“DIC Operation and Displays (WithDIC Buttons)” later in this sectionand DIC Vehicle Customization(With DIC Buttons) on page 3-67for the displays available.

If your vehicle does not haveDIC buttons, see “DIC Operationand Displays (Without DIC Buttons)”later in this section for the displaysavailable.

DIC Operationand Displays(With DIC Buttons)If your vehicle has DIC buttons,the information below explains theoperation of this system.

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons located on theinstrument panel. See InstrumentPanel Overview on page 3-4for more information.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The DIC also allows some featuresto be customized. See DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons)on page 3-67 for more information.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons,you can also use the trip odometerreset stem to view the odometerand trip odometers.


DIC Buttons

The buttons are the set/reset,customization, vehicle information,and trip/fuel buttons. The buttonfunctions are detailed in thefollowing pages.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button toset or reset certain functions and toturn off or acknowledge messageson the DIC.

U (Customization): Press thisbutton to customize the featuresettings on your vehicle. See DICVehicle Customization (With DICButtons) on page 3-67 for moreinformation.

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to display the oil life, parkassist on vehicles with this feature,units, tire pressure readings onvehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterprogramming, and compasscalibration and zone setting onvehicles with this feature.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press thisbutton to display the odometer,trip odometers, fuel range, averageeconomy, timer, fuel used, andaverage speed.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

OIL LIFE

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil OIL LIFE REMAINING displays.This display shows an estimate ofthe oil’s remaining useful life. If yousee 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING onthe display, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains. The engineoil life system will alert you to changethe oil on a schedule consistent withyour driving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-58. You should changethe oil as soon as you can.


See Engine Oil on page 5-13.In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual.See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-3 for more information.

Remember, you must reset theOIL LIFE display yourself after eachoil change. It will not reset itself.Also, be careful not to reset theOIL LIFE display accidentally at anytime other than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System onpage 5-15.

PARK ASSIST

If your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,press the vehicle informationbutton until PARK ASSIST displays.This display allows the system to beturned on or off. Once in this display,press the set/reset button to selectbetween ON or OFF. If you chooseON, the system will be turned on.If you choose OFF, the system willbe turned off. The URPA systemautomatically turns back on aftereach vehicle start. When the URPAsystem is turned off and the vehicleis shifted out of P (Park), the DICwill display the PARK ASSIST OFFmessage as a reminder that thesystem has been turned off.See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-58 and Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) on page 2-34for more information.

UNITS

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil UNITS displays. This displayallows you to select between Englishor Metric units of measurement.Once in this display, press theset/reset button to select betweenENGLISH or METRIC units. All ofthe vehicle information will then bedisplayed in the unit of measurementselected.

FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure will beshown in either pounds per squareinch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Pressthe vehicle information button untilthe DIC displays FRONT TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Pressthe vehicle information button againuntil the DIC displays REAR TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.


If a low or high tire pressurecondition is detected by thesystem while driving, a messageadvising you to check the pressurein a specific tire will appear inthe display. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43 andDIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-58 for more information.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with your vehicle.If this consistently occurs, seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

RELEARN REMOTE KEY

This display allows you to matchRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters to your vehicle.This procedure will erase allpreviously learned transmitters.Therefore, they must be relearnedas additional transmitters.

To match an RKE transmitter toyour vehicle:1. Press the vehicle information

button until PRESS V TORELEARN REMOTE KEYdisplays.

2. Press the set/reset button untilREMOTE KEY LEARNINGACTIVE is displayed.

3. Press and hold the lock andunlock buttons on the firsttransmitter at the same timefor about 15 seconds.On vehicles with memory recallseats, the first transmitter learnedwill match driver 1 and thesecond will match driver 2.A chime will sound indicatingthat the transmitter is matched.

4. To match additional transmittersat this time, repeat Step 3.Each vehicle can have amaximum of eight transmittersmatched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode,you must cycle the key toLOCK/OFF.

COMPASS ZONE SETTING

This display will be availableif the vehicle has a compass.See DIC Compass on page 3-56for more information.

COMPASS RECALIBRATION

This display will be available if thevehicle has a compass. See DICCompass on page 3-56 for moreinformation.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto scroll through the followingmenu items:

ODOMETER

Press the trip/fuel button untilODOMETER displays. This displayshows the distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km). Pressing the tripodometer reset stem will also displaythe odometer.


To switch between English andmetric measurements, see “UNITS”earlier in this section.

TRIP A and TRIP B

Press the trip/fuel button untilTRIP A or TRIP B displays.This display shows the currentdistance traveled in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km) since the lastreset for each trip odometer. Bothtrip odometers can be used atthe same time. Pressing the tripodometer reset stem will alsodisplay the trip odometers.

Each trip odometer can be resetto zero separately by pressing theset/reset button or the trip odometerreset stem while the desired tripodometer is displayed.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled the retro-active reset. This canbe used to set the trip odometer tothe number of miles (kilometers)driven since the ignition was lastturned on. This can be used ifthe trip odometer is not resetat the beginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold the set/reset buttonfor at least four seconds. The tripodometer will display the numberof miles (mi) or kilometers (km)driven since the ignition was lastturned on and the vehicle wasmoving. Once the vehicle beginsmoving, the trip odometer willaccumulate mileage. For example, ifthe vehicle was driven 5 miles (8 km)before it is started again, and thenthe retro-active reset feature isactivated, the display will show5 miles (8 km). As the vehiclebegins moving, the display willthen increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature isactivated after the vehicle is started,but before it begins moving, thedisplay will show the number ofmiles (mi) or kilometers (km) thatwere driven during the last ignitioncycle.

RANGE

Press the trip/fuel button untilRANGE displays. This displayshows the approximate numberof remaining miles (mi) orkilometers (km) the vehiclecan be driven without refueling.The display will show LOW if thefuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is basedon an average of the vehicle’s fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. This estimate willchange if driving conditions change.For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in thefuel tank. This is because differentdriving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fuel economythan city driving. Fuel range cannotbe reset.


AVG (Average) ECONOMY

Press the trip/fuel button untilAVG ECONOMY displays.This display shows the approximateaverage miles per gallon (mpg) orliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).This number is calculated basedon the number of mpg (L/100 km)recorded since the last time thismenu item was reset. To resetAVG ECONOMY, press andhold the set/reset button.

TIMER

Press the trip/fuel button untilTIMER displays. This displaycan be used as a timer.

To start the timer, press theset/reset button while TIMER isdisplayed. The display will showthe amount of time that has passedsince the timer was last reset, notincluding time the ignition is off.

Time will continue to be counted aslong as the ignition is on, even ifanother display is being shownon the DIC. The timer will recordup to 99 hours, 59 minutes and59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press the set/resetbutton briefly while TIMER isdisplayed.

To reset the timer to zero, pressand hold the set/reset button whileTIMER is displayed.

FUEL USED

Press the trip/fuel button untilFUEL USED displays. This displayshows the number of gallons (gal)or liters (L) of fuel used since thelast reset of this menu item. To resetthe fuel used information, pressand hold the set/reset button whileFUEL USED is displayed.

AVG (Average) SPEED

Press the trip/fuel button untilAVG SPEED displays. This displayshows the average speed of thevehicle in miles per hour (mph) orkilometers per hour (km/h). Thisaverage is calculated based on thevarious vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset of this value.To reset the value to zero, pressand hold the set/reset button.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.


DIC Operationand Displays(Without DIC Buttons)If your vehicle does not have DICbuttons, the information belowexplains the operation of this system.

The DIC has different displays whichcan be accessed by pressing the tripodometer reset stem located on theinstrument panel cluster. Pressingthe trip odometer reset stem willalso turn off, or acknowledge,DIC messages.

The DIC displays trip and vehiclesystem information, and warningmessages if a system problemis detected.

If your vehicle does not haveDIC buttons, you can use the tripodometer reset stem to view thefollowing displays: odometer, trip

odometers, oil life, park assist menufor vehicles with the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system,Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter programming, units,and display language.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons,you can use the trip odometer resetstem to view the following displays:odometer and trip odometers.

Trip Odometer Reset StemMenu ItemsODOMETER

Press the trip odometer resetstem until ODOMETER displays.This display shows the distance thevehicle has been driven in eithermiles (mi) or kilometers (km).

To switch between English andmetric measurements, see “UNITS”later in this section.

TRIP A or TRIP B

Press the trip odometer reset stemuntil TRIP A or TRIP B displays.This display shows the currentdistance traveled in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km) since the lastreset for each trip odometer. Bothtrip odometers can be used at thesame time.

Each trip odometer can be reset tozero separately by pressing andholding the trip odometer reset stemwhile the desired trip odometer isdisplayed.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled the retro-active reset. This canbe used to set the trip odometer tothe number of miles (kilometers)driven since the ignition was lastturned on. This can be used if thetrip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.


To use the retro-active resetfeature, press and hold the tripodometer reset stem for at leastfour seconds. The trip odometerwill display the number of miles (mi)or kilometers (km) driven since theignition was last turned on and thevehicle was moving. Once thevehicle begins moving, the tripodometer will accumulate mileage.For example, if the vehicle wasdriven 5 miles (8 km) before itis started again, and then theretro-active reset feature is activated,the display will show 5 miles (8 km).As the vehicle begins moving, thedisplay will then increase to 5.1 miles(8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature isactivated after the vehicle is started,but before it begins moving, thedisplay will show the number ofmiles (mi) or kilometers (km) thatwere driven during the last ignitioncycle.

OIL LIFE

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). Press the tripodometer reset stem until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This displayshows an estimate of the oil’sremaining useful life. If you see99% OIL LIFE REMAINING onthe display, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains. The engineoil life system will alert you to changethe oil on a schedule consistent withyour driving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-58. You should changethe oil as soon as you can. SeeEngine Oil on page 5-13. In additionto the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended inthe Maintenance Schedule inthis manual. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-3 formore information.

Remember, you must reset theOIL LIFE display yourself after eachoil change. It will not reset itself.Also, be careful not to reset theOIL LIFE display accidentally atany time other than when the oil hasjust been changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System onpage 5-15.

PARK ASSIST

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). If your vehiclehas the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system, press thetrip odometer reset stem until PARKASSIST displays. This display allowsthe system to be turned on or off.Once in this display, press and holdthe trip odometer reset stem to selectbetween ON or OFF. If you chooseON, the system will be turned on.


If you choose OFF, the system willbe turned off. The URPA systemautomatically turns back on aftereach vehicle start. When the URPAsystem is turned off and the vehicleis shifted out of P (Park), the DICwill display the PARK ASSIST OFFmessage as a reminder that thesystem has been turned off.See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-58 and Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) on page 2-34for more information.

RELEARN REMOTE KEY

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). This displayallows you to match Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitters to yourvehicle. This procedure will eraseall previously learned transmitters.Therefore, they must be relearnedas additional transmitters.

To match an RKE transmitter toyour vehicle:

1. Press the trip odometer resetstem until RELEARN REMOTEKEY displays.

2. Press and hold the trip odometerreset stem until REMOTE KEYLEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.

3. Press and hold the lock andunlock buttons on the firsttransmitter at the same timefor about 15 seconds.On vehicles with memoryrecall seats, the first transmitterlearned will match driver 1 andthe second will match driver 2.A chime will sound indicating thatthe transmitter is matched.

4. To match additional transmittersat this time, repeat Step 3.Each vehicle can have amaximum of eight transmittersmatched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode,you must cycle the key toLOCK/OFF.

UNITS

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). Press the tripodometer reset stem until UNITSdisplays. This display allows you toselect between English or Metricunits of measurement. Once inthis display, press and hold thetrip odometer reset stem to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRIC units.All of the vehicle information willthen be displayed in the unit ofmeasurement selected.


DISPLAY LANGUAGE

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). This displayallows you to select the languagein which the DIC messages willappear. To select a language:

1. Press the trip odometer resetstem until DISPLAY LANGUAGEdisplays.

2. Continue to press and hold thetrip odometer reset stem to scrollthrough all of the availablelanguages.The available languages areENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS(French), ESPANOL (Spanish),and NO CHANGE.

3. Once the desired languageis displayed, release the tripodometer reset stem to setyour choice.

DIC CompassYour vehicle may have acompass in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

Compass Zone

The zone is set to zone eight uponleaving the factory. Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zonefor your location.

Under certain circumstances,such as during a long distancecross-country trip or moving to a newstate or province, it will be necessaryto compensate for compass varianceby resetting the zone through theDIC if the zone is not set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth’s magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zone whereyou live, the compass may give falsereadings. The compass must be setto the variance zone in which thevehicle is traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure1. Do not set the compass zone

when the vehicle is moving.Only set it when the vehicleis in P (Park).Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.

2. Find the vehicle’s currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.Zones 1 through 15 are available.


3. Press the set/reset button toscroll through and select theappropriate variance zone.

4. Press the trip/fuel button untilthe vehicle heading, for example,N for North, is displayed inthe DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass.See “Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving the vehiclein circles is not a danger. It issuggested to calibrate away fromtall buildings, utility wires, manholecovers, or other industrial structures,if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass shouldbe calibrated.

If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not change aftermaking turns, there may be a strongmagnetic field interfering with thecompass. Such interference maybe caused by a magnetic CB or cellphone antenna mount, a magneticemergency light, magnetic note padholder, or any other magnetic item.Turn off the vehicle, move themagnetic item, then turn on thevehicle and calibrate the compass.

To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass zoneis set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is located.See “Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in this section.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, sunroof, climatecontrols, seats, etc. during thecalibration procedure.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.

3. Press the set/reset button to startthe compass calibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES. Drive the vehiclein tight circles at less than5 mph (8 km/h) to complete thecalibration. The DIC will displayCALIBRATION COMPLETE for afew seconds when the calibrationis complete. The DIC display willthen return to the previous menu.


DIC Warnings andMessagesMessages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the status ofthe vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed bythe driver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appearone after another.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you canpress any of the DIC buttons onthe instrument panel or the tripodometer reset stem on theinstrument panel cluster toacknowledge that you receivedthe messages and to clear themfrom the display.

Some messages cannot be clearedfrom the DIC display because theyare more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can

be cleared. You should take anymessages that appear on the displayseriously and remember that clearingthe messages will only make themessages disappear, not correctthe problem.

The following are the possiblemessages that can be displayedand some information about them.

ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFFIf your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays when there is a compactspare tire on the vehicle, whenthe Antilock Brake System (ABS)warning light comes on, or whenthe rear differential fluid isoverheating. This message turnsoff when the differential fluid cools.

The AWD system is disabled untilthe compact spare tire is replacedby a full-size tire. If the warning

message is still on after putting onthe full-size tire, you need to resetthe warning message. To reset thewarning message, turn the ignitionoff and then back on again after30 seconds. If the message stays on,see your dealer/retailer right away.See All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Systemon page 4-7 for more information.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFFThis message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned off.This message clears itself after10 seconds.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ONThis message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned on.This message clears itself after10 seconds.


BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when thesystem detects that the batteryvoltage is dropping below expectedlevels. The battery saver systemstarts reducing certain features ofthe vehicle that you may be ableto notice. At the point that thefeatures are disabled, this messageis displayed. It means that thevehicle is trying to save the chargein the battery.Turn off all unnecessary accessoriesto allow the battery to recharge.The normal battery voltage rangeis 11.5 to 15.5 volts.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONThis message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message. See EngineOil Life System on page 5-15 forinformation on how to reset themessage. See Engine Oil onpage 5-13 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-3 formore information.

CHECK TIRE PRESSUREOn vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the pressurein one or more of the vehicle’s tiresneeds to be checked. This messagealso displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHTFRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHTREAR to indicate which tire needs tobe checked. You can receive morethan one tire pressure message at atime. To read the other messagesthat may have been sent at the sametime, press the set/reset button orthe trip odometer reset stem. If a tirepressure message appears on theDIC, stop as soon as you can. Havethe tire pressures checked and setto those shown on the Tire LoadingInformation label. See Tires onpage 5-37, Loading the Vehicleon page 4-16, and Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43. The DIC

also shows the tire pressure values.See “DIC Operation and Displays(With DIC Buttons)” earlier in thissection. If the tire pressure is low,the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on. See Tire Pressure Lighton page 3-41.

CRUISE SET TO XXXThis message displays wheneverthe cruise control is set. See CruiseControl on page 3-9 for moreinformation.

DRIVER DOOR OPENThis message displays and achime sounds if the driver dooris not fully closed and the vehicleis shifted out of P (Park). Stop andturn off the vehicle, check the doorfor obstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.


ENGINE HOT A/C(Air Conditioning) OFFThis message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGage on page 3-41. To avoid addedstrain on a hot engine, the airconditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When thecoolant temperature returns tonormal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You cancontinue to drive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer/retailer as soon as possible toavoid damage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage may occur.If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Do notincrease the engine speed abovenormal idling speed. SeeEngine Overheating on page 5-24for more information.

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature istoo hot. Stop and allow the vehicleto idle until it cools down. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Gageon page 3-41.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 5-25for information on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage may occur.If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, stop the vehicleas soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 5-24 formore information.

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.


ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDThis message displays and a chimesounds when the cooling systemtemperature gets too hot and theengine further enters the enginecoolant protection mode. See EngineOverheating on page 5-24 for furtherinformation.

This message also displays whenthe vehicle’s engine power isreduced. Reduced engine powercan affect the vehicle’s ability toaccelerate. If this message is on,but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to yourdestination. The performancemay be reduced the next time thevehicle is driven. The vehicle maybe driven at a reduced speed whilethis message is on, but accelerationand speed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer/retailer for service as soon aspossible.

FUEL LEVEL LOWThis message displays and achime sounds if the fuel levelis low. Refuel as soon as possible.See Fuel Gage on page 3-46and Fuel on page 5-5 for moreinformation.

HEATED WASH (Washer)FLUID SYSTEM OFFThis message displays whenyou manually turn off the heatedwindshield washer fluid system orwhen the system automatically turnsoff. See “Heated Windshield Washer”under Windshield Washer onpage 3-8 for more information.This message clears itself after10 seconds.

HEATING WASH (Washer)FLUID WASH (Washer) WIPESPENDINGThis message displays whenyou turn on the heated windshieldwasher fluid system. See “HeatedWindshield Washer” underWindshield Washer on page 3-8for more information.

HOOD OPENOn some models, this messagedisplays and a chime sounds if thehood is not fully closed. Stop andturn off the vehicle, check the hoodfor obstructions, and close the hoodagain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CAREThis message displays whenthe outside air temperature is coldenough to create icy road conditions.Adjust your driving accordingly.


LEFT REAR DOOR OPENThis message displays and achime sounds if the driver siderear door is not fully closed and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).Stop and turn off the vehicle, checkthe door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

LIFTGATE OPENThis message displays and a chimesounds if the liftgate is open whilethe ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn offthe vehicle and check the liftgate.Restart the vehicle and check forthe message on the DIC display.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine oil pressureis low, severe engine damagemay occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), stopthe vehicle as soon as possible.Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure iscorrected. See Engine Oil onpage 5-13 for more information.

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer.See Engine Oil on page 5-13.

PARK ASSIST OFFIf your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,after the vehicle has been startedand shifted out of P (Park), thismessage displays to remind thedriver that the URPA system hasbeen turned off. Press the set/resetbutton or the trip odometer resetstem to acknowledge this messageand clear it from the DIC display.To turn the URPA system back on,see Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist(URPA) on page 2-34.

PASSENGER DOOR OPENThis message displays and achime sounds if the passenger dooris not fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.


REMOTE KEY LEARNINGACTIVEThis message displays while you arematching a Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.See “Matching Transmitter(s) toYour Vehicle” under Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-4 and DIC Operation andDisplays (With DIC Buttons) onpage 3-47 or DIC Operation andDisplays (Without DIC Buttons)on page 3-53 for more information.

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEYThis message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needsto be replaced in the transmitter.See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-4.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPENThis message displays and a chimesounds if the passenger side reardoor is not fully closed and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).Stop and turn off the vehicle, checkthe door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

SERVICE A/C(Air Conditioning) SYSTEMThis message displays whenthe electronic sensors that controlthe air conditioning and heatingsystems are no longer working.Have the climate control systemserviced by your dealer/retailerif you notice a drop in heatingand air conditioning efficiency.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays if there isa problem with the airbag system.Have your dealer/retailer inspect thesystem for problems. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 3-36 andAirbag System on page 1-50 formore information.

SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVEIf your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays if there is a problem withthis system. If this message appears,stop as soon as possible and turnoff the vehicle. Restart the vehicleafter 30 seconds and check for themessage on the DIC display. If themessage is still displayed or appearsagain when you begin driving, theAWD system needs service.See your dealer/retailer.


SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEMOn some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problem withthe battery charging system.Under certain conditions, thecharging system light may alsoturn on in the instrument panelcluster. See Charging SystemLight on page 3-37. Driving withthis problem could drain the battery.Turn off all unnecessary accessories.Have the electrical system checkedas soon as possible. See yourdealer/retailer.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays along withthe brake system warning light ifthere is a problem with the brakesystem. See Brake System WarningLight on page 3-38. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the message is

still displayed or appears again whenyou begin driving, the brake systemneeds service as soon as possible.See your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE PARK ASSISTIf your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,this message displays if there is aproblem with the URPA system.Do not use this system to helpyou park. See Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) on page 2-34for more information. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERINGThis message displays when aproblem is detected with the powersteering system. When this messageis displayed, you may notice that theeffort required to steer the vehicleincreases or feels heavier, but youwill still be able to steer the vehicle.Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer immediately.

SERVICE STABILITRAKThis message displays if thereis a problem with the StabiliTrak®

system. If this message appears,try to reset the system. Stop; turn offthe engine for at least 15 seconds;then start the engine again. If thismessage still comes on, it meansthere is a problem. See your dealer/retailer for service. The vehicle issafe to drive, however, you do nothave the benefit of StabiliTrak,so reduce your speed and driveaccordingly.

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEMThis message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. The vehicle may or maynot restart so you may want to takethe vehicle to your dealer/retailerbefore turning off the engine.See PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizer Operation on page 2-18for more information.


SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEMOn vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on theTPMS is not working properly.The tire pressure light also flashesand then remains on during thesame ignition cycle. See TirePressure Light on page 3-41.Several conditions may causethis message to appear. See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 5-46 for more information.If the warning comes on and stayson, there may be a problem with theTPMS. See your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROLThis message displays when thereis a problem with the Traction ControlSystem (TCS). When this messageis displayed, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See your dealer/retailerfor service. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 4-5 for more information.

SERVICE TRANSMISSIONThis message displays when thereis a problem with the transmission.See your dealer/retailer for service.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays whena non-emissions related malfunctionoccurs. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer as soonas possible.

SPEED LIMITED TOXXX MPH (KM/H)This message displays when yourvehicle speed is limited to 80 mph(128 km/h) because the vehicledetects a problem in the speedvariable assist steering system.Have your vehicle serviced byyour dealer/retailer.

STARTING DISABLEDSERVICE THROTTLEThis message displays when yourvehicle’s throttle system is notfunctioning properly. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.


THEFT ATTEMPTEDThis message displays if the contenttheft-deterrent system has detecteda break-in attempt while you wereaway from your vehicle. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 2-16 formore information.

TIGHTEN GAS CAPThis message may display alongwith the check engine light on theinstrument panel cluster if thevehicle’s fuel cap is not tightenedproperly. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 3-42. Reinstall thefuel cap fully. See Filling the Tankon page 5-8. The diagnostic systemcan determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap allowsfuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEOn vehicles with the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS),this message displays when theTPMS is re-learning the tire positionson your vehicle. The tire positionsmust be re-learned after rotatingthe tires or after replacing a tire orsensor. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 5-50, Tire PressureMonitor System on page 5-44,and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-43 for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFFThis message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS)is turned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 4-5 for moreinformation. This message clearsitself after 10 seconds.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the transmission fluid isoverheating and the transmissiontemperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, you can damage thetransmission. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not becovered by your warranty. Do notdrive your vehicle with overheatedtransmission fluid or while thetransmission temperature warningis displayed.

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid in thevehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool.This message clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.


TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays and a chimesounds if a turn signal is left onfor 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Movethe turn signal/multifunction leverto the off position.

WASHER FLUID LOWADD FLUIDThis message displays whenthe windshield washer fluid is low.Fill the windshield washer fluidreservoir as soon as possible.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-12 for the location of thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.Also, see Windshield Washer Fluidon page 5-26 for more information.

DIC VehicleCustomization(With DIC Buttons)Your vehicle may havecustomization capabilitiesthat allow you to program certainfeatures to one preferred setting.Customization features can only beprogrammed to one setting on thevehicle and cannot be programmedto a preferred setting for two differentdrivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available willbe displayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory,but may have been changedfrom their default state since then.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the FeatureSettings Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place

the vehicle in P (Park).To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press the customization button toenter the feature settings menu.If the menu is not available,FEATURE SETTINGSAVAILABLE IN PARK will display.Before entering the menu, makesure the vehicle is in P (Park).


Feature Settings Menu ItemsThe following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display ifa language other than Englishhas been set. This feature allowsyou to change the language inwhich the DIC messages appearto English.

Press the customization buttonuntil the PRESS V TO DISPLAY INENGLISH screen appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DICmessages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select thelanguage in which the DIC messageswill appear.

Press the customization buttonuntil the DISPLAY LANGUAGEscreen appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once toaccess the settings for this feature.Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the followingsettings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS: All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages willappear in Spanish.

NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press theset/reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

You can also change the languageby pressing the trip odometer resetstem. See “Language” under DICOperation and Displays (WithoutDIC Buttons) earlier in this sectionfor more information.


AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you toselect when the vehicle’sdoors will automatically lock.See Programmable AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2-9 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 8 mph(13 km/h) for three seconds.



AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to selectwhich doors and when thedoors will automatically unlock.See Programmable AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2-9 formore information.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Onlythe driver’s door will unlock whenthe key is taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only thedriver’s door will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doorswill unlock when the key is takenout of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).




REMOTE DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to selectthe type of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-4 for more information.Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will soundon the second press of the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): Theexterior lamps will flash when youpress the lock button on the RKEtransmitter, and the horn will soundwhen the lock button is pressedagain within five seconds of theprevious command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectthe type of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle withthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-4 for more information.

Press the customization buttonuntil REMOTE DOOR UNLOCKappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lampswill not flash when you press theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you pressthe unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.




DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the locking of thevehicle’s doors and liftgate will bedelayed. When locking the doorsand liftgate with the power doorlock switch and a door or the liftgateis open, this feature will delaylocking the doors and liftgate untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must beout of the ignition for this feature towork. You can temporarily overridedelayed locking by pressing thepower door lock switch twice or thelock button on the RKE transmittertwice. See Delayed Locking onpage 2-8 for more information.

Press the customization button untilDELAY DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settings

for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle’s doors.

ON (default): The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor or the liftgate is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select theamount of time you want the exteriorlamps to remain on when it is darkenough outside. This happens afterthe key is turned from ON/RUN toLOCK/OFF.

Press the customization button untilEXIT LIGHTING appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

30 SECONDS (default): Theexterior lamps will stay on for30 seconds.

1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps willstay on for one minute.

2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps willstay on for two minutes.




APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlights turn on briefly during low lightperiods after unlocking the vehicleusing the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button untilAPPROACH LIGHTING appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lights will turn onbriefly when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for20 seconds or until the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-4 formore information.



CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press the customization button untilCHIME VOLUME appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

NORMAL: The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay at thelast known setting.



PARK TILT MIRRORS

If your vehicle has this feature,it allows you to select whetheror not the outside mirror(s) willautomatically tilt down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).See Outside Power FoldawayMirrors on page 2-33 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilPARK TILT MIRRORS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outsidemirror will be tilted down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’soutside mirror will be tilted downwhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

PASSENGER MIRROR: Thepassenger’s outside mirror will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s andpassenger’s outside mirrors will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).



EASY EXIT SEAT

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the automatic easy exit seatfeature. See Memory Seat andMirrors on page 1-6 for moreinformation.

Press the customization buttonuntil EASY EXIT SEAT appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settings for

this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): No automatic seatexit recall will occur.

ON: The driver’s seat will moveback when the key is removed fromthe ignition.

The automatic easy exit seatmovement will only occur one timeafter the key is removed from theignition. If the automatic movementhas already occurred, and you putthe key back in the ignition andremove it again, the seat will stayin the original exit position, unlessa memory recall took place prior toremoving the key again.




MEMORY SEAT RECALL

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the remote memory seat recallfeature. See Memory Seat andMirrors on page 1-6 for moreinformation.

Press the customization buttonuntil MEMORY SEAT RECALLappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): No remote memoryseat recall will occur.

ON: The driver’s seat and outsidemirrors will automatically moveto the stored driving position whenthe unlock button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is

pressed. See “Relearn Remote Key”under DIC Operation and Displays(With DIC Buttons) on page 3-47or DIC Operation and Displays(Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-53for more information on matchingtransmitters to driver ID numbers.

NO CHANGE: No change willbe made to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.


REMOTE START

If your vehicle has this feature,it allows you to turn the remote startoff or on. The remote start featureallows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2-6 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE START appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature willbe disabled.

ON (default): The remote startfeature will be enabled.




FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features backto their factory default settings.

Press the customization button untilFACTORY SETTINGS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): Thecustomization features will be set totheir factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: Thecustomization features will not beset to their factory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Press the customization button untilFEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V TOEXIT appears in the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once toexit the menu.

If you do not exit, pressing thecustomization button againwill return you to the beginningof the feature settings menu.

Exiting the FeatureSettings MenuThe feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:

• The vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

• The vehicle is no longer inON/RUN.

• The trip/fuel or vehicleinformation DIC buttons arepressed.

• The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

• A 40 second time period haselapsed with no selection made.


Audio System(s)Determine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ CAUTION

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:

• Become familiar with theoperation and controls ofthe audio system.

• Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 4-2.

Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding anyequipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere with theoperation of the vehicle’s engine,radio, or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

The vehicle has Retained AccessoryPower (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after theignition is turned off. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 2-21 for more information.

Setting the ClockTo adjust the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key toACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,then press O, to turn theradio on.

2. Press G to display HR, MIN,MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,month, day, and year).

3. Press the pushbutton locatedunder any one of the labels tobe changed.

4. To increase the time or date, doone of the following:

• Press the pushbutton belowthe selected label.

• Press ¨SEEK.

• Press \ FWD.

• Turn f clockwise.


5. To decrease the time or date,do one of the following:

• Press ©SEEK.

• Press s REV.

• Turn f counter-clockwise.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or to changethe date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press G and then thepushbutton located under theforward arrow that displays onthe radio screen until the time12H (hour) and 24H (hour), andthe date MM/DD (month and day)and DD/MM (day and month)displays.

2. Press the pushbutton locatedunder the desired option.

3. Press G again to apply theselected default, or let the screentime out.

Radio(s)

Radio with CD


The vehicle may have one of theseradios as its audio system.

Radios with CD and DVDRadios with CD and DVD have aBose® Surround Sound System.Some of its features are explainedlater in this section under, “Adjustingthe Speakers (Balance/Fade)”.

If the vehicle has a Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system,it has a CD/DVD radio. See RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) Systemon page 3-116 for more informationon the vehicle’s RSE system.

The DVD player is the top sloton the radio faceplate. The playeris capable of reading the DTSprogrammed DVD Audio or DVDVideo media. DTS and DTS DigitalSurround are registered trademarksof Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

Manufactured under licensefrom Dolby Laboratories. Dolby andthe double-D symbol are trademarksof Dolby Laboratories.

Radio Data System (RDS)The Radio Data System (RDS)feature is available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This system relies uponreceiving specific information fromthese stations and only works whenthe information is available. While theradio is tuned to an FM-RDS station,the station name or call lettersdisplay. In rare cases, a radio stationcould broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features towork improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

Radio with CD and DVD


Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off. Turn toincrease or decrease the volume.

For vehicles with a RearEntertainment System (RSE),press and hold for more thantwo seconds to turn off the entireradio and RSE system and tostart the parental control feature.Parental control prevents the rearseat occupant from operating theRear Seat Audio (RSA) system orremote control.

A lock symbol displays next to theclock display while the parentalcontrol feature is being used.The feature remains on until O ispressed and held for more thantwo seconds, or the driver turns theignition off and exits the vehicle.

4 (Information): Press to switch thedisplay between the radio stationfrequency and the time. When theignition is in the OFF position,press 4 to display the time.For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMAor RDS features, press 4 to displayadditional text information relatedto the current FM-RDS or XMstation; or CD, MP3 or WMA song.If information is available during XM,CD, MP3 or WMA playback, thesong title information displays onthe top line of the display and artistinformation displays on the bottomline. When information is notavailable, “NO INFO” is displayed.

Speed Compensated Volume(SCV): The Speed CompensatedVolume (SCV) feature automaticallyadjusts the radio volume tocompensate for road and wind noiseas the vehicle speeds up or slowsdown, so that the volume level isconsistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to thedesired level.

2. Press the MENU button todisplay the radio setup menu.

3. Press the pushbutton underthe AUTO VOLUM (automaticvolume) label on the radiodisplay.

4. Press the pushbutton under thedesired Speed CompensatedVolume setting (OFF, Low, Med,or High) to select the level of radiovolume compensation. Press thepushbutton located below theBACK label on the MENU SETUPdisplay or let the display time outafter approximately 10 seconds.Each higher setting allows formore radio volume compensationat faster vehicle speeds.


Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM. The selectiondisplays.

f (Tune): Turn to select radiostations.

©SEEK ¨: Press to go to theprevious or to the next stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press andhold ©or ¨until a beep sounds.The radio goes to a station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press either arrow againto stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scansstations with a strong signal thatare in the selected band.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set uptheir radio station favorites while thevehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favoritestations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls.See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six pushbuttonspositioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by usingthe radio favorites page button(FAV button). Press to go throughup to six pages of favorites,each having six favorite stationsavailable per page. Each pageof favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XMstations.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted,are stored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press FAV to display the pagewhere to store the station.

3. Press and hold one of thesix pushbuttons until a beepsounds. When that pushbuttonis pressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored as a favorite.


To setup the number of favoritespages:

1. Press MENU to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the FAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressingthe pushbutton located belowthe displayed page numbers.

4. Press FAV, or let the menutime out, to return to the originalmain radio screen showing theradio station frequency labelsand to begin the process ofprogramming favorites for thechosen amount of numberedpages.

Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service,CD, MP3, and WMA features): Ifadditional information is available forthe current song being played, AutoText will automatically page/scroll theinformation every five seconds abovethe FAV presets on the radio display.

To activate Auto Text:


2. Press the pushbutton underAUTO TXT label on the radiodisplay.

3. Press the pushbutton under theON label on the radio display.

If 4 is pressed and the song titleor artist information is longerthan what can be displayed,the extra information will pageevery five seconds when AutoText is activated.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,or Treble): To adjust bass,midrange, or treble:

1. Press f until the tone controllabels display.

2. Continue pressing f to highlightthe desired label, or press thepushbutton under the desiredlabel.

3. To adjust the highlighted setting,do one of the following until thedesired levels are obtained.

• Turn f clockwise orcounterclockwise.

• Press \ FWD, or s REV.

If a station’s frequency is weak or ifthere is static, decrease the treble.


To quickly adjust bass, midrange,or treble to the middle position,press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREBlabel for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjuststo the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone andspeaker controls to the middleposition, press f for more thantwo seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press to choosebass and treble equalization settingsdesigned for different types of music.The choices are pop, rock, country,talk, jazz, and classical. SelectingMANUAL or changing bass or treble,returns the EQ to the manual bassand treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

If the radio has a Bose® audiosystem, the EQ settings are eitherMANUAL or TALK.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade):To adjust the balance or fade:

1. Press f until the speaker controllabels display.

2. Continue pressing f to highlightthe desired label, or press thepushbutton under the desiredlabel.

3. To adjust the highlighted setting,do one of the following until thedesired levels are obtained.

• Turn f clockwise orcounterclockwise.

• Press \ FWD, or s REV.

To quickly adjust balance or fadeto the middle position, press thepushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds and thelevel adjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press f for more than two secondsuntil a beep sounds.

Radios with CD and DVD fadedifferently depending on the DVDMedia type:

• With DVD-A 5.1 Surroundmedia, the left front and rightfront speakers fade rearward,leaving the center front speakersunaffected until the last fade step,then all front speakers mute.

• With DVD-V 5.1 Surround media,surround sound is maintaineduntil Step 4 of the Fade control isreached while fading rearward.At that point the audio systemoutput changes to Stereo toprevent the loss of Centerchannel output when the fullrearward fade position is reached.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) isturned on, the radio disables FADEand mutes the rear speakers.


Finding a Category (CAT)Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button isused to find XM™ stations when theradio is in the XM mode. To find XMchannels within a desired category:

1. Press BAND until the XMfrequency displays.

2. Press CAT to display thecategory labels.

3. Continue pressing CAT until thedesired category name displays.

• Radios with CD and DVD canalso navigate the categorylist by pressing s REVor \ FWD.

4. Press either of the two buttonsbelow the desired categorylabel to immediately tune tothe first XM station associatedwith that category.

5. To go to the next or previousXM station within the selectedcategory, do one of the following:

• Turn f.

• Press the buttons below theright or left arrows on thedisplay.

• Press either SEEK arrow.

6. To exit the category searchmode, press the FAV buttonor BAND button to displaythe favorites again.

Undesired XM categories canbe removed through the setupmenu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:


2. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the XM CAT label.

3. Turn f to display the category tobe removed.

4. Press the pushbutton locatedunder the Remove label untilthe category name along withthe word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to removemore categories.

Removed categories can berestored by pressing the pushbuttonunder the Add label when a removedcategory is displayed or by pressingthe pushbutton under the Restore Alllabel.

Categories cannot be removed oradded while the vehicle is movingfaster than 5 mph (8 km/h).


Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audiosystem has been calibrated for thevehicle from the factory. If CalibrationError displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly forthe vehicle and it must be returned toyour dealer/retailer for service.

Locked: This message displayswhen the THEFTLOCK® systemhas locked up the radio. Takethe vehicle to your dealer/retailerfor service.

If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer/retailer.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM is a satellite radio service that isbased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.XM Satellite Radio has a wide varietyof programming and commercial-freemusic, coast-to-coast, and indigital-quality sound. During yourtrial or when you subscribe, you willget unlimited access to XM RadioOnline for when you are not in thevehicle. A service fee is required toreceive the XM service. For moreinformation, contact XM atxmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100in the U.S. and xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Radio Messages for XM Only

See XM Radio Messages onpage 3-104 later in this sectionfor further detail.

Playing a CD(Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pullsit in and the CD should beginplaying.

Playing a CD (In Either theDVD or CD Slot)Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pullsit in and the CD should beginplaying (loading a disc into thesystem, depending on mediatype and format ranges from5 to 20 seconds for a CD, andup to 30 seconds for a DVD tobegin playing).

If the ignition or radio is turnedoff, while a CD is in the player,it stays in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CDstarts playing where it stopped, if itwas the last selected audio source.


The CD is controlled by the buttonson the radio faceplate or by the RSAunit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) onpage 3-125 for more information.The DVD/CD decks, (upper slot isthe DVD deck and the lower slotis the CD deck) of the radio arecompatible with most audio CDs,CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3/WMAs.

When a CD is inserted, the text labelDVD or CD symbol displays onthe left side of the radio display.As each new track starts to play,the track number displays.

Care of CDs and DVDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R orCD-RW quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD or DVD playerscans the bottom surface of the disc.If the surface of a CD is damaged,such as cracked, broken, or

scratched, the CD does not playproperly or not at all. Do not touchthe bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage thesurface. Pick up CDs by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of thehole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, takea soft, lint free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.


Care of the CD and DVD Player

Do not add any label to a CD,it could get caught in the CD orDVD player. If a CD is recordedon a personal computer anda description label is needed,try labeling the top of the recordedCD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners forCDs is not advised, due to the riskof contaminating the lens of theCD optics with lubricants internal tothe CD and DVD player mechanism.

Notice: If a label is added toa CD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player,use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD ata time, and keep the CD player andthe loading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Z EJECT or CD (Eject): Pressand release to eject the disc thatis currently playing. A CD ejectingfrom a radio with CD and DVD, ejectsfrom the bottom slot. A beep soundsand Ejecting Disc displays. Oncethe disc is ejected, Remove Discdisplays. The disc can be removed.If the disc is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the discautomatically pulls back intothe player.

Z DVD (Eject): Press and releaseto eject the disc that is currentlyplaying in the top slot. A beepsounds and Ejecting Disc displays.

If loading and reading of a disccannot be completed, and thedisc fails to eject, press andhold Z DVD for more thanfive seconds to force the discto eject.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD that is currently playing.

©SEEK ¨: Press ©to go to thestart of the current track, if more thanten seconds on the CD have played.Press ¨to go to the next track.

For Radios with CD and DVD,press ©to go to the start of thecurrent track, if more thanfive seconds on the CD have played.If less than five seconds on the CDhave played, the previous trackplays. Press ¨to go to the nexttrack.

If either arrow is held, or pressedmultiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward throughthe tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Press andhold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track. Sound will be heardat a reduced volume. Release toresume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.


\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track. Sound willbe heard at a reduced volume.Release to resume playing thetrack. The elapsed time of thetrack displays.

RDM (Random): CD tracks can belistened to in random, rather thansequential order with the randomsetting. To use random, press thepushbutton positioned under theRDM label until Random CurrentDisc displays. Press the pushbuttonagain to turn off random play.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CDremains inside the radio for futurelistening.

For the radio with CD and DVD,press to listen to the radio whena CD or DVD is playing. The CDor DVD remains inside the radiofor future listening or for viewingentertainment.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toselect between CD, or Auxiliary.

• When a CD is in the player theCD icon and a message showingthe disc and/or track numberdisplays.

• If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Pressto select between DVD, CD, orAuxiliary.

• If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, “No Aux Input Device”displays.

• When a disc is in either slot,the DVD/CD text label and amessage showing the track orchapter number displays.

• If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, and a disc is in boththe DVD slot and the CD slot theDVD/CD AUX button only cyclesbetween the two sources anddoes not indicate “No Aux InputDevice”.

• If a front auxiliary input device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUXbutton cycles through all availableoptions.

If a disc is inserted into top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to only navigatethe CD tracks through the remotecontrol.

See “Using the Auxiliary InputJack(s)” later in this section, or“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 3-116 for moreinformation.


Radios with CD and DVDAudio OutputOnly one audio source can beheard through the speakers at onetime. An audio source is definedas DVD slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM,Front Auxiliary Jack, or RearAuxiliary Jack.

Press O to turn the radio on.The radio can be heard throughall of the vehicle speakers.

Front seat passengers can listento the radio (AM, FM, or XM)by pressing BAND or DVD/CDAUX to select the CD slot, DVDslot, front or rear auxiliary input(if available).

If a playback device is plugged intothe radio’s front auxiliary input jack orthe rear auxiliary jack, the front seatpassengers are able to listen to

playback from this source throughthe vehicle speakers. See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in thissection, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks”under, Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System on page 3-116 formore information.

In some vehicles, depending onaudio options, the rear speakerscan be muted when the RSApower is turned on. See RearSeat Audio (RSA) on page 3-125for more information.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW DiscThe radio has the capability ofplaying an MP3/WMA CD-Ror CD-RW disc. For moreinformation on how to play anMP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc,see “Using an MP3” in the index.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: Radios with a SingleCD player display CHECK DISCand/or ejects the CD if an erroroccurs.

Radios with a CD and DVD playermay display other messages whenan error occurs:

Optical Error: The disc wasinserted upside down.

Disk Read Error: A disc wasinserted with an invalid or unknownformat.


Player Error: There are disc LOADor disc EJECT problems.

• It is very hot. When thetemperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

• The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother,the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

• There could have been a problemwhile burning the CD.

• The label could be caught in theCD player.

If the CD is not playing correctlyfor any other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected, contactyour dealer/retailer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.

Using the DVD PlayerThe DVD player can be controlledby the buttons on the remote control,the RSA system, or by the buttonson the radio faceplate. See “RemoteControl”, under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 3-116 and Rear Seat Audio(RSA) on page 3-125 for moreinformation.

The DVD player is only compatiblewith DVDs of the appropriate regioncode that is printed on the jacket ofmost DVDs.

The DVD slot of the radio iscompatible with most audio CDs,CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video,DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along with MP3 and WMAformats.

If an error message displays onthe video screen or the radio, see“DVD Display Error Messages”under, Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System on page 3-116 and“DVD Radio Error Messages” inthis section for more information.

Playing a DVD

f (Tune): Turn to change trackson a CD or DVD, to manually tunea radio station, or to change clockor date settings, while in the clockor date setting mode. See theinformation given earlier in thissection specific to the radio, CD,and the DVD. Also, see “Setting theClock” in the index, for setting theclock and date.

©SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press to return to thestart of the current track or chapter.Press ©again to go to the previoustrack or chapter. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.

SEEK ¨(Next Track/Chapter):Press to go to the next track orchapter. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.


s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressto quickly reverse the DVD atfive times the normal speed.The radio displays the elapsedtime while in fast reverse. To stopfast reversing, press again. Thisbutton may not work when the DVDis playing the copyright informationor the previews.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressto fast forward the DVD. The radiodisplays the elapsed time and fastforwards five times the normalspeed. To stop fast forwarding,press again. This button may notwork when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

Z (Eject): Press to eject a DVD.If the DVD is ejected, but notremoved, the player automaticallypulls it back in after 15 seconds.

If loading and reading of a DVDcannot be completed, because of anunknown format, etc., and the discfails to eject, press and hold for morethan five seconds to force the disc toeject.

DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons

Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radiodisplay menu shows several icons.Press the pushbuttons locatedunder any desired icon during DVDplayback. See the icon list belowfor more information.

The rear seat passenger cannavigate the DVD-V menus andcontrols through the remote control.See “Remote Control”, under RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) Systemon page 3-116 for more information.The Video Screen automaticallyturns on when the DVD-V is insertedinto the DVD slot.

r / j (Play/Pause): Press eitherthe play or pause icon displayedon the radio system, to togglebetween pausing or restartingplayback of a DVD.

• If the forward arrow is showingon display, the system is inpause mode.

• If the pause icon is showingon display, the system is inplayback mode.

• If the DVD screen is off, pressthe play button to turn thescreen on.

Some DVDs begin playing after thepreviews have finished, althoughthere could be a delay of up to30 seconds. If the DVD doesnot begin playing the movieautomatically, press the pushbuttonlocated under the play/pause icondisplayed on the radio. If the DVDstill does not play, refer to theon-screen instructions, if available.


c (Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.

r (Enter): Press to select thechoices that are highlighted inany menu.

y (Menu): Press to access theDVD menu. The DVD menu isdifferent on every DVD. Use thepushbuttons located under thenavigation arrows to navigate thecursor through the DVD menu. Aftermaking a selection press this button.This button only operates whenusing a DVD.

Nav (Navigate): Press to displaydirectional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

q (Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when a DVD isplaying and a menu is active.

DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons

Once a DVD-A is inserted, theradio display menu shows severalicons. Press the pushbuttonslocated under any desired iconduring DVD playback. See the iconlist below for more information.

The rear seat operator cannavigate the DVD-A menus andcontrols through the remote control.See “Remote Control”, under RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) Systemon page 3-116 for more information.The Video Screen does notautomatically power on when theDVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot.It must be manually turned on bythe rear seat occupant throughthe remote control power button.

r / j (Play/Pause): Press eitherthe play or pause icon displayedon the radio system, to togglebetween pausing or restartingplayback of a DVD.

• If the forward arrow is showingon display, the system is inpause mode.

• If the pause icon is showingon display, the system is inplayback mode.

q Group r: Press to cyclethrough musical groupings on theDVD-A disc.

Nav (Navigate): Press to displaydirectional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

e (Audio Stream): Press tocycle through audio stream formatslocated on the DVD-A disc.The video screen shows theaudio stream changing.


Inserting a Disc

To play a disc, gently insert thedisc, with the label side up, into theloading slot. The DVD player mightnot accept some paper labeledmedia. The player starts loading thedisc into the system and shows“Loading Disc” on the radio display.At the same time, the radio displaysa softkey menu of option(s). Somediscs automatically play the moviewhile others default to the softkeymenu display, which requires thePlay, Enter, or Navigation softkeysto be pressed; either by the softkeyon the radio or by the rear seatpassenger using the remote control.

It may take up to 30 seconds for aDVD to begin playing.

Stopping and Resuming Playback

To stop playing a DVD withoutturning off the system, do oneof the following:

• Press c on the remote control.

• Press the pushbutton locatedunder the stop or the play/pauseicons displayed on the radio.

• If the radio head is sourced tosomething other than DVD-V,press the DVD/CD AUX button tomake DVD-V the active source.

To resume DVD playback, do oneof the following:

• Press r / j on the remotecontrol.

• Press the pushbutton locatedunder the play/pause icondisplayed on the radio.

The DVD should resume play fromwhere it last stopped if the disc hasnot been ejected and the stop button

has not been pressed twice on theremote control. If the disc has beenejected or the stop button has beenpressed twice on the remote control,the disc resumes playing at thebeginning of the disc.

Ejecting a Disc

Press Z DVD on the radio to ejectthe disc. If a disc is ejected from theradio, but not removed, the radioreloads the disc after a short periodof time. The disc is stored in theradio. The radio does not resumeplay of the disc automatically. If themovie is reloaded and the RSAsystem is sourced to the DVD, theplayer begins to play again. If loadingand reading a DVD or CD cannot becompleted, and the disc fails to eject,press and hold Z DVD for morethan five seconds to force the discto eject.


DVD Radio Error Messages

Player Error: This messagedisplays when there are disc loador eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays, if the disc is insertedwith the disc label wrong side up,or if the disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays, if the disc is not from acorrect region.

No Disc Inserted: This messagedisplays, if no disc is presentwhen Z DVD or DVD/CD AUXis pressed on the radio.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackThe radio system has an auxiliaryinput jack located on the lower rightside of the faceplate. This is notan audio output; do not plug aheadphone set into the front auxiliaryinput jack. Connect an auxiliary inputdevice such as an iPod, laptopcomputer, MP3 player, CD player,or cassette tape player, etc. to theauxiliary input jack for use as anothersource for audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while the vehicleis in P (Park). See Defensive Drivingon page 4-2 for more information ondriver distraction.

To use an auxiliary input device,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable tothe radio’s front auxiliary input jack.

O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the volume of theportable player. Additional volumeadjustments might have to be madefrom the portable device if thevolume is not loud or soft enough.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device isplaying. The portable audio devicecontinues playing, so you mightwant to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toselect between CD, or Auxiliary.

• When a CD is in the playerthe CD icon and a messageshowing the disc and/or tracknumber displays.

• If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.


DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Pressto select between DVD, CD, orAuxiliary.

• If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, “No Aux Input Device”displays.

• When a disc is in either slot,the DVD/CD text label and amessage showing the track orchapter number displays.

• If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, and a disc is in boththe DVD slot and the CD slot theDVD/CD AUX button only cyclesbetween the two sources anddoes not indicate “No Aux InputDevice”.

• If a front auxiliary input device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUXbutton cycles through all availableoptions.

If a disc is inserted into top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to only navigatethe CD tracks through the remotecontrol.

See “Using the Auxiliary InputJack(s)” later in this section, or“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 3-116 for moreinformation.

Using an MP3(Radio with CD)MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3/WMA files thatwere recorded on a CD-R or CD-RWdisc. The files can be recorded withthe following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variablebit rate. Song title, artist name, andalbum are available for display by theradio when recorded using ID3 tagsversion 1 and 2.


Compressed Audio

The radio also plays discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMAfiles. The radio plays both file formatsin the order in which they wererecorded to the disc.

MP3/WMA Format

Creating an MP3/WMA disc on apersonal computer:

• Make sure the MP3/WMA filesare recorded on a CD-R orCD-RW disc.

• Do not mix standard audio andMP3/WMA files on one disc.

• The CD player is able toread and play a maximum of50 folders, 15 playlists, and acombined total of 512 foldersand files.

• Create a folder structure thatmakes it easy to find songswhile driving. Organize songsby albums using one folder foreach album. Each folder or albumshould contain 18 songs or less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system cansupport up to eight subfoldersdeep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimumin order to reduce the complexityand confusion in trying to locate aparticular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3or .wpl extension (other fileextensions might not work).

• Minimize the length of the file,folder, or playlist names. Long file,folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number offiles and folders, or playlists couldcause the player to be unable toplay up to the maximum numberof files, folders, playlists, or

sessions. To play a large numberof files, folders, playlists orsessions, minimize the length ofthe file, folder, or playlist name.Long names also take up morespace on the display, potentiallygetting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc beforeburning it. Trying to add music toan existing disc could cause thedisc not to function in the player.

Change playlists by using Sc andcT folder buttons, the f knob, orthe SEEK arrows. An MP3/WMACD-R or CD-RW that was recordedusing no file folders can be played.If a CD-R or CD-RW contains morethan the maximum of 50 folders,15 playlists, and a combined totalof 512 folders and files, the playeraccesses and navigates up to themaximum, but all items over themaximum are not accessible.


Root Directory

The root directory of the CD-Ror CD-RW is treated as a folder.If the root directory has compressedaudio files, the directory displaysas the CD label. All files containeddirectly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directoryfolders. However, playlists (Px) arealways accessed before root foldersor files.

If a disc contains bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA)and MP3/WMA files, a folder underthe root directory called CD accessesall of the CD audio tracks on the disc.

Empty Directory or Folder

If a root directory or a folder existssomewhere in the file structure thatcontains only folders/subfolders andno compressed files directly beneaththem, the player advances to thenext folder in the file structure thatcontains compressed audio files.The empty folder does not display.

No Folder

When the CD-R or CD-RW disccontains only compressed files, thefiles are located under the root folder.The next and previous folder functiondoes not display on a CD-R orCD-RW disc that was recordedwithout folders or playlists.

When the CD-R or CD-RWdisc contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but nofolders, all files are located underthe root folder. The folder down andup buttons search playlists (Px) firstand then goes to the root folder.

Order of Play

Tracks recorded to the CD-R orCD-RW disc are played in thefollowing order:

• Play begins from the first trackin the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, playcontinues from the first track ofthe first playlist.

• Play begins from the first trackin the first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last track ofthe last folder has played, playcontinues from the first track ofthe first folder.

When play enters a new folder,the display does not automaticallyshow the new folder name unlessthe folder mode is chosen as thedefault display. The new track namedisplays.


File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then the radiodisplays the file name without theextension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the filename does not display.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists thatwere created using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however,they cannot be edited using theradio. These playlists are treatedas special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3/WMA

Insert a CD-R or CD-RW discpartway into the slot label side up.The player pulls it in, and the CD-Ror CD-RW should begin playing.

Z EJECT: Press to eject the disc.

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMAfiles on the CD-R or CD-RWcurrently playing.

©SEEK ¨: Press the leftSEEK arrow to go to the start ofthe current MP3/WMA file, if morethan ten seconds have played. Pressthe right SEEK arrow to go to thenext MP3/WMA file. If either SEEKarrow is held or pressed multipletimes, the player continues movingbackward or forward throughMP3/WMA files on the CD.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe pushbutton positioned underthe Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

cT (Next Folder): Pressthe pushbutton positioned underthe Folder label to go to thefirst track in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press andhold this button to reverse playbackquickly within an MP3/WMA file.Sound is heard at a reduced volume.Release this button to resumeplaying the file. The elapsed timeof the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold this button to advanceplayback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at areduced volume. Release thisbutton to resume playing the file.The elapsed time of the file displays.


RDM (Random): With the randomsetting, MP3/WMA files on the CD-Ror CD-RW can be listened to inrandom, rather than sequential order.

To play MP3/WMA files from theCD-R or CD-RW in random order,press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM label until RandomCurrent Disc displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn offrandom play.

h (Music Navigator): Use themusic navigator feature to playMP3/WMA files on the CD-R orCD-RW in order by artist or album.Press the pushbutton located belowthe music navigator label. The playerscans the disc to sort the files byartist and album ID3 tag information.It could take several minutes to scanthe disc depending on the numberof MP3/WMA files recorded to the

CD-R or CD-RW disc. The radio canbegin playing while it is scanning thedisc in the background. When thescan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RWbegins playing again.

Once the disc has scanned, theplayer defaults to playing MP3/WMAfiles in order by artist. The currentartist playing is shown on the secondline of the display between thearrows. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order onthe CD-R or CD-RW and beginsplaying MP3/WMA files by that artist.To listen to MP3/WMA files byanother artist, press the pushbuttonlocated below either arrow button.The player goes to the next orprevious artist in alphabetical order.Continue pressing either button untilthe desired artist is displayed.

To change from playback by artistto playback by album, press thepushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, pushone of the buttons below the albumbutton. Press the pushbutton belowthe back label to return to the mainmusic navigator screen. Now thealbum name is displayed on thesecond line between the arrows andsongs from the current album beginsto play. Once all songs from thatalbum are played, the player movesto the next album in alphabeticalorder on the CD-R or CD-RW andbegins playing MP3/WMA files fromthat album.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe pushbutton below the Back labelto return to normal MP3/WMAplayback.


Using an MP3 (Radiowith CD and DVD Player)MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW Disc

Compressed Audio or MixedMode Discs

The radio also plays discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMAfiles depending on which slot the discis loaded into. By default the radioreads only the uncompressed audio(.CDA) and ignores the MP3/WMAfiles on the DVD deck. On the CDdeck, pressing the CAT (category)button toggles between compressedand uncompressed audio format,the default being the uncompressedformat (.CDA).

MP3/WMA Format

To create an MP3/WMA disc on apersonal computer:• Make sure the MP3/WMA files

are recorded on a CD-R orCD-RW disc.

• Do not mix standard audio andMP3/WMA files on one disc.

• The CD player (lower slot) isable to read and play a maximumcombination of 512 files andfolders. The DVD player (upperslot) is able to read 255 folders,15 playlists and 40 sessions.

• Create a folder structure thatmakes it easy to find songswhile driving. Organize songsby albums using one folder foreach album. Each folder or albumshould contain 18 songs or less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system cansupport up to eight subfoldersdeep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimumin order to reduce the complexityand confusion in trying to locate aparticular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists havea .m3u, .wpl or .pls extensionas other file extensions mightnot work.

• Minimize the length of the file,folder or playlist names. Long file,folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number offiles and folders, or playlists couldcause the player to be unable toplay up to the maximum numberof files, folders, playlists, orsessions. To play a large numberof files, folders, playlists, orsessions, minimize the length ofthe file, folder, or playlist name.Long names also take up morespace on the display, potentiallygetting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc beforeburning it. Trying to add music toan existing disc could cause thedisc not to function in the player.


Root Directory

The root directory of the CD-R orCD-RW disc is treated as a folder.If the root directory has compressedaudio files, the directory is displayedas F1 ROOT. All files containeddirectly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directoryfolders. However, playlists (Px) arealways accessed before root foldersor files.

Empty Directory or Folder

If a root directory or a folder existssomewhere in the file structure thatcontains only folders/subfolders andno compressed files directly beneaththem, the player advances to thenext folder in the file structure thatcontains compressed audio files.The empty folder does not display.

No Folder

When the CD-R or CD-RW disccontains only compressed files, thefiles are located under the root folder.The next and previous folder functiondoes not function on a CD-R orCD-RW that was recorded withoutfolders or playlists. When displayingthe name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

When the CD-R or CD-RWdisc contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but nofolders, all files are located underthe root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons searchplaylists (Px) first and then goesto the root folder. When the radiodisplays the name of the folder theradio displays ROOT.

Order of Play

Tracks recorded to the CD-R orCD-RW disc are played in thefollowing order:

• Play begins from the first trackin the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, playcontinues from the first track ofthe first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last track ofthe last folder has played, playcontinues from the first track ofthe first folder.

When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automatically showthe new folder name unless thefolder mode has been chosen as thedefault display. The new track namedisplays.


File System and Naming

The song name that is displayed isthe song name that is contained inthe ID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then the radiodisplays the file name without theextension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pagesare shortened. Parts of wordson the last page of text and theextension of the filename displays.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists thatwere created using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however,they cannot be edited using theradio. These playlists are treatedas special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3/WMA (In Eitherthe DVD or CD Slot)

Insert a CD-R or CD-RW discpartway into either the top or bottomslot, label side up. The player pulls itin, and the CD-R or CD-RW shouldbegin playing.

Depending on the format of thedisc, a softkey menu appears andallows navigation of the disc.The menu reads left to right asRDM (Randomize song play order),a Folder icon with left and rightarrows (to move up or down throughavailable folders), a PL tag if the dischas a Playlist available, and a MusicNavigator tag. If a Playlist tag isshown, toggling this key brings upa Folder softkey only or the menuas previously described.

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD-R or CD-RW disc in theplayer it stays in the player. Whenthe ignition or radio is turned back

on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts toplay where it stopped, if it was thelast selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play,the track number and song titledisplays.

Z CD (Eject): Press and releasethis button to eject the CD-R orCD-RW that is currently playingin the bottom slot. A beep soundsand Ejecting Disc displays. Oncethe disc is ejected, Remove Discdisplays. The CD-R or CD-RW disccan be removed. If the CD-R orCD-RW disc is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the CD-R orCD-RW disc automatically pullsback into the player.

If loading and reading of a CD cannotbe completed, such as unknownformat, etc., and the disc fails toeject, press and hold this button formore than five seconds to force thedisc to eject.


Z DVD (Eject): Press and releasethis button to eject the CD-R orCD-RW that is currently playingin the top slot. A beep soundsand Ejecting Disc displays. Oncethe disc is ejected, Remove Discdisplays. The CD-R or CD-RW disccan be removed. If the CD-R orCD-RW disc is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the CD-R orCD-RW disc automatically pulls backinto the player. If loading and readingof a CD cannot be completed, suchas unknown format, etc., and thedisc fails to eject, press and hold thisbutton for more than five seconds toforce the disc to eject.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to selectMP3/WMA files on the CD-R orCD-RW that is currently playing.

©SEEK ¨: Press the leftSEEK arrow to go to the start ofthe current MP3/WMA file, if morethan five seconds have played.If less than five seconds haveplayed, the previous MP3/WMA fileplays. Press the right SEEK arrow togo to the next MP3/WMA file. If eitherSEEK arrow is held, or pressedmultiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward throughthe MP3/WMA files on the CD.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe pushbutton positioned underthe Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

cT (Next Folder): Pressthe pushbutton positioned underthe Folder label to go to thefirst track in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press andhold this button to reverse playbackquickly within an MP3/WMA file.Sound is heard at a reduced volume.Release this button to resumeplaying the file. The elapsed timeof the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold this button to advanceplayback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at areduced volume. Release thisbutton to resume playing the file.The elapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the randomsetting, MP3/WMA files on the CD-Ror CD-RW can be listened to inrandom, rather than sequential order.To play MP3/WMA files from theCD-R or CD-RW in random order,press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM label until RandomCurrent Disc displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn offrandom play.


h (Music Navigator): Use themusic navigator feature to playMP3/WMA files on the CD-R orCD-RW in order by artist or album.Press the pushbutton located belowthe music navigator label. The playerscans the disc to sort the files byartist and album ID3 tag information.It could take several minutes to scanthe disc depending on the numberof MP3/WMA files recorded to theCD-R or CD-RW disc.

To cancel music navigator whilethe player is scanning, press thepushbutton located below the musicnavigator label or eject the disc.

The radio can begin playing while it isscanning the disc in the background.When the scan is finished, the CD-Ror CD-RW begins playing again.

Once the disc has been scanned, theplayer defaults to playing MP3/WMAfiles in order by artist. The currentartist playing is shown on the second

line of the display between thearrows. To listen to MP3/WMAfiles by another artist, press thepushbutton located below eitherarrow button. The disc goes to thenext or previous artist in alphabeticalorder. Continue pressing eitherbutton until the desired artist isdisplayed.

To change from playback by artistto playback by album, press thepushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, pushone of the buttons below the albumbutton. Press the pushbutton belowthe back label to return to the mainmusic navigator screen. Now thealbum name displays on the secondline between the arrows and songsfrom the current album begin to play.Once all songs from that album areplayed, the player moves to the nextalbum in alphabetical order on theCD-R or CD-RW and begins playingMP3/WMA files from that album.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe pushbutton below the Back labelto return to normal MP3/WMAplayback.

BAND: Press this button to listen tothe radio when a CD or a DVD isplaying. The CD or DVD remainsinside the radio for future listeningor viewing entertainment.

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Pressthis button to cycle through DVD,CD, or Auxiliary when listening tothe radio. The DVD/CD text labeland a message showing track orchapter number displays when adisc is in either slot. Press thisbutton again and the systemautomatically searches for anauxiliary input device, such asa portable audio player. If a portableaudio player is not connected,“No Aux Input Device” displays.


If a disc is in both the DVD slot andthe CD slot the DVD/CD AUX buttoncycles between the two sources anddoes not indicate “No Aux InputDevice”. If a front auxiliary deviceis connected, the DVD/CD AUXbutton cycles through all availableoptions, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary(if available). See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in thissection, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks”under, Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System on page 3-116 formore information.

If a MP3/WMA is inserted into topDVD slot, the rear seat operator canturn on the video screen and use theremote control to navigate the CD(tracks only).

XM Radio MessagesXL (Explicit Language Channels):These channels, or any others, canbe blocked at a customer’s request,by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating: The encryptioncode in the receiver is beingupdated, and no action is required.This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blockingthe XM™ signal. When the vehicleis moved into an open area, thesignal should return.

Loading XM: The audio systemis acquiring and processingaudio and text data. No action isneeded. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channelis not currently in service. Tunein to another channel.

Channel Unauth: This channelis blocked or cannot be receivedwith your XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station.If this station was one of the presets,choose another station for thatpreset button.

No Artist Info: No artist informationis available at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.


No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Information: No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

CAT Not Found: There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory. The system is workingproperly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receiverin the vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM receivers cannot beswapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after having thevehicle serviced, check with yourdealer/retailer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with theXM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Check XM Receivr: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receivercould have a fault. Consult withyour dealer/retailer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a shortperiod of time, the receiver couldhave a fault. Consult with yourdealer/retailer.

Navigation/Radio SystemFor vehicles with a navigationradio system, see the separateNavigation System manual.

Bluetooth®

Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth capable cellphone with a Hands Free Profileto make and receive phone calls.The system can be used whilethe key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The rangeof the Bluetooth system can be upto 30 ft. (9.1 m). Not all phonessupport all functions, and not allphones are guaranteed to workwith the in-vehicle Bluetooth system.See gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones.


Voice RecognitionThe Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting fora voice command. Wait untilthe tone and then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio SystemWhen using the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes throughthe vehicle’s front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, to changethe volume level. The adjustedvolume level remains in memory forlater calls. To prevent missed calls,a minimum volume level is used ifthe volume is turned down too low.

Bluetooth ControlsUse the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate thein-vehicle Bluetooth system.See Audio Steering Wheel Controlson page 3-128 for more information.

bg (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, to confirmsystem information, and to startspeech recognition.

cx (Phone On Hook): Pressto end a call, reject a call, or tocancel an operation.


PairingA Bluetooth enabled cell phone mustbe paired to the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem first and then connected tothe vehicle before it can be used.See the cell phone manufacturersuser guide for Bluetooth functionsbefore pairing the cell phone. If aBluetooth phone is not connected,calls will be made using OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling, if available.Refer to the OnStar owner’s guidefor more information.

Pairing Information:

• Up to five cell phones canbe paired to the in-vehicleBluetooth system.

• The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

• The in-vehicle Bluetooth systemautomatically links with the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder the phone was paired.

• Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the in-vehicleBluetooth system at a time.

• Pairing should only need tobe completed once, unlesschanges to the pairinginformation have been madeor the phone is deleted.

To link to a different paired phone,see Linking to a Different Phonelater in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold bg fortwo seconds. The systemresponds with “Ready” followedby a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The systemresponds with “Bluetoothready” followed by a tone.

3. Say “Pair”. The system respondswith instructions and a four digitPIN number. The PIN numberwill be used in Step 4.

4. Start the Pairing process on thecell phone that will be paired tothe vehicle. Reference the cellphone manufacturers user guidefor information on this process.Locate the device named“General Motors” in the list onthe cellular phone and follow theinstructions on the cell phoneto enter the four digit PIN numberthat was provided in Step 3.

5. The system prompts for a namefor the phone. Use a namethat best describes the phone.This name will be used toindicate which phone isconnected. The system thenconfirms the name provided.

6. The system responds with“<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 foradditional phones to be paired.


Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

1. Press and hold b g fortwo seconds. The systemresponds with “Ready” followedby a tone.


3. Say “List”. The system lists allthe paired Bluetooth devices.If a phone is connected tothe vehicle, the system willsay “Is connected” after theconnected phone.

Deleting a Paired Phone



3. Say “Delete”. The system askswhich phone to delete followedby a tone.

4. Say the name of the phone tobe deleted. If the phone name isunknown, use the “List” commandfor a list of all paired phones.The system responds with “Wouldyou like to delete <phone name>?Yes or No” followed by a tone.

5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone.The system responds with“OK, deleting <phone name>”.

Linking to a Different Phone



3. Say “Change phone”.The system responds with“Please wait while I searchfor other phones”.

• If another phone is found,the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected”.

• If another phone is not found,the original phone remainsconnected.

Storing Name TagsThe system can store up to thirtyphone numbers as name tagsthat are shared between theBluetooth and OnStar systems.

The system uses the followingcommands to store and retrievephone numbers:

• Store

• Digit Store

• Directory


Using the Store Command

The store command allows a phonenumber to be stored withoutentering the digits individually.


2. Say “Store”. The systemresponds with “Store, numberplease” followed by a tone.

3. Say the complete phone numberto be stored at once with nopauses.

• If the system recognizesthe number it responds with“OK, Storing” and repeats thephone number.

• If the system is unsure itrecognizes the phone number,it responds with “Store” andrepeats the number followedby “Please say yes or no”.

If the number is correct, say“Yes”. If the number is notcorrect, say “No”. The systemwill ask for the number to bere-entered.

4. After the system stores thephone number, it respondswith “Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phonenumber. The name tag isrecorded and the systemresponds with “About tostore <name tag>. Doesthat sound OK?”.

• If the name tag does not soundcorrect, say “No” and repeatStep 5.

• If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” and thename tag is stored. After thenumber is stored the systemreturns to the main menu.

Using the Digit Store Command

The digit store command allowsa phone number to be storedby entering the digits individually.


2. Say “Digit Store”. The systemresponds with “Please say thefirst digit to store” followedby a tone.

3. Say the first digit to be stored.The system will repeat backthe digit it heard followed by atone. Continue entering digitsuntil the number to be storedis complete.

• If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system,say “Clear” at any timeto clear the last number.

• To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time and thesystem will repeat them.


4. After the complete numberhas been entered, say “Store”.The system responds with“Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phonenumber. The name tag isrecorded and the systemresponds with “About tostore <name tag>. Doesthat sound OK?”.

• If the name tag does notsound correct, say “No”and repeat Step 5.

• If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” andthe name tag is stored.After the number is storedthe system returns to themain menu.

Using the Directory Command

The directory command listsall of the name tags stored bythe system. To use the directorycommand:


2. Say “Directory”. The systemresponds with “Directory”and then plays back all ofthe stored name tags. Whenthe list is complete, the systemreturns to the main menu.

Deleting Name TagsThe system uses the followingcommands to delete name tags:

• Delete

• Delete all name tags

Using the Delete Command

The delete command allows specificname tags to be deleted.

To use the delete command:


2. Say “Delete”. The systemresponds with “Delete, please saythe name tag” followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag to be deleted.The system responds with “Wouldyou like to delete, <name tag>?Please say yes or no”.

• If the name tag is correct, say“Yes” to delete the name tag.The system responds with“OK, deleting <name tag>,returning to the main menu.”

• If the name tag is incorrect,say “No”. The systemresponds with “No. OK,let’s try again, please saythe name tag.”


Using the Delete All Name TagsCommand

The delete all name tags commanddeletes all stored phone book nametags and route name tags for OnStar(if present).

To use the delete all name tagscommand:


2. Say “Delete all name tags”.The system responds with“You are about to delete allname tags stored in yourphone directory and yourroute destination directory.Are you sure you want to dothis? Please say yes or no.”

• Say “Yes” to delete allname tags.

• Say “No” to cancel thefunction and return tothe main menu.

Making a CallCalls can be made using thefollowing commands:

• Dial

• Digit Dial

• Call

• Re-dial

Using the Dial Command


2. Say “Dial”. The system respondswith “Dial using <phone name>.“Number please” followed bya tone.

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing.

• If the system recognizes thenumber, it responds with“OK, Dialing” and dialsthe number.

• If the system does notrecognize the number, itconfirms the numbers followedby a tone. If the number iscorrect, say “Yes”. The systemresponds with “OK, Dialing”and dials the number. If thenumber is not correct, say“No”. The system will ask forthe number to be re-entered.

Using the Digit Dial Command


2. Say “Digit Dial”. The systemresponds with “Digit dial using<phone name>, please say thefirst digit to dial” followed bya tone.

3. Say the digit to be dialed oneat a time. Following each digit, thesystem will repeat back the digit itheard followed by a tone.


4. Continue entering digits until thenumber to be dialed is complete.After the whole number has beenentered, say “Dial”. The systemresponds with “OK, Dialing” anddials the number.

• If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system,say “Clear” at any time to clearthe last number.

• To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time andthe system will repeat them.

Using the Call Command


2. Say “Call”. The system respondswith “Call using <phone name>.Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag of the personto call.

• If the system clearlyrecognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, calling,<name tag>” and dialsthe number.

• If the system is unsure itrecognizes the right nametag, it confirms the name tagfollowed by a tone. If the nametag is correct, say “Yes”.The system responds with“OK, calling, <name tag>” anddials the number. If the nametag is not correct, say “No”.The system will ask for thename tag to be re-entered.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the Re-dial Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”.The system responds with“Re-dial using <phone name>”and dials the last numbercalled from the connectedBluetooth phone.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Receiving a CallWhen an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and aring tone is heard in the vehicle.

• Press b g and begin speakingto answer the call.

• Press c x to ignore a call.


Call WaitingCall waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

• Press bg to answer anincoming call when another call isactive. The original call is placedon hold.

• Press bg again to return to theoriginal call.

• To ignore the incoming call,continue with the original callwith no action.

• Press cx to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three-Way CallingThree-Way Calling must besupported on the Bluetooth phoneand enabled by the wireless servicecarrier to work.

1. While on a call press b g.The system responds with“Ready” followed by a tone.

2. Say “Three-way call”. The systemresponds with “Three-way call,please say dial or call”.

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press bg to link all the callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Press c x to end a call.

Muting a CallDuring a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so thatthe person on the other end ofthe call cannot hear them.

To Mute a call

1. Press b g. The systemresponds with “Ready” followedby a tone.

2. Say “Mute Call”. The systemresponds with “Call muted”.

To Cancel Mute


2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”.The system responds with“Resuming call”.


Transferring a CallAudio can be transferred betweenthe in-vehicle Bluetooth systemand the cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to theCell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:


2. Say “Transfer Call.” The systemresponds with “Transferring call”and the audio will switch fromthe vehicle to the cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to theIn-Vehicle Bluetooth System

The cellular phone must be pairedand connected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes afterthe key is turned to the ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY position.

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press bg for more thantwo seconds. The audio switchesfrom the cell phone to the vehicle.

Voice Pass-ThruVoice Pass-Thru allows access tothe voice recognition commands onthe cell phone. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.This feature can be used to verballyaccess contacts stored in the cellphone.



3. Say “Voice”. The systemresponds with “OK, accessing<phone name>”.

• The cell phone’s normalprompt messages will gothrough its cycle accordingto the phone’s operatinginstructions.


Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) TonesThe in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers and numbers storedas name tags during a call. This isused when calling a menu drivenphone system. Account numbers canbe programmed into the phonebookfor retrieval during menu driven calls.

Sending a Number During a Call


2. Say “Dial”. The system respondswith “Say a number to sendtones” followed by a tone.

3. Say the number to send.

• If the system clearlyrecognizes the numberit responds with “OK, SendingNumber” and the dial tonesare sent and the callcontinues.

• If the system is not sure itrecognized the numberproperly, it responds “DialNumber, Please say yes orno?” followed by a tone. If thenumber is correct, say “Yes”.The system responds with“OK, Sending Number” andthe dial tones are sent andthe call continues.

Sending a Stored Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Send name tag.”The system responds with“Say a name tag to send tones”followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag to send.

• If the system clearlyrecognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, Sending<name tag>” and the dialtones are sent and thecall continues.

• If the system is not sure itrecognized the name tagproperly, it responds “Dial<name tag>, Please say yesor no?” followed by a tone.If the name tag is correct, say“Yes”. The system respondswith “OK, Sending <nametag>” and the dial tones aresent and the call continues.


Clearing the SystemUnless information is deleted outof the in-vehicle Bluetooth system,it will be retained indefinitely.This includes all saved name tagsin the phonebook and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theabove sections on Deleting a PairedPhone and Deleting Name Tags.

Other InformationThe Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of suchmarks by General Motors is underlicense. Other trademarks andtrade names are those of theirrespective owners.




This device complies with RSS-210of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following twoconditions:



Changes or modifications tothis system by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) SystemThe vehicle may have a DVD RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) system.The RSE system works with thevehicle’s audio system. The DVDplayer is part of the front radio.The RSE system includes a radiowith a DVD player, a video displayscreen, audio/video jacks, twowireless headphones, and a remotecontrol. See Radio(s) on page 3-77for more information on the vehicle’saudio/DVD system.

Before DrivingThe RSE is designed for rearseat passengers only. The drivercannot safely view the video screenwhile driving and should not tryto do so.


In severe or extreme weatherconditions the RSE system mightor might not work until thetemperature is within the operatingrange. The operating range for theRSE system is above −4°F (−20°C)or below 140°F (60°C). If thetemperature of the vehicle is outsideof this range, heat or cool the vehicleuntil the temperature is within theoperating range of the RSE system.

Parental ControlThe RSE system may have aParental Control feature, dependingon the radio. To enable ParentalControl, press and hold the radiopower button for more thantwo seconds to stop all systemfeatures such as: radio, videoscreen, RSA, DVD and/or CD.While Parental Control is on,Q displays.

When the radio is turned back on,Parental Control is unlocked.

Headphones

The RSE includes two 2-channelwireless headphones that arededicated to this system. Channel 1is dedicated to the video screen,while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSAselections. These headphones areused to listen to media such as CDs,DVDs, MP3/WMAs, DVD-As, radio,any auxiliary source connected toA/V jacks, or the auxiliary input jack,if the vehicle has this feature.The wireless headphones have anOn/Off button, channel 1/2 switch,and a volume control. Switch theheadphones to Off when not in use.

Push the power button to turn onthe headphones. An indicator lightlocated on the headphones comeson. If the light does not come on, thebatteries might need to be replaced.Intermittent sound or static onthe headphones can also be anindication of weak batteries.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section for more information.

The headphones automatically turnoff after four hours of continuous use.

To adjust the volume on theheadphones, use the volume controllocated on the right side.

Infrared transmitters are locatedat the rear of the RSE overheadconsole. The headphones shut offautomatically to save the batterypower if the RSE system and RSAare shut off or if the headphones areout of range of the transmitters formore than three minutes. Moving toofar forward or stepping out of thevehicle, can cause the headphonesto lose the audio signal.


For optimal audio performance,the headphones must be worncorrectly. Headphones should beworn with the headband over the topof the head for best audio reception.The symbol L (Left) appears onthe upper left side, above theear pad and should be positionedon the left ear. The symbol R (Right)appears on the upper right side,above the ear pad and shouldbe positioned on the right ear.

Notice: Do not store theheadphones in heat or directsunlight. This could damagethe headphones and repairs willnot be covered by the warranty.Storage in extreme cold canweaken the batteries. Keep theheadphones stored in a cool,dry place.

If the foam ear pads attached tothe headphones become worn ordamaged, the pads can be replacedseparately from the headphone set.See your dealer/retailer for moreinformation.

Headphones should be stored inthe front floor console and not in thefront seat back pocket. Headphonedamage can occur when the secondrow seats are folded forward.

Battery Replacement

To change the batteries on theheadphones:

1. Turn the screw to loosen thebattery door located on theleft side of the headphones.Slide the battery door open.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure thatthey are installed correctly, usingthe diagram on the inside ofthe battery compartment.

3. Replace the battery door andtighten the door screw.

If the headphones are to be storedfor a long period of time, removethe batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

The A/V jacks, located on the rearof the floor console, allow audio orvideo signals to be connected froman auxiliary device such as acamcorder or a video game unit tothe RSE system. Adapter connectorsor cables (not supplied) might berequired to connect the auxiliarydevice to the A/V jacks. Refer tothe manufacturer’s instructions forproper usage.


The A/V jacks are color coded tomatch typical home entertainmentsystem equipment. The yellowjack (A) is for the video input.The white jack (B) is for the leftaudio input. The red jack (C) isfor the right audio input.

Power for auxiliary devices is notsupplied by the radio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of theRSE system, connect an externalauxiliary device to the color-codedA/V jacks and turn both the auxiliarydevice and the video screen poweron. If the video screen is in the DVDplayer mode, pressing the AUX(auxiliary) button on the remotecontrol, switches the video screenfrom the DVD player mode to theauxiliary device. The radio can listento the audio of the connectedauxiliary device by sourcing toauxiliary. See Radio(s) on page 3-77for more information.

How to Change the RSE VideoScreen Settings

The screen display mode (normal,full, and zoom), screen brightness,and setup menu language canbe changed from the on screensetup menu by using the remotecontrol. To change a setting:

1. Press z.

2. Use n, q, p, o and r tonavigate and use the setup menu.

3. Press z again to remove thesetup menu from the screen.

Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player orauxiliary inputs can be heardthrough the following sources:

• Wireless Headphones

• Vehicle Speakers

• Vehicle wired headphone jackson the rear seat audio system,if the vehicle has this feature.

The RSE system always transmitsthe audio signal to the wirelessheadphones, if there is audioavailable. See “Headphones” earlierin this section for more information.

The DVD player is capable ofoutputting audio to the wiredheadphone jacks on the RSAsystem, if the vehicle has thisfeature. The DVD player can beselected as an audio source onthe RSA system. See RearSeat Audio (RSA) on page 3-125for more information.

When a device is connected to theA/V jacks, or the radio’s auxiliaryinput jack, if the vehicle has thisfeature, the rear seat passengersare able to hear audio from theauxiliary device through the wirelessor wired headphones. The front seatpassengers are able to listen toplayback from this device throughthe vehicle speakers by selectingAUX as the source on the radio.


Video ScreenThe video screen is located inthe overhead console. When thevideo screen is not in use, push itup into its locked position.

To use the video screen:

1. Push the release button locatedon the overhead console.

2. Move the screen to the desiredposition.

If a DVD is playing and the screenis raised to its locked position, thescreen remains on; this is normal,and the DVD continues to playthrough the previous audio source.Press P on the remote control oreject the disc to turn off the screen.

The infrared receivers for thewireless headphones and theremote control are located at therear of the overhead console.

Notice: Avoid directly touchingthe video screen, as damagemay occur. See “Cleaningthe Video Screen” later in thissection for more information.

Remote ControlTo use the remote control, aim it atthe transmitter window at the rear ofthe overhead console and press thedesired button. Direct sunlight or verybright light could affect the abilityof the RSE transmitter to receivesignals from the remote control.If the remote control does not seemto be working, the batteries mightneed to be replaced. See “Battery

Replacement” later in this section.Objects blocking the line of sightcould also affect the function of theremote control.

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVDslot, the remote control O button canbe used to turn on the video screendisplay and start the disc. The radiocan also turn on the video screendisplay. See Radio(s) on page 3-77for more information.

Notice: Storing the remotecontrol in a hot area or in directsunlight can damage it, andthe repairs will not be covered bythe warranty. Storage in extremecold can weaken the batteries.Keep the remote control storedin a cool, dry place.


Remote Control Buttons O (Power): Press to turn the videoscreen on and off.

P (Illumination): Press to turnthe remote control backlight on.The backlight automatically times outafter seven to ten seconds if no otherbutton is pressed while the backlightis on.

v (Title): Press to return the DVDto the main menu of the DVD. Thisfunction could vary for each disc.

y (Main Menu): Press to accessthe DVD menu. The DVD menuis different on every DVD. Use thenavigation arrows to move thecursor around the DVD menu.After making a selection pressthe enter button. This button onlyoperates when using a DVD.

n, q, p, o (Menu NavigationArrows): Use the arrow buttons tonavigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press to selectthe choice that is highlighted inany menu.

z (Display Menu): Press to adjustthe brightness, screen display mode(normal, full, or zoom), and displaythe language menu.

q (Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when the displaymenu or a DVD menu is active.

c (Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding aDVD. Press twice to return tothe beginning of the DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press to startplaying a DVD. Press while aDVD is playing to pause it.Press again to continueplaying the DVD.

When the DVD is playing,depending on the radio,play may be slowed downby pressing s then [.The DVD continues playingin a slow play mode.


Depending on the radio, performreverse slow play by pressing sthen r. To cancel slow play mode,press s again.

t (Previous Track/Chapter): Pressto return to the start of the currenttrack or chapter. Press again to goto the previous track or chapter.This button might not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Pressto go to the beginning of the nextchapter or track. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press to quicklyreverse the DVD or CD. To stop fastreversing a DVD video, press s.To stop fast reversing a DVD audioor CD, release r. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fastforwarding a DVD video, press s.To stop fast forwarding a DVD audioor CD, release [. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

e (Audio): Press to change audiotracks on DVDs that have thisfeature when the DVD is playing.The format and content of thisfunction vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitles): Press to turnON/OFF subtitles and to movethrough subtitle options when a DVDis playing. The format and contentof this function vary for each disc.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press toswitch the system between theDVD player and an auxiliary source.

d (Camera): Press to changecamera angles on DVDs thathave this feature when a DVD isplaying. The format and contentof this function vary for each disc.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):The numeric keypad provides thecapability of direct chapter or tracknumber selection.

\ (Clear): Press withinthree seconds after enteringa numeric selection, to clearall numerical inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Pressto select chapter or track numbersgreater than nine. Press this buttonbefore entering the number.

If the remote control becomes lostor damaged, a new universal remotecontrol can be purchased. If thishappens, make sure the universalremote control uses a Toshiba®

code set.


Battery Replacement

To change the remote controlbatteries:

1. Slide the rear cover back, on theremote control.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure thatthey are installed correctly, usingthe diagram on the inside of thebattery compartment.

3. Replace the battery cover.

If the remote control is to be storedfor a long period of time, removethe batteries and keep them ina cool, dry place.

Problem Recommended ActionNo power. The ignition might not be turned

ON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY.The picture does not fill the screen.There are black borders on the topand bottom or on both sides or itlooks stretched out.

Check the display mode settingsin the setup menu by pressing thedisplay menu button on the remotecontrol.

In auxiliary mode, the picture movesor scrolls.

Check the auxiliary input connectionsat both devices.

The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is noobstruction between the remotecontrol and the transmitter window.Check the batteries to make surethey are not dead or installedincorrectly.

After stopping the player, I push Playbut sometimes the DVD starts whereI left off and sometimes at thebeginning.

If the stop button was pressedone time, the DVD player resumesplaying where the DVD was stopped.If the stop button was pressed twotimes the DVD player begins to playfrom the beginning of the DVD.

The auxiliary source is running butthere is no picture or sound.

Check that the RSE video screenis in the auxiliary source mode.Check the auxiliary input connectionsat both devices.


Problem Recommended ActionSometimes the wireless headphoneaudio cuts out or buzzes.

Check for obstructions, lowbatteries, reception range, andinterference from cellular telephonetowers or by using a cellulartelephone in the vehicle.Check that the headphones areon correctly using the L (left) andR (right) on the headphones.

I lost the remote and/or theheadphones.

See your dealer/retailer forassistance.

The DVD is playing, but there is nopicture or sound.

Check that the RSE video screen issourced to the DVD player.

DVD Display Error MessagesThe DVD display error messagedepends on which radio the vehiclehas. The video screen mightdisplay one of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error: Thismessage displays when there aredisc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or if thedisc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is not from acorrect region.

No Disc Inserted: This messagedisplays if no disc is presentwhen the Z EJECT button ispressed on the radio.

DVD DistortionVideo distortion can occur whenoperating cellular phones, scanners,CB radios, Global Position Systems(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax,or walkie talkies.

It might be necessary to turn off theDVD player when operating one ofthese devices in or near the vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the RSE OverheadConsoleWhen cleaning the RSE overheadconsole surface, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water.

Cleaning the Video ScreenUse only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water. Use care whendirectly touching or cleaning thescreen, as damage could result.


Rear Seat Audio (RSA)For vehicles with Rear SeatAudio (RSA), rear seat passengerscan listen to and control any of themusic sources: radio, CDs, DVDs,or other auxiliary sources. The rearseat passengers can only controlthe music sources the front seatpassengers are not listening to(except on some radios where dualcontrol is allowed). For example,rear seat passengers can controla CD and listen to it through theheadphones, while the driver listensto the radio through the frontspeakers. The rear seat passengershave control of the volume for eachset of headphones.

The RSA functions operate evenwhen the main radio is off. The frontaudio system displays X when theRSA is on, and disappears from thedisplay when it is off.

Audio can be heard through wiredheadphones (not included) pluggedinto the jacks on the RSA. If thevehicle has this feature, audio canalso be heard on Channel 2 ofthe wireless headphones.

The audio system mutes the rearspeakers when the RSA audiois active through the headphones.

To listen to an iPod or portableaudio device through the RSA,attach the iPod or portable audiodevice to the front auxiliary input(if available), located on thefront audio system. Turn the iPodon, then choose the front auxiliaryinput with the RSA SRCE button.


P (Power): Press to turn the RSAon or off.

Volume: Turn to increase or todecrease the volume of the wiredheadphones. The left knob controlsthe left headphones and the rightknob controls the right headphones.

SRCE (Source): Press to selectbetween the radio (AM/FM/XM™),CD, and if the vehicle has thesefeatures, DVD, front auxiliary, andrear auxiliary.

©¨(Seek): Press to go to theprevious or to the next station andstay there. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the radio.

Press and hold ©or ¨untilthe display flashes to tune to anindividual station. The displaystops flashing after the buttonshave not been pushed for morethan two seconds. This functionis inactive, with some radios, if thefront seat passengers are listeningto the radio.

While listening to a disc, press ¨to go to the next track or chapter onthe disc. Press ©to go back to thestart of the current track or chapter(if more than ten seconds haveplayed). This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press ©or ¨to performa cursor up or down on the menu.Hold ©or ¨to perform a cursorleft or right on the menu.

PROG (Program): Press to goto the next preset radio stationor channel set on the main radio.This function is inactive, withsome radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to theradio.

When a CD or DVD audio disc isplaying, press PROG to go to thebeginning of the CD or DVD audio.This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the disc.


When a disc is playing in the CD orDVD changer, press PROG to selectthe next disc, if multiple discs areloaded. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press PROG to performthe ENTER menu function.

Rear AudioController (RAC)

The vehicle may have the RearAudio Controller (RAC). Certainradio functions can be controlledwith RAC.

xw (Next/Previous): Press thedown or up arrows to go to the nextor to the previous radio stationstored as a favorite.

When a CD/DVD is playing, pressthe down or up arrows to go tothe next or previous track or chapter.

©SEEK ¨: Press the SEEKarrows to go to the previous or to thenext radio station while in AM, FM, orXM™ (if equipped). Press the SEEKarrows to go to the previous or to thenext track or chapter while sourcedto a CD or DVD slot.

SRCE (Source): Press this buttonto switch between the radio (AM,FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and ifthe vehicle has these features, DVD,front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

> (Mute): Press this button tosilence the system. Press this buttonagain, or any other radio button,to turn the sound on.

+ / − x (Volume): Press the plus orminus volume buttons to increaseor to decrease the volume.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle’sradio by learning a portion ofthe Vehicle Identification Number(VIN). The radio does not operate ifit is stolen or moved to a differentvehicle.


Audio Steering WheelControls

Vehicles with audio steering wheelcontrols could differ depending onthe vehicle’s options. Some audiocontrols can be adjusted at thesteering wheel.

w (Next): Press to go to the nextradio station stored as a favorite, orthe next track if a CD/DVD is playing.

cx (Previous/End): Press to goto the previous radio station storedas a favorite, the next track if aCD/DVD is playing, to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

bg (Mute/Push to Talk): Pressto silence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.

For vehicles with OnStar® orBluetooth systems, press andhold for longer than two secondsto interact with those systems.See OnStar® System on page 2-41and Bluetooth® on page 3-105 inthis manual for more information.

SRCE (Source): Press to switchbetween the radio (AM, FM, XM),CD, and for vehicles with, DVD,front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

For vehicles with the navigationsystem, press and hold this buttonfor longer than one second to initiatevoice recognition. See “VoiceRecognition” in the NavigationSystem manual for more information.

+ e − e (Volume): Press toincrease or to decrease the radiovolume.

¨ (Seek): Press to go to thenext radio station while in AM, FM,or XM™. Press ¨ to go to the nexttrack or chapter while sourced tothe CD or DVD slot. Press the ¨ ifmultiple discs are loaded to go tothe next disc while sourced to aCD player.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference andstatic can occur during normalradio reception if items suchas cell phone chargers, vehicleconvenience accessories, andexternal electronic devices areplugged into the accessory poweroutlet. If there is interference orstatic, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.


AMThe range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interferewith each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM StereoFM signals only reach about10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Although the radio has a built-inelectronic circuit that automaticallyworks to reduce interference,some static can occur, especiallyaround tall buildings or hills, causingthe sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM Satellite Radio Servicegives digital radio reception fromcoast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Justas with FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone UsageCellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle’s radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone’s battery,or simply having the phone on.This interference causes anincreased level of static whilelistening to the radio. If static isreceived while listening to theradio, unplug the cellular phoneand turn it off.

Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is locatedon the roof of the vehicle. This typeof antenna is used with the AM/FMradio, as well as OnStar® and theXM™ Satellite Radio ServiceSystem, if the vehicle has thesefeatures. Keep this antenna clearof snow and ice build up for clearradio reception. If the vehicle hasa sunroof, the performance of theradio system may be affected if thesunroof is open. Loading items ontothe roof of the vehicle can interferewith the performance of the radiosystem and, if the vehicle has thisfeature, OnStar®. Make sure themulti-band antenna is not obstructed.


✍ NOTES


Driving YourVehicle

Your Driving, the Road, andthe VehicleDriving for Better FuelEconomy ............................4-1

Defensive Driving ..................4-2Drunk Driving .......................4-2Control of a Vehicle ...............4-3Braking ................................4-3Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) .....................4-4

Braking in Emergencies ..........4-5StabiliTrak® System ...............4-5All-Wheel Drive (AWD)System ..............................4-7

Steering ...............................4-8Off-Road Recovery ................4-9Passing ...............................4-9

Loss of Control ...................4-10Driving at Night ...................4-11Driving in Rain and onWet Roads .......................4-11

Before Leaving on aLong Trip ..........................4-12

Highway Hypnosis ...............4-12Hill and Mountain Roads ......4-13Winter Driving .....................4-13If Your Vehicle is Stuck inSand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ......4-15

Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out .........................4-16

Loading the Vehicle .............4-16

TowingTowing Your Vehicle ............4-20Recreational VehicleTowing .............................4-21

Towing a Trailer ..................4-24

Your Driving, theRoad, and the Vehicle

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.

• Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

• Brake gradually and avoidabrupt stops.

• Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

• When road and weatherconditions are appropriate,use cruise control, if equipped.

• Always follow posted speed limitsor drive more slowly whenconditions require.

Driving Your Vehicle 4-1

• Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

• Combine several trips into asingle trip.

• Replace the vehicle’s tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire’s sidewallnear the size.

• Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is towear your safety belt — See SafetyBelts: They Are for Everyone onpage 1-15.

{ CAUTION

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

• Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

• Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniques couldsave your life.

Drunk Driving

{ CAUTION

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or ifyou are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

4-2 Driving Your Vehicle

Police records show thatalmost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, these deathsare the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years,more than 17,000 annual motorvehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol,with about 250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problemis for people never to drink alcoholand then drive.

Medical research shows that alcoholin a person’s system can make crashinjuries worse, especially injuries tothe brain, spinal cord, or heart.

This means that when anyone whohas been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, thatperson’s chance of being killed orpermanently disabled is higher thanif the person had not been drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systemshelp to control the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering,and accelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easyto ask more of those controlsystems than the tires and roadcan provide. Meaning, you canlose control of the vehicle.See StabiliTrak® System onpage 4-5.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 5-3.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light onpage 3-38.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Decidingto push the brake pedal isperception time. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree-fourths of a second. But thatis only an average. It might beless with one driver and as long astwo or three seconds or morewith another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination,and eyesight all play a part. Sodo alcohol, drugs, and frustration.But even in three-fourths of asecond, a vehicle moving at 60 mph(100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enoughspace between the vehicleand others is important.


And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition ofthe road, whether it is wet, dry, or icy;tire tread; the condition of the brakes;the weight of the vehicle; and theamount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Somepeople drive in spurts — heavyacceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pacewith traffic. This is a mistake.The brakes might not have time tocool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster with a lot ofheavy braking. Keeping pace withthe traffic and allowing realisticfollowing distances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump the brakes.If the brakes are pumped, the pedalcould get harder to push down.

If the engine stops, there will still besome power brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and the brakepedal will be harder to push.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 5-3.

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away,ABS checks itself. A momentarymotor or clicking noise might beheard while this test is going on,and it might even be noticed thatthe brake pedal moves a little.This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS,this warning light stays on.See Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light on page 3-39.

Let us say the road is wet and youare driving safely. Suddenly, ananimal jumps out in front of you.You slam on the brakes andcontinue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling,the computer will separately workthe brakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This canhelp the driver steer aroundthe obstacle while braking hard.


As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a footup to the brake pedal or alwaysdecrease stopping distance.If you get too close to the vehiclein front of you, there will not beenough time to apply the brakes ifthat vehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave enough room upahead to stop, even with ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly andlet antilock work. The antilock pumpor motor operating might be heardand the brake pedal might be felt topulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can help morethan even the very best braking.

Brake Assist

This vehicle has a Brake Assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully appliedthe brake pedal in an attempt toquickly stop or slow down thevehicle. The stability systemhydraulic brake control moduleincreases brake pressure at eachcorner of the vehicle until theABS activates. Minor brake pedalpulsations or pedal movementduring this time is normal and thedriver should continue to applythe brake pedal as the driving

situation dictates The Brake Assistfeature will automatically disengagewhen the brake pedal is releasedor brake pedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has the StabiliTraksystem which combines antilockbrake, traction and stability controlsystems and helps the drivermaintain directional control of thevehicle in most driving conditions.

When you first start the vehicle andbegin to drive away, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto ensure there are no problems.The system may be heard orfelt while it is working. This isnormal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.The system should initializebefore the vehicle reaches 20 mph(32 km/h). In some cases, it maytake approximately two miles(3.2 km) of driving before the systeminitializes.


If the system fails to turn on oractivate, the StabiliTrak light alongwith one of the following messageswill be displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC):TRACTION CONTROL OFF,SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,SERVICE STABILITRAK. If theseconditions are observed, turn thevehicle off, wait 15 seconds, andthen turn it back on again to resetthe system. If any of these messagesstill appear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the vehicle should betaken in for service. For moreinformation on the DIC messages,see Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 3-47.

The StabiliTrak light will flash on theinstrument panel cluster when thesystem is both on and activated.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working; this is normal.

The traction control disable button islocated on the instrument panelbelow the climate controls.

The traction control part ofStabiliTrak can be turned off bypressing and releasing the tractioncontrol disable button.

Traction control can be turned onby pressing and releasing thetraction control disable buttonif not automatically shut off for anyother reason.

When the traction control systemis turned off, the StabiliTrak lightand the appropriate traction controloff message will be displayedon the DIC to warn the driver.

The vehicle will still havebrake-traction control whentraction control is off, but will notbe able to use the engine speedmanagement system. See “TractionControl Operation” next for moreinformation.

When the traction control systemhas been turned off, system noisesmay be heard and felt as a resultof the brake-traction control working.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice orsnow, and you want to “rock”the vehicle to attempt to free it.It may also be necessary to turnoff the system when driving inextreme off-road conditions wherehigh wheel spin is required. SeeIf Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-15.


Traction Control OperationThe traction control system ispart of the StabiliTrak system.Traction control limits wheel spinby reducing engine power to thewheels (engine speed management)and by applying brakes to eachindividual wheel (brake-tractioncontrol) as necessary.

The traction control system isenabled automatically when thevehicle is started. It will activate andthe StabiliTrak light will flash if itsenses that any of the wheels arespinning or beginning to lose tractionwhile driving. If traction control isturned off, only the brake-tractioncontrol portion of traction controlwill work. The engine speedmanagement will be disabled. In thismode, engine power is not reducedautomatically and the driven wheelscan spin more freely. This cancause the brake-traction control toactivate constantly.

Notice: If the wheel(s) ofone axle is allowed to spinexcessively while the StabiliTrak,ABS and brake warning lights andany relevant DIC messages aredisplayed, the transfer case couldbe damaged. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Reduce engine powerand do not spin the wheel(s)excessively while these lightsand messages are displayed.

The traction control system mayactivate on dry or rough roadsor under conditions such as heavyacceleration while turning orabrupt upshifts/downshifts of thetransmission. When this happens, areduction in acceleration may benoticed, or a noise or vibration maybe heard. This is normal.

If cruise control is being used whenthe system activates, the StabiliTraklight will flash and cruise controlwill automatically disengage.

Cruise control may be reengagedwhen road conditions allow.See Cruise Control on page 3-9.

StabiliTrak may also turn offautomatically if it determines that aproblem exists with the system.If the problem does not clear itselfafter restarting the vehicle, see yourdealer/retailer for service.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD)SystemIf the vehicle has this feature,engine power is sent to all fourwheels when extra traction isneeded. This is like four-wheel drive,but there is no separate lever orswitch to engage or disengage theaxle. It is fully automatic, andadjusts itself as needed for roadconditions.

When using a compact spare tire onthe AWD equipped vehicle, theAWD system automatically detectsthe presence of the compactspare and the AWD is disabled.


To restore the AWD operation andprevent excessive wear on theAWD system, replace the compactspare with a full-size tire assoon as possible. See CompactSpare Tire on page 5-79 for moreinformation.

SteeringPower SteeringIf power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thesystem is not functioning, the vehiclecan be steered but it will takemore effort.

Variable Effort SteeringIf the vehicle has this steeringsystem, the system continuouslyadjusts the effort felt whensteering at all vehicle speeds.It provides ease when parking,yet a firm, solid feel at highwayspeeds.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and theroad surface, the angle at whichthe curve is banked, and vehiclespeed. While in a curve, speedis the one factor that can becontrolled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve,while the front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so youcan drive through the curve.Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until outof the curve, and then accelerategently into the straightaway.

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering canbe more effective than braking.For example, you come over a hilland find a truck stopped in yourlane, or a car suddenly pullsout from nowhere, or a child dartsout from between parked carsand stops right in front of you.These problems can be avoidedby braking — if you can stop in time.But sometimes you cannot stop intime because there is no room.That is the time for evasiveaction — steering around theproblem.

The vehicle can perform very wellin emergencies like these.First, apply the brakes. See Brakingon page 4-3. It is better to removeas much speed as possible froma collision. Then steer aroundthe problem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.


An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wearsafety belts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle’s right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is onlyslightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then, ifthere is nothing in the way, steer sothat the vehicle straddles the edge ofthe pavement. Turn the steeringwheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm,(about one-eighth turn) until the rightfront tire contacts the pavementedge. Then turn the steering wheel togo straight down the roadway.

PassingPassing another vehicle on atwo-lane road can be dangerous.To reduce the risk of dangerwhile passing:

• Look down the road, to the sides,and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect a successfulpass. If in doubt, wait.

• Watch for traffic signs,pavement markings, and linesthat could indicate a turn oran intersection. Never cross asolid or double-solid line on yourside of the lane.

• Do not get too close to thevehicle you want to pass. Doingso can reduce your visibility.

• Wait your turn to pass a slowvehicle.

• When you are being passed,ease to the right.


Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens whenthe three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — donot have enough friction where thetires meet the road to do whatthe driver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose controlof the vehicle. Defensive driversavoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existingconditions, and by not overdrivingthose conditions. But skids arealways possible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle’s three controlsystems. In the braking skid,the wheels are not rolling.

In the steering or cornering skid,too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and losecornering force. And in theacceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way youwant the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, thevehicle may straighten out. Alwaysbe ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your drivingto these conditions. It is important toslow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance is longerand vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try your best toavoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You mightnot realize the surface is slipperyuntil the vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slow downwhen you have any doubt.

Remember: Any Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) helps avoid only thebraking skid.


Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous thanday driving because some driversare likely to be impaired — by alcoholor drugs, with night vision problems,or by fatigue.

Night driving tips include:

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Reduce headlamp glare byadjusting the inside rearviewmirror.

• Slow down and keep more spacebetween you and other vehiclesbecause headlamps can onlylight up so much road ahead.

• Watch for animals.

• When tired, pull off the road.

• Do not wear sunglasses.

• Avoid staring directly intoapproaching headlamps.

• Keep the windshield and all glasson your vehicle clean — insideand out.

• Keep your eyes moving,especially during turns or curves.

No one can see as well at night asin the daytime. But, as we getolder, these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver might needat least twice as much light to seethe same thing at night as a20-year-old.

Driving in Rain and onWet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{ CAUTION

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.


HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous.Water can build up under yourvehicle’s tires so they actually rideon the water. This can happen if theroad is wet enough and you aregoing fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has littleor no contact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice isto slow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather TipsBesides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

• Allow extra following distance.

• Pass with caution.

• Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

• Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

• Have good tires with proper treaddepth. See Tires on page 5-37.

• Turn off cruise control.

Before Leaving on aLong TripTo prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, consider having it servicedby your dealer/retailer beforedeparting.

Things to check on your owninclude:

• Windshield Washer Fluid:Reservoir full? Windowsclean — inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: In good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids:All levels checked?

• Lamps: Do they all work andare lenses clean?

• Tires: Are treads good?Are tires inflated torecommended pressure?

• Weather and Maps: Safe totravel? Have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park your vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:

• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

• Keep interior temperature cool.

• Keep your eyes moving — scanthe road ahead and to the sides.

• Check the rearview mirror andvehicle instruments often.


Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:

• Keep the vehicle servicedand in good shape.

• Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

• Going down steep or long hills,shift to a lower gear.

{ CAUTION

If you do not shift down, the brakescould get so hot that they wouldnot work well. You would thenhave poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash.Shift down to let the engine assistthe brakes on a steep downhillslope.

{ CAUTION

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) orwith the ignition off is dangerous.The brakes will have to do all thework of slowing down and theycould get so hot that they wouldnot work well. You would thenhave poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash.Always have the engine runningand the vehicle in gear when goingdownhill.

• Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

• Top of hills: Be alert — somethingcould be in your lane (stalled car,accident).

• Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter DrivingDriving on Snow or IceDrive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 32°F(0°C) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gentlyso traction is not lost. Acceleratingtoo quickly causes the wheelsto spin and makes the surface underthe tires slick, so there is evenless traction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, thedrive wheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.


The StabiliTrak® System onpage 4-5 improves the ability toaccelerate on slippery roads,but slow down and adjust yourdriving to the road conditions.When driving through deep snow,turn off the traction control partof the StabiliTrak® System to helpmaintain vehicle motion at lowerspeeds.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 4-4 improves vehiclestability during hard stops on aslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distanceon any slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface ofa curve or an overpass can remainicy when the surrounding roadsare clear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking while on ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped,on slippery surfaces.

Blizzard ConditionsBeing stuck in snow can be in aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 7-6.To get help and keep everyonein the vehicle safe:

• Turn on the Hazard WarningFlashers on page 3-5.

• Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ CAUTION

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This may causeexhaust gases to get inside.Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:• Clear away snow from around

the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

• Check again from time totime to be sure snow does notcollect there.

• Open a window abouttwo inches (5 cm) on theside of the vehicle that isaway from the wind to bringin fresh air.

• Fully open the air outlets on orunder the instrument panel.

• Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting.See Climate Control Systemin the Index.

(Continued)


CAUTION (Continued)


Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and killyou. You cannot see it or smell it,so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm,but be careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat this

until help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable fromthe cold. Moving about to keepwarm also helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engineruns faster than the idle speed.This keeps the battery charged torestart the vehicle and to signalfor help with the headlamps. Do thisas little as possible to save fuel.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck inSand, Mud, Ice, or SnowSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get ItOut on page 4-16.

If the vehicle has a traction system,it can often help to free a stuckvehicle. Refer to the vehicle’straction system in the Index.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turnthe traction system off and use therocking method.

{ CAUTION

If you let your vehicle’s tires spinat high speed, they can explode,and you or others could beinjured. The vehicle can overheat,causing an engine compartmentfire or other damage. Spin thewheels as little as possible andavoid going above 35 mph(55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 5-56.


Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It OutTurn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area aroundthe front wheels. Turn off anytraction or stability system. Shiftback and forth between R (Reverse)and a forward gear, spinning thewheels as little as possible.To prevent transmission wear,wait until the wheels stop spinningbefore shifting gears. Releasethe accelerator pedal while shifting,and press lightly on the acceleratorpedal when the transmission isin gear. Slowly spinning the wheelsin the forward and reversedirections causes a rocking motionthat could free the vehicle. If thatdoes not get the vehicle out after afew tries, it might need to betowed out. If the vehicle does needto be towed out, see TowingYour Vehicle on page 4-20.

Loading the VehicleIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. This weight is calledthe vehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on your vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ CAUTION

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front orrear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). If you do, parts onthe vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

vehicle handles. These couldcause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar) of your vehicle.

Example Label


With the driver’s door open,you will find the label attachedbelow the door lock post(striker). The tire and loadinginformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Informationlabel also shows the size of theoriginal equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tireinflation pressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 5-37 andInflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-43.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It tellsyou the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and theGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for the front and rearaxle. See “Certification/TireLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement“The combined weightof occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kgor XXX lbs” on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weightof the driver and passengersfrom XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount ofcargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example,if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will befive 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage andcargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity for your vehicle.

See Towing a Trailer onpage 4-24 for importantinformation on towing a trailer,towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.


A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 1,000 lbs(453 kg).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = 300 lbs(136 kg).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs(317 kg).


B. Subtract Occupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 750 lbs(340 kg).

C. Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg).


B. Subtract Occupant Weight200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =1,000 lbs (453 kg).

C. Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg).

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3


Refer to your vehicle’s tire andloading information label forspecific information aboutyour vehicle’s capacityweight and seating positions.The combined weight ofthe driver, passengers, andcargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to therear edge of the driver’s door.

The label shows the grossweight capacity of your vehicle.This is called the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire labelalso tells you the maximumweights for the front andrear axles, called the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).To find out the actual loads onyour front and rear axles,you need to go to a weighstation and weigh your vehicle.Your dealer/retailer can helpyou with this. Be sure to spreadout your load equally on bothsides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle or the GAWRfor either the front or rear axle.

{ CAUTION

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front orrear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). If you do, parts onthe vehicle can break, and itcan change the way yourvehicle handles. These couldcause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of the vehicle.

Notice: Overloading yourvehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Do notoverload your vehicle.

Label Example


If you put things inside yourvehicle — like suitcases, tools,packages, or anything else, theywill go as fast as the vehiclegoes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash,they will keep going.

{ CAUTION

Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargoarea of your vehicle.Try to spread the weightevenly.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

• Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

• When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleTo avoid damage, the disabledvehicle should be towed with allfour wheels off the ground.Consult your dealer/retailer or aprofessional towing service ifthe disabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 7-6.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motorhome,see “Recreational Vehicle Towing”following.


Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towingmeans towing the vehicle behindanother vehicle – such as behinda motorhome. The two mostcommon types of recreationalvehicle towing are known asdinghy towing and dolly towing.Dinghy towing is towing the vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground.Dolly towing is towing the vehiclewith two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device knownas a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreationalvehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of thetowing vehicle? Be sure to readthe tow vehicle manufacturer’srecommendations.

• What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

• Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer/retailer or traileringprofessional for additional adviceand equipment recommendations.

• Is the vehicle ready to be towed?Just as preparing the vehiclefor a long trip, make sure thevehicle is prepared to be towed.See Before Leaving on a LongTrip on page 4-12.

Dinghy Towing

If the vehicle is front-wheel-drive,it can be dinghy towed from thefront. These vehicles may also betowed by putting the front wheels ona dolly. See “Dolly Towing” laterin this section.

If the vehicle is all-wheel-drive, itcan be dinghy towed from the front.These vehicles can also be towedby placing them on a platform trailerwith all four wheels off of theground. These vehicles cannot betowed using a dolly.


For vehicles being dinghy towed,the vehicle should be run atthe beginning of each day and ateach RV fuel stop for aboutfive minutes. This will ensureproper lubrication of transmissioncomponents. Re-install the fuseto start the vehicle.

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle to towand then secure it to thetowing vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission toP (Park) and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Turn the ignition toACC/ACCESSORY.

5. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

6. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle isbeing towed, remove the50 amp BATT1 fuse from theunderhood fuse block andstore in a safe location.See Underhood Fuse Blockon page 5-90.

7. Release the parking brake.

Notice: If the vehicle istowed without performingeach of the steps listed under“Dinghy Towing,” the automatictransmission could be damaged.Be sure to follow all steps ofthe dinghy towing procedure priorto and after towing the vehicle.

Notice: If 65 mph (105 km/h) isexceeded while towing thevehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h)while towing the vehicle.

Once the destination is reached:


2. Reinstall the 50 amp BATT1 fuseto the underhood fuse block.

3. Shift the transmission to P (Park),turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand remove the key fromthe ignition.

4. Disconnect the vehicle from thetowing vehicle.

Notice: Do not tow a vehicle withthe front drive wheels on theground if one of the front tires is acompact spare tire. Towing withtwo different tire sizes on the frontof the vehicle can cause severedamage to the transmission.


Dolly Towing(All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)

All-wheel-drive vehicles must notbe towed with two wheels onthe ground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed on aplatform trailer with all four wheelsoff of the ground or dinghy towedfrom the front.

Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel-DriveVehicles Only)

To tow a front-wheel-drive vehiclefrom the front with two wheelson the ground:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).


4. Clamp the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with aclamping device designedfor towing.

5. Remove the key from theignition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

7. Release the parking brake.


Towing the Vehicle Fromthe Rear

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.

Do not tow the vehicle from the rear.

Towing a Trailer

{ CAUTION

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly.For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell — or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer/retailer for advice andinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the informationin “Weight of the Trailer” thatappears later in this section.


Trailering is different than just drivingthe vehicle by itself. Trailering meanschanges in handling, acceleration,braking, durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for the safety of the driverand the passengers. So please readthis section carefully before pullinga trailer.

Load-pulling components such asthe engine, transmission, rear axle,wheel assemblies and tires areforced to work harder against thedrag of the added weight. The engineis required to operate at relativelyhigher speeds and under greaterloads, generating extra heat.What’s more, the trailer addsconsiderably to wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.

Pulling A TrailerHere are some important points:

• There are many differentlaws, including speed limitrestrictions, having to do withtrailering. Make sure the rig willbe legal, not only where youlive but also where you will bedriving. A good source for thisinformation can be state orprovincial police.

• Consider using a sway control.See “Hitches” later in thissection.

• Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 500 miles (800 km) thenew vehicle is driven. The engine,axle or other parts could bedamaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles(800 km) that a trailer is towed, donot drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine andother parts of the vehicle wear inat the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictionswhen towing a trailer.

• The vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shifts toooften under heavy loads and/orhilly conditions. See “Tow/HaulMode” later in this section.

• The vehicle is designed primarilyas a passenger and load carryingvehicle. If a trailer is towed,the vehicle will require morefrequent maintenance due to theadditional load.

Three important considerations haveto do with weight:

• The weight of the trailer.

• The weight of the trailer tongue.

• And the weight on the vehicle’stires


Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how the rig isused. For example, speed, altitude,road grades, outside temperatureand how much the vehicle is usedto pull a trailer are all important.It can depend on any specialequipment on the vehicle, and the

amount of tongue weight the vehiclecan carry. See “Weight of theTrailer Tongue” later in this sectionfor more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment.

The weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Use the following chart to determinehow much the vehicle can weigh,based upon the vehicle modeland options.

Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWRFront-Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)Front-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)All-Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg)All-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.

Ask your dealer/retailer for ourtrailering information or advice, orwrite us at our Customer AssistanceOffices. See Customer AssistanceOffices on page 7-5 for moreinformation.

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, any

cargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce thetongue weight the vehicle can carry,which will also reduce the trailer


weight the vehicle can tow. If towinga trailer, the tongue load must beadded to the GVW because thevehicle will be carrying that weight,too. See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-16 for more informationabout the vehicle’s maximum loadcapacity.

If a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch is beingused, the trailer tongue (A) shouldweigh 10-15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (B).

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they aren’t, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may also be limited by thevehicle’s ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or theRGAWR (Rear Gross Axle WeightRating). The effect of additionalweight may reduce the traileringcapacity more than the total of theadditional weight.

Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weightis 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs(1 270 kg) at the front axle and2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle.It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs(1 814 kg) and a GCWR (GrossCombination Weight Rating)of 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg).

The trailer rating should be:

Expect tongue weight to be atleast 10 percent of trailer weight(850 lbs (386 kg)) and because theweight is applied well behind therear axle, the effect on the rear axleis greater than just the weight itself,as much as 1.5 times as much.The weight at the rear axle could be850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs(578 kg). Since the rear axle alreadyweighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is veryclose to, but within the limit forRGAWR as well. The vehicle is setto trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).


If the vehicle has many options andthere is a front seat passenger andtwo rear seat passengers with someluggage and gear in the vehicle aswell. 300 lbs (136 kg) could beadded to the front axle weight and400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axleweight. The vehicle now weighs:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs(3 266 kg) and you might think700 additional pounds (318 kg)should be subtracted from thetrailering capacity to stay withinGCWR limits. The maximum trailerwould only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg).You may go further and think thetongue weight should be limited to

less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) toavoid exceeding GVWR. But theeffect on the rear axle must stillbe considered. Because therear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs(1 406 kg), 900 lbs (408 kg) canbe put on the rear axle withoutexceeding RGAWR. The effect oftongue weight is about 1.5 timesthe actual weight. Dividing the900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves only600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weightthat can be handled. Since tongueweight is usually at least 10 percentof total loaded trailer weight, expectthat the largest trailer the vehiclecan properly handle is 6,000 lbs(2 721 kg).

It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratings isto weigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on theVehicle’s TiresBe sure the vehicle’s tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be foundon the Certification/Tire label.See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-16. Make sure not to goover the GVW limit for the vehicle,including the weight of the trailertongue.

HitchesIt is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds,large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons whythe right hitch is needed. Here aresome rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on the vehicleis not intended for hitches.Do not attach rental hitches orother bumper-type hitchesto it. Use only a frame-mountedhitch that does not attach tothe bumper.


• Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If thereare, then be sure to seal theholes later when the hitchis removed. If the holes are notsealed, dirt, water, and deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) fromthe exhaust can get into thevehicle. See Engine Exhauston page 2-30.

Safety ChainsAlways attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chainsmay be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendationfor attaching safety chains anddo not attach them to the bumper.

Always leave just enough slack sothe rig can turn. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesA loaded trailer that weighs morethan 1,000 lbs (450 kg) needsto have its own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjustedand maintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not try to tap into thevehicle’s hydraulic brake system.If you do, both brake systemswill not work well, or at all.

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Get toknow the rig before setting out forthe open road. Get acquaintedwith the feel of handling and brakingwith the added weight of the trailer.

And always keep in mind that thevehicle you are driving is now longerand not as responsive as thevehicle is by itself.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires and mirror adjustments. If thetrailer has electric brakes, start thevehicle and trailer moving and thenapply the trailer brake controller byhand to be sure the brakes areworking. This checks the electricalconnection at the same time.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secure,and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behindthe vehicle ahead as you wouldwhen driving the vehicle without atrailer. This can help to avoidsituations that require heavy brakingand sudden turns.


PassingMore passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Becausethe rig is longer, it is necessary togo much farther beyond thepassed vehicle before returningto the lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. Then, to movethe trailer to the left, move thathand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand tothe right. Always back up slowlyand, if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making TurnsNotice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could causethe trailer to come in contact withthe vehicle. The vehicle couldbe damaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do thisso the trailer won’t strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal wellin advance.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailerThe arrows on the instrument panelflash whenever signaling a turnor lane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps also flash, tellingother drivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrowson the instrument panel flashfor turns even if the bulbs on thetrailer are burned out. For thisreason you may think other driversare seeing the signal when theyare not. It is important to checkoccasionally to be sure the trailerbulbs are still working.

Driving on GradesBecause of the added load of thetrailer, the vehicle’s engine mayoverheat on hot days, when goingup a long or steep grade with atrailer. If the engine coolanttemperature gage indicatesoverheating, turn off the airconditioning to reduce engine load,pull off the road and stop in asafe spot. Let the engine run whileparked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off.

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a longor steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift downand reduce the vehicle speedto around 55 mph (88 km/h) toreduce the possibility of the engineand the transmission overheating.


Tow/Haul ModeTow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer ora large or heavy load. The purposeof the Tow/Haul mode is to:

• Reduce the frequency andimprove the predictability oftransmission shifts when pullinga heavy trailer or a large orheavy load.

• Provide the same solid shift feelwhen pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load as whenthe vehicle is unloaded.

• Improve control of vehicle speedwhile requiring less throttle pedalactivity when pulling a heavytrailer or a large or heavy load.

• Increase the charging systemvoltage to assist in recharginga battery installed in a trailer.

Press this button located on theconsole to turn on and turn off theTow/Haul mode.

The Tow/Haul light on theinstrument panel will come on toindicate that Tow/Haul modehas been selected.

Tow/Haul may be turned off bypressing the button again, at whichtime the indicator light on theinstrument panel will turn off.The vehicle will automatically turnoff Tow/Haul every time it is started.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75 percent of the vehicle’s GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).

See Weight of the Trailer earlier inthis section. Tow/Haul is mostuseful under the following drivingconditions:• When pulling a heavy trailer or a

large or heavy load throughrolling terrain.

• When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in stop andgo traffic.

• When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with notrailer at all will not cause damage.However, there is no benefit to theselection of Tow/Haul when thevehicle is unloaded. Such a selectionwhen unloaded may result inunpleasant engine and transmissiondriving characteristics and reducedfuel economy. Tow/Haul isrecommended only when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavy load.


Parking on Hills

{ CAUTION

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet.Turn the wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into trafficif facing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal.Then apply the parking brakeand shift the transmissioninto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill1. Apply and hold the brake pedal

while you:

• start the engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowingThe vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 6-3 for more information.Things that are especially importantin trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil,axle lubricant, belts, cooling systemand brake system. It is a goodidea to inspect these before andduring the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Trailer Wiring HarnessThe vehicle is equipped with thefollowing wiring harness for towinga trailer.

Basic Trailer Wiring

The trailer wiring harness, with aseven-pin connector, is locatedat the rear of the vehicle and istied to the vehicle’s frame.


The harness connector can beplugged into a seven-pin universalheavy-duty trailer connectoravailable through yourdealer/retailer.

The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:

• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal

• Dark Green: Right Stop/TurnSignal

• Brown: Taillamps

• Black: Ground

• Light Green: Back-up Lamps

• Red/Black: Battery Feed

• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*

*The fuse for this circuit is installedin the underhood electrical center,but the wires are not connected.They should be connected byyour dealer/retailer or a qualifiedservice center.

If the back-up lamp circuit isnot functional, contact yourdealer/retailer.

If a remote (non-vehicle) battery isbeing charged, press the Tow/Haulmode switch located on thecenter console near the climatecontrols. This will boost the vehiclesystem voltage and properlycharge the battery. If the trailer istoo light for Tow/Haul mode, turn onthe headlamps (Non-HID only) asa second way to boost thevehicle system and charge thebattery.

Electric Trailer Brake ControlWiring Provisions

These wiring provisions for anelectric trailer brake controller areincluded with the vehicle aspart of the trailer wiring package.

The instrument panel contains bluntcut wires behind the steeringcolumn for the electric trailer brakecontroller. The harness containsthe following wires:

• Red/Black: Power Supply

• White: Brake Switch Signal

• Gray: Illumination

• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal

• Black: Ground

The electric trailer brake controllershould be installed by yourdealer/retailer or a qualified servicecenter.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowingThe cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 5-24.


✍ NOTES


Service andAppearance Care

ServiceService ................................5-3Accessories andModifications .......................5-3

California Proposition 65Warning .............................5-4

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements ........5-4

Doing Your OwnService Work ......................5-4

Adding Equipment to theOutside of the Vehicle ..........5-5

FuelFuel ....................................5-5Gasoline Octane ...................5-5Gasoline Specifications ..........5-5California Fuel ......................5-6Additives ..............................5-6

Fuels in Foreign Countries ......5-7Filling the Tank .....................5-8Filling a Portable FuelContainer ..........................5-10

Checking Things Underthe HoodChecking Things Underthe Hood ..........................5-10

Hood Release .....................5-11Engine CompartmentOverview ..........................5-12

Engine Oil ..........................5-13Engine Oil Life System .........5-15Engine Air Cleaner/Filter .......5-17Automatic TransmissionFluid ................................5-18

Cooling System ...................5-19Engine Coolant ...................5-19Engine Overheating .............5-24OverheatedEngine ProtectionOperating Mode .................5-25

Power Steering Fluid ............5-26Windshield Washer Fluid ......5-26Brakes ...............................5-27Battery ...............................5-30Jump Starting .....................5-30

All-Wheel DriveAll-Wheel Drive ...................5-35

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming ................5-35

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement ...............5-35Halogen Bulbs ....................5-35License Plate Lamp .............5-36Replacement Bulbs ..............5-36

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield Wiper BladeReplacement .....................5-36

TiresTires ..................................5-37Tire Sidewall Labeling ..........5-38Tire Terminology andDefinitions .........................5-40

Inflation - Tire Pressure ........5-43Tire Pressure MonitorSystem .............................5-44

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation ..........................5-46

Tire Inspection andRotation ............................5-50

Service and Appearance Care 5-1

When It Is Time forNew Tires .........................5-51

Buying New Tires ................5-52Different Size Tires andWheels .............................5-53

Uniform Tire QualityGrading ............................5-54

Wheel Alignment andTire Balance .....................5-55

Wheel Replacement .............5-55Tire Chains .........................5-56If a Tire Goes Flat ...............5-57Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit ..................5-58

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit Storage ......5-66

Changing a Flat Tire ............5-66Removing the Spare Tireand Tools .........................5-67

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire ......5-70

Secondary Latch System ......5-74Storing a Flat orSpare Tire and Tools .........5-76

Compact Spare Tire .............5-79

Appearance CareInterior Cleaning ..................5-80Fabric/Carpet ......................5-81Leather ..............................5-82Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces ........5-82

Care of Safety Belts ............5-82Weatherstrips ......................5-83Washing Your Vehicle ..........5-83Cleaning ExteriorLamps/Lenses ...................5-83

Finish Care .........................5-84Windshield, Backglass, andWiper Blades ....................5-84

Aluminum or Chrome-PlatedWheels and Trim ...............5-85

Tires ..................................5-85Sheet Metal Damage ...........5-86Finish Damage ....................5-86Underbody Maintenance .......5-86Chemical Paint Spotting ........5-86

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) ....................5-87

Service Parts IdentificationLabel ...............................5-87

Electrical SystemHigh Voltage Devicesand Wiring ........................5-87

Add-On ElectricalEquipment ........................5-88

Windshield Wiper Fuses .......5-88Power Windows and OtherPower Options ...................5-88

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....5-88Instrument PanelFuse Block .......................5-88

Underhood Fuse Block .........5-90

Capacities and SpecificationsCapacities andSpecifications ....................5-94

5-2 Service and Appearance Care

ServiceFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer/retailer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have oneof these marks:

Accessories andModificationsWhen non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories are added to the vehicle,they can affect vehicle performanceand safety, including such thingsas airbags, braking, stability, rideand handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. Some of these accessoriescould even cause malfunction ordamage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation or useof non-GM certified parts, including

control module modifications, are notcovered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer/retailer can accessorizethe vehicle using genuine GMAccessories. When you go to yourGM dealer/retailer and ask for GMAccessories, you will know thatGM-trained and supported servicetechnicians will perform the workusing genuine GM Accessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment toYour Airbag-Equipped Vehicleon page 1-62.


California Proposition 65WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of Californiato cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems(including some inside the vehicle),many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inremote keyless transmitters, maycontain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ CAUTION

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience, theproper replacement parts, andtools before attempting anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easilyconfused. If the wrongfasteners are used, parts canlater break or fall off. Youcould be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 7-15.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do yourown service work, see ServicingYour Airbag-Equipped Vehicleon page 1-61.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the dateof any service work performed. SeeMaintenance Record on page 6-16.


Adding Equipment to theOutside of the VehicleThings added to the outside of thevehicle can affect the airflowaround it. This can cause windnoise and can affect fuel economyand windshield washer performance.Check with your dealer/retailerbefore adding equipment tothe outside of the vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuelis an important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with aposted octane rating of 87 or higher.If the octane rating is less than 87,you might notice an audible knockingnoise when you drive, commonlyreferred to as spark knock. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at

87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If you are using gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher and youhear heavy knocking, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specification D 4814in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Additives onpage 5-6 for additional information.


California FuelIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards,it is designed to operate on fuelsthat meet California specifications.See the underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California emissionsstandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission controlsystem performance might beaffected. The malfunction indicatorlamp could turn on and the vehiclemight fail a smog-check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 3-42. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer/retailer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are now requiredto contain additives that help preventengine and fuel system depositsfrom forming, allowing the emissioncontrol system to work properly.In most cases, you should not haveto add anything to the fuel. However,some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additiverequired to meet U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intakevalves clean, or if the vehicleexperiences problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

For customers who do not useTOP TIER Detergent Gasolineregularly, one bottle of GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS, added tothe fuel tank at every engine oilchange, can help clean depositsfrom fuel injectors and intake valves.GM Fuel System Treatment PLUSis the only gasoline additiverecommended by General Motors.

Also, your dealer/retailer hasadditives that will help correct andprevent most deposit-relatedproblems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines mightbe available in your area.


We recommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered underthe vehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and theperformance of the emission controlsystem could be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp might turnon. If this occurs, return to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf you plan on driving in anothercountry outside the United Statesor Canada, the proper fuel mightbe hard to find. Never use leadedgasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous texton fuel. Costly repairs caused byuse of improper fuel would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, askan auto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.


Filling the Tank

{ CAUTION

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the pump island.Turn off the engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you arenear fuel or refueling the vehicle.Do not use cellular phones.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Keep sparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door onthe driver side of the vehicle.

To open the fuel door, push therearward center edge in and releaseand it will open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise. The fuelcap has a spring in it; if the capis released too soon, it will springback to the right.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.


{ CAUTION

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle.

Clean fuel from painted surfaces assoon as possible. See Washing YourVehicle on page 5-83.

When replacing the fuel cap, turnit clockwise until it clicks. Makesure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determineif the fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 3-42.

If the vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC), theTIGHTEN GAS CAP messagedisplays if the fuel cap is notproperly installed.

{ CAUTION

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuelby shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuelcap, be sure to get the right type.Your dealer/ retailer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type,it might not fit properly. This cancause the malfunction indicatorlamp to light and can damage thefuel tank and emissions system.See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 3-42.


Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ CAUTION

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuel vapor.You can be badly burned and thevehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you andothers:

• Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

• Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, oron any surface other than theground.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

• Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Checking ThingsUnder the Hood

{ CAUTION

An electric fan under the hood canstart up and injure you even whenthe engine is not running. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ CAUTION

Things that burn can get on hotengine parts and start a fire.These include liquids like fuel, oil,coolant, brake fluid, windshieldwasher and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or otherscould be burned. Be careful not todrop or spill things that will burnonto a hot engine.


Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hood release handle withthis symbol on it. It is locatedunder the instrument panelon the driver’s side of the vehicle.

2. At the front of the vehicle, pull upon the center of the hood, andpush the secondary hood releaseto the right.

3. After you have partially lifted thehood, gas struts will automaticallytake over to lift and hold thehood in the fully open position.

Before closing the hood, be sure allfiller caps are on properly.

Pull the hood down to close. Lowerthe hood until the lifting pressureof the strut is reduced. Thenallow the hood to fall and latch intoplace under its own weight.Check to make sure the hood isclosed. If the hood does notfully latch, gently push the hooddown at the front and center of thehood until it is completely latched.


Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you lift the hood, here is what you will see:


A. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 5-19.

B. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap.See Cooling System onpage 5-19.

C. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting on page 5-30.

D. Underhood Fuse Block onpage 5-90.

E. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting on page 5-30.

F. Power Steering Fluid onpage 5-26.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under EngineOil on page 5-13.

H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 5-13.

I. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick. See “Checking theFluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid on page 5-18.

J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir.See “Brake Fluid” under Brakeson page 5-27.

K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 5-17.

L. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-26.

Engine OilChecking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the oil mustbe warm and the vehicle must be onlevel ground.

The engine oil dipstick handleis a yellow loop. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give theoil several minutes to drain backinto the oil pan. If this is notdone, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and cleanit with a paper towel or cloth,then push it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.


When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick,add at least one quart/liter of therecommended oil. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. Forengine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 5-94.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.If the engine has so much oilthat the oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that showsthe proper operating range,the engine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-12 for the location ofthe engine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange in the cross-hatched area.Push the dipstick all the way backin when through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseLook for three things:


• GM6094M

Use only an oil that meetsGM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for thevehicle. These numbers on anoil container show its viscosity,or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such asSAE 20W-50.

• American Petroleum Institute(API) starburst symbol

Oils meeting these requirementsshould have the starburst symbolon the container. This symbolindicates that the oil has beencertified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oilidentified as meeting GM StandardGM6094M and showing theAmerican Petroleum InstituteCertified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to usethe recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

Cold Temperature OperationIf in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F(−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30engine oil. Both provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. Always use an oilthat meets the required specification,GM6094M. See “What Kind ofEngine Oil to Use” for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil FlushesDo not add anything to the oil.The recommended oils withthe starburst symbol that meetGM Standard GM6094M are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

Engine Oil Life SystemWhen to Change Engine OilThis vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably.For the oil life system to workproperly, the system must be resetevery time the oil is changed.


When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message comes on. Changethe oil as soon as possible withinthe next 600 miles (1 000 km). It ispossible that, if driving under the bestconditions, the oil life system mightnot indicate that an oil change isnecessary for over a year. However,the engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and atthis time the system must be reset.Your dealer/retailer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork using genuine parts and resetthe system. It is also important tocheck the oil regularly and keep itat the proper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since the last oil change. Rememberto reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife SystemThe Engine Oil Life Systemcalculates when to change theengine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Whenever the oil is changed,reset the system so it can calculatewhen the next oil change is required.If a situation occurs where the oilis changed prior to a CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message beingturned on, reset the system.

If the vehicle does not have DriverInformation Center (DIC) buttons:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, withthe engine off. The vehicle mustbe in P (Park) to access thisdisplay. Press the trip odometerreset stem until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays.

2. Press and hold the tripodometer reset stem until OILLIFE REMAINING shows 100%.Three chimes sound and theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage goes off.

3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.If the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message comes back onwhen the vehicle is started, theengine oil life system has notreset. Repeat the procedure.

If the vehicle has Driver InformationCenter (DIC) buttons:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays.

3. Press and hold the set/resetbutton until 100% is displayed.Three chimes sound andthe CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message goes off.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat theprocedure.


What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer’s warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change your ownoil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never disposeof oil by putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Recycleit by taking it to a place that collectsused oil.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterWhen to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at theMaintenance II intervals and replaceit at the first oil change after each50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 6-3 for more information. If youare driving in dusty/dirty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-12 for the location ofthe engine air cleaner/filter.


How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicle andlightly shake the filter (away fromvehicle) to release loose dust anddirt. If the filter remains caked withdirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter, do the following:

1. Loosen the screws that hold thecover on.

2. Disconnect the electricalconnector.

3. Lift off the cover.

4. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter element and any loosedebris that may be found in theair cleaner base.

5. Inspect or replace the air filterelement.

6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall the cover and reconnectthe electrical connector.

{ CAUTION

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. If it is not there and theengine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, andbe careful working on the enginewith the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filteris off, a backfire can cause adamaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which will damage it. Always havethe air cleaner/filter in place whenyou are driving.

Automatic TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to thedealer/retailer and have it repairedas soon as possible.

Change the fluid at the intervalslisted in Additional RequiredServices on page 6-6, and be sureto use the transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-12.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluidmay damage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle’s warranty. Always usethe automatic transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-12.


The transmission fluid will notreach the end of the dipstick unlessthe transmission is at operatingtemperature. If you need to check thetransmission fluid level, please takethe vehicle to your dealer/retailer.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

A. Engine Coolant Recovery TankB. Radiator Pressure CapC. Engine Cooling Fans

{ CAUTION

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ CAUTION

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant otherthan DEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner, at 30,000 miles(50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicleis filled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. The coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for five yearsor 150,000 miles (240 000 km),whichever occurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 5-24.


What to Use

{ CAUTION

Adding only plain water to thecooling system can be dangerous.Plain water, or some other liquidsuch as alcohol, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The vehicle’s coolant warningsystem is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, the enginecould get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Theengine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:

• Gives freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C), outsidetemperature.

• Gives boiling protection up to265°F (129°C), enginetemperature.

• Protects against rust andcorrosion.

• Will not damage aluminum parts.

• Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, andother parts.

Notice: If extra inhibitorsand/or additives are used inthe vehicle’s cooling system,the vehicle could be damaged.Use only the proper mixture ofthe engine coolant listed in thismanual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-12 for moreinformation.

Checking CoolantThe vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant recovery tank. If thecoolant inside the coolant recoverytank is boiling, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not ator above the FULL COLD mark, adda 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant recovery tank, but be surethe cooling system is cool before thisis done. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-19 for more information.


The coolant recovery tank cap hasthis symbol on it.

When the engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be at or above theFULL COLD line marked on therecovery tank.

When the engine is hot, the levelcould be higher than the FULLCOLD line. If the coolant is belowthe FULL COLD line when theengine is hot, there could be a leakin the cooling system.

If the coolant is low, add the coolantor take the vehicle to a dealer/retailerfor service.

How to Add Coolant to theRecovery Tank

{ CAUTION

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture atthe coolant recovery tank.


How to Add Coolant to theRadiator

{ CAUTION

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ CAUTION

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if youturn the surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they cancome out at high speed. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the surge tank

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

pressure cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

If coolant is needed, add the propermixture directly to the radiator,but be sure the cooling system iscool before this is done.

1. Detach fasteners and lift offthe panel that covers theradiator cap.

2. Remove the radiator pressurecap when the cooling system,including the upper radiator hose,is no longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one fullturn. If you hear a hiss, wait forthat to stop. A hiss means thereis still some pressure left in thesystem.

3. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

4. Fill the radiator to the base ofthe filler neck with the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture.

5. When coolant begins to flow outof the filler neck, reinstall thepressure cap. Be sure to secureit tightly.


6. Fill the coolant recovery tank tothe FULL COLD mark.

7. Reinstall the cap on the coolantrecovery tank but leave theradiator pressure cap off.

8. Start the engine and let it rununtil the upper radiator hosefeels warm. Any time during thisprocedure, watch out for theengine cooling fan(s).

9. If the coolant level inside theradiator filler neck is low, addmore of the proper DEX-COOLcoolant mixture through the fillerneck until the level is back upto the base of the filler neck.Replace the pressure cap.Be sure to secure it tightly.

Notice: If the pressure cap isnot tightly installed, coolant lossand possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.


Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gage on the instrumentpanel cluster. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 3-41.

The vehicle may also displayan ENGINE OVERHEATEDIDLE ENGINE and ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINEmessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-58.

You may decide not to lift the hoodwhen this warning appears, butinstead get service help right away.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 7-6.

If you do decide to lift the hood,make sure the vehicle is parked ona level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they arenot, do not continue to run theengine and have the vehicleserviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: If the engine catches firewhile driving with no coolant, thevehicle can be badly damaged.The costly repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 5-25 forinformation on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.

If Steam Is Coming From TheEngine Compartment

{ CAUTION

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Turn it offand get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Waituntil there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when thevehicles engine is overheated, theliquids in it can catch fire. You orothers could be badly burned.Stop the engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until theengine is cool.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 5-25 forinformation on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.


If No Steam Is Coming FromThe Engine CompartmentIf an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine canget a little too hot when the vehicle:

• Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

• Stops after high-speed driving.

• Idles for long periods in traffic.

• Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. If in a traffic jam, shift toN (Neutral), otherwise, shiftto the highest gear whiledriving — D (Drive) or L (Low).

If the temperature overheat gage isno longer in the overheat zone or anoverheat warning no longer displays,the vehicle can be driven. Continueto drive the vehicle slow for about10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicledistance from the car in front of you.If the warning does not come backon, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicle right away.

If there is no sign of steam, idlethe engine for three minuteswhile parked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode”next in this section.

OverheatedEngine ProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating mode letsthe vehicle be driven to a safe placein an emergency situation. If anoverheated engine condition exists,an overheat protection mode whichalternates firing groups of cylindershelps prevent engine damage. In thismode, there is a significant loss inpower and engine performance.The temperature gage indicates anoverheat condition exists. Drivingextended distances and/or towing atrailer in the overheat protectionmode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in theoverheated engine protectionoperating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to coolbefore attempting any repair.The engine oil will be severelydegraded. Repair the cause ofcoolant loss, change the oil andreset the oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 5-13.


Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluid reservoiris located toward the front of theengine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for reservoir location.

When to Check PowerSteering FluidIt is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessyou suspect there is a leak in thesystem or you hear an unusualnoise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluidTo check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Remove engine oil fill cap.

3. Slide engine cover rearward andlift to remove.

4. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

5. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

6. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

7. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should be somewherebetween MAX and MIN line on thedipstick in room temperature. If thefluid is on or below MIN line, youshould add fluid close to MAX Line.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-12. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluidmay damage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle’s warranty. Alwaysuse the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-12.

Windshield Washer FluidWhat to UseWhen adding windshieldwasher fluid, be sure to read themanufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If the vehicle will be operating inan area where the temperature mayfall below freezing, use a fluid thathas sufficient protection againstfreezing.


Adding Washer FluidWhen the windshield washer fluidreservoir is low, a WASHER FLUIDLOW ADD FLUID message will bedisplayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-58 for moreinformation.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for reservoir location.

Notice:

• When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washerfluid tank and other parts of thewasher system. Also, waterdoes not clean as well aswasher fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tank ifit is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in your windshieldwasher. It can damage thevehicle’s windshield washersystem and paint.

BrakesBrake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for the location of thereservoir.


There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:

• The brake fluid level goes downbecause of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulicsystem can also cause a low fluidlevel. Have the brake hydraulicsystem fixed, since a leak meansthat sooner or later the brakes willnot work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid. Addingfluid does not correct a leak. If fluidis added when the linings are worn,there will be too much fluid when newbrake linings are installed. Add orremove brake fluid, as necessary,only when work is done on the brakehydraulic system.

{ CAUTION

If too much brake fluid is added,it can spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. You orothers could be burned, and thevehicle could be damaged. Addbrake fluid only when work is doneon the brake hydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 3-38.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-12.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from enteringthe reservoir.

{ CAUTION

With the wrong kind of fluid inthe brake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badlydamage brake hydraulic systemparts. For example, just a fewdrops of mineral-based oil,such as engine oil, in the brakehydraulic system can damagebrake hydraulic system parts sobadly that they will have to bereplaced. Do not let someoneput in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle’s painted surfaces, thepaint finish can be damaged. Becareful not to spill brake fluidon the vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See WashingYour Vehicle on page 5-83.


Brake WearThis vehicle has disc brakes.Disc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ CAUTION

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toan accident. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads couldresult in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal whenthe brakes are first applied or

lightly applied. This does notmean something is wrong withthe brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-94.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brakepedal does not return to normalheight, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might be required.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicleis complex. Its many parts haveto be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to havereally good braking. The vehicle wasdesigned and tested with top-qualitybrake parts. When parts of thebraking system are replaced — forexample, when the brake liningswear down and new ones areinstalled — be sure to get newapproved replacement parts. If this isnot done, the brakes might not workproperly. For example, if someoneputs in brake linings that are wrongfor the vehicle, the balance betweenthe front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The brakingperformance expected can changein many other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts areinstalled.


BatteryThis vehicle has a maintenance freebattery. When it is time for a newbattery, see your dealer/retailer forone that has the replacementnumber shown on the originalbattery’s label.

For battery replacement, see yourdealer/retailer or the service manual.To purchase a service manual,see Service Publications OrderingInformation on page 7-15.Warning: Battery posts, terminals,and related accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ CAUTION

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Startingon page 5-30 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle isdriven infrequently, remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery. This helps keep the batteryfrom running down.

Extended Storage: For extendedstorage of the vehicle, remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger. This helps maintain thecharge of the battery over anextended period of time.

Jump StartingIf the vehicle’s battery has rundown, you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cablesto start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ CAUTION

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

• They contain acid that canburn you.

• They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

• They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.


Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will not work,and it could damage the vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle.It must have a 12-volt batterywith a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’ssystem is not a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Onlyuse vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jumpstart your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are, itcould cause a ground connectionyou do not want. You would notbe able to start your vehicle, andthe bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) ora manual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parking brake.If one of the vehicles is afour-wheel-drive vehicle, be surethe transfer case is not in Neutral.

Notice: If you leave the radio orother accessories on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off the radioand other accessories when jumpstarting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlets. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are not needed.This will avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries. And it couldsave the radio!


4. Open the hoods and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on the othervehicle. Your vehicle has aremote positive (+) and aremote negative (−) jumpstarting terminal. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for more informationon the terminal locations.

{ CAUTION

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded. Usea flashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the batteries have enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the ACDelco® battery(or batteries) installed in your newvehicle. But if a battery has filler

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

caps, be sure the right amount offluid is there. If it is low, add waterto take care of that first. If youdo not, explosive gas could bepresent.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ CAUTION

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get a shortthat would damage the batteryand maybe other parts too. Anddo not connect the negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminalon the dead battery because thiscan cause sparks.


6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other endtouch metal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehiclehas one.Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part, or toa remote negative (−) terminal onthe vehicle with the dead battery.

9. Connect the other end ofthe negative (−) cable at least18 inches (45 cm) away from thedead battery, but not near engineparts that move.The electrical connection is justas good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.Your vehicle has a remotenegative (−) terminal for thispurpose.


10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, it probablyneeds service.

Notice: If the jumper cablesare connected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables do nottouch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−)cable from the vehicle that hadthe dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

Jumper Cable Removal


All-Wheel DriveIt is recommended that the all-wheeldrive lubricants be checked andfilled by the dealer/retailer.

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to checkthe lubricant. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-3.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset atthe factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aim maybe affected. Aim adjustment tothe low-beam headlamps may benecessary if oncoming drivers flashtheir high-beam headlamps atyou (for vertical aim).

If the headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommended thatyou take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbson page 5-36.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer/retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ CAUTION

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.


License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws holdingeach of the license plate lampsto the liftgate trim.

2. Turn and pull the license platelamp forward through the liftgate trim opening.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse steps 1–3 to reinstallthe license plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp BulbNumber

License Plate Lamp 194

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer/retailer.

Windshield WiperBlade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking.See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-3 for more information.Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. To replace thewiper blade assembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiper armaway from the windshield.

2. Press the button in the middle ofthe wiper arm connector and pullthe wiper blade away from thearm connector.


3. Install the new wiper blade andmake sure the wiper bladelocks into place.

For the proper size and type seeMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 6-14.

Backglass Wiper BladeTo replace the backglass wiperblade:

1. Pull the wiper blade assemblyaway from the backglass.The backglass wiper blade willnot lock in a vertical positionso care should be used whenpulling it away from the vehicle.

2. Rotate the wiper blade assembly,hold the wiper arm in position,and push the blade away fromthe wiper arm.

3. Replace the wiper blade.

4. Return the wiper arm and bladeassembly to the rest position onthe glass.

TiresYour new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer.If you ever have questions aboutyour tire warranty and where toobtain service, see your vehicleWarranty booklet for details.For additional information refer tothe tire manufacturer.

{ CAUTION

Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

• Overloading yourvehicle’s tires can causeoverheating as a resultof too much flexing.You could have an air-outand a serious accident.See Loading the Vehicleon page 4-16.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting accident couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires arecold. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43.

• Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenyou hit a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

• Worn, old tires can causeaccidents. If the tire’s treadis badly worn, or if yourvehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.


Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire’s width, height,aspect ratio, constructiontype, and service description.

See the “Tire Size” illustrationlater in this section for moredetail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM’s specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Departmentof Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that the tireis in compliance with the U.S.Department of TransportationMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the TireIdentification Number (TIN).

The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although onlyone side may have the date ofmanufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies in thesidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 5-54.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and the maximumpressure needed to supportthat load.

Passenger (P-Metric) TireExample


(A) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles(5 000 km) and should not bedriven at speeds over 65 mph(105 km/h). The compact sparetire is for emergency use when aregular road tire has lost air andgone flat. If your vehicle has acompact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 5-79 and If aTire Goes Flat on page 5-57.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies in thesidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although onlyone side may have the date ofmanufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and the maximumpressure needed to supportthat load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflatedto 60 psi (420 kPa). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43.

(F) Tire Size: A combinationof letters and numbers define atire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM’s specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Compact Spare Tire Example


Tire Size

The following illustration showsan example of a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.

For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter B meansbelted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of the tire.The load index represents theload carry capacity a tire iscertified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount of airinside the tire pressing outwardon each square inch of the tire.Air pressure is expressed inpounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This meansthe combined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examplesof optional accessories are,automatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire’s height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located between theplies and the tread. Cords maybe made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.


Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the plies are laidat alternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in pounds per squareinch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A codemolded into the sidewall ofa tire signifying that the tire isin compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, and dateof production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Loading the Vehicleon page 4-16.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeLoading the Vehicle onpage 4-16.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeLoading the Vehicle onpage 4-16.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire:A tire used on light duty trucksand some multipurposepassenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.


Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by150 lbs (68 kg). See Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-16.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bears whitelettering, or bears manufacturer,brand, and/or model namemolding that is higher or deeperthan the same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A tire used on passengercars and some light duty trucksand multipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendedtire inflation pressure asshown on the tire placard.See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-43 and Loading theVehicle on page 4-16.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumericcode assigned to a tire indicatingthe maximum speed at which atire can operate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires onpage 5-51.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire’s traction, temperature,and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturersusing government testingprocedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of thetire. See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 5-54.


Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-16.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle’scapacity weight and theoriginal equipment tire sizeand recommended inflationpressure. See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-16.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amountof air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tellyou that under-inflation orover-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not haveenough air (under-inflation),you can get the following:• Too much flexing• Too much heat• Tire overloading• Premature or irregular wear• Poor handling• Reduced fuel economyIf your tires have too much air(over-inflation), you can getthe following:• Unusual wear• Poor handling• Rough ride• Needless damage from road

hazards

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to your vehicle. Thislabel shows your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amount ofair pressure needed to supportyour vehicle’s maximum loadcarrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weightyour vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-16. Howyou load your vehicle affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.


When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more. Do not forget to checkthe compact spare tire, if thevehicle has one. It should be at60 psi (420 kPa). For additionalinformation regarding thecompact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 5-79.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegage to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey are under-inflated. Checkthe tire’s inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. Cold meansyour vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven nomore than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap fromthe tire valve stem. Press thetire gage firmly onto the valveto get a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and LoadingInformation label, no furtheradjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add airuntil you reach the recommendedamount.

If you overfill the tire, releaseair by pushing on the metal stemin the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems. Theyhelp prevent leaks by keepingout dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your vehicle’s tiresand transmit tire pressure readingsto a receiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated to theinflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)


As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving ona significantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency andtire tread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combinedwith the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 5-46 foradditional information.


Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry and Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) operates on a radiofrequency and complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:



Vehicles with TPMS operate on aradio frequency and comply withRSS-210 of Industry and ScienceCanada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:


2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of the device.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly, if the vehiclehas one. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in the vehicle’s tiresand transmits the tire pressurereadings to a receiver located in thevehicle.


When a low tire pressure condition isdetected, the TPMS illuminates thelow tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument panelcluster.

At the same time a message tocheck the pressure in a specific tireappears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) display. The low tirepressure warning light and the DICwarning message come on at eachignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed by thedriver. For additional information anddetails about the DIC operation anddisplays see DIC Operation andDisplays (With DIC Buttons) on

page 3-47 or DIC Operation andDisplays (Without DIC Buttons) onpage 3-53 and DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-58.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as you start to drive. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure in the tire(s) are gettinglow and need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressure for yourvehicle’s tires when they are cold.See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-16, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location on your vehicle.Also see Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-43.

Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn youabout a low tire pressure conditionbut it does not replace normaltire maintenance. See TireInspection and Rotation onpage 5-50 and Tires on page 5-37.

Notice: Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS)sensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use theGM approved tire sealant availablethrough your dealer/retailer.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits usea GM approved liquid tire sealant.Using non-approved tire sealantscould damage the TPMS sensors.See Tire Sealant and CompressorKit on page 5-58 for informationregarding the inflator kit materialsand instructions.


TPMS Malfunction Light andMessageThe TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message isalso displayed. The low tire warninglight and DIC warning messagecome on at each ignition cycle untilthe problem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause themalfunction light and DIC messageto come on are:

• One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire, ifyour vehicle has one. The sparetire does not have a TPMSsensor. The TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message should gooff once you re-install the road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor.

• The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was started but notcompleted or not completedsuccessfully after rotating thevehicle’s tires. The DIC messageand TPMS malfunction lightshould go off once the TPMSsensor matching process isperformed successfully. See“TPMS Sensor Matching Process”later in this section.

• One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. The DICmessage and the TPMSmalfunction light should go offwhen the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensor matchingprocess is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer/retailer for service.

• Replacement tires or wheels donot match your vehicle’s originalequipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than thoserecommended for your vehiclecould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 5-52.

• Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning itcannot detect or signal a low tirecondition. See your dealer/retailer forservice if the TPMS malfunction lightand DIC message comes on andstays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcessEach TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. Any timeyou rotate your vehicle’s tires orreplace one or more of the TPMSsensors, the identification codes willneed to be matched to the newtire/wheel position. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positionsin the following order: driver sidefront tire, passenger side front tire,passenger side rear tire, anddriver side rear tire using a TPMSdiagnostic tool. See yourdealer/retailer for service.


The TPMS sensors can also bematched to each tire/wheel positionby increasing or decreasing thetire’s air pressure. If increasing thetire’s air pressure, do not exceedthe maximum inflation pressureindicated on the tire’s sidewall.

To decrease air-pressure out of a tireyou can use the pointed end of thevalve cap, a pencil-style air pressuregage, or a key.

You have two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger than two minutes, to matchthe first tire and wheel, or more thanfive minutes to match all four tireand wheel positions the matchingprocess stops and you need tostart over.

The TPMS sensor matching processis outlined below:


2. Turn the ignition switch toON/RUN with the engine off.

3. Press the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter’s LOCKand UNLOCK buttons at thesame time for approximatelyfive seconds. The horn soundstwice to signal the receiveris in relearn mode and TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Remove the valve cap from thevalve cap stem. Activate theTPMS sensor by increasing ordecreasing the tire’s air pressurefor five seconds, or until a hornchirp sounds. The horn chirp,which may take up to 30 secondsto sound, confirms that the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to this tire and wheelposition.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 5. The horn soundstwo times to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on theDIC display screen goes off.

9. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressure levelas indicated on the Tire andLoading Information label.

11. Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems.


Tire Inspection andRotationWe recommend that youregularly inspect the vehicle’stires, including the spare tire, ifthe vehicle has one, for signs ofwear or damage. See When It IsTime for New Tires on page 5-51for more information.

Tires should be rotated every5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to13 000 km). See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-3.

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on the vehicle.This will ensure that the vehiclecontinues to perform most like itdid when the tires were new.

Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels.

See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 5-51 andWheel Replacement onpage 5-55.

When rotating the vehicle’s tires,always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, do not include it in thetire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated,adjust the front and rear inflationpressures as shown on the Tireand Loading Information label.See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-43 and Loading theVehicle on page 4-16.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 5-46.

Make certain that all wheel nutsare properly tightened. See“Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specificationson page 5-94.


{ CAUTION

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or onthe parts to which it isfastened, can make wheelnuts become loose after time.The wheel could come off andcause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places wherethe wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, youcan use a cloth or a papertowel to do this; but be sure touse a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all therust or dirt off. See Changinga Flat Tire on page 5-66.

Make sure the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, is storedsecurely. Push, pull, and then tryto rotate or turn the tire. If itmoves, tighten the cable. SeeStoring a Flat or Spare Tire andTools on page 5-76.

When It Is Time forNew TiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures,driving speeds, vehicle loading,and road conditions influence whenyou need new tires.

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which will appearwhen the tires have only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.

You need new tires if any of thefollowing statements are true:

• You can see the indicators atthree or more places aroundthe tire.

• You can see cord or fabricshowing through the tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked,cut, or snagged deep enough toshow cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, orother damage that cannot berepaired well because of the sizeor location of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades overtime, even if they are not beingused. This is also true for thespare tire, if the vehicle has one.Multiple conditions affect how fastthis aging takes place, includingtemperatures, loading conditions,and inflation pressure maintenance.


With proper care and maintenancetires typically wear out before theydegrade due to age. If you areunsure about the need to replace thetires as they get older, consult the tiremanufacturer for more information.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for your vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedon your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec) systemrating. If you need replacementtires, GM strongly recommendsthat you get tires with the sameTPC Spec rating. This way, yourvehicle will continue to have tiresthat are designed to give thesame performance and vehiclesafety, during normal use, as theoriginal tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of yourvehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressuremonitoring performance. GM’sTPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall near thetire size. If the tires have anall-season tread design, the TPCSpec number will be followed byan MS for mud and snow. SeeTire Sidewall Labeling onpage 5-38 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing tiresin sets of four. This is becauseuniform tread depth on all tireswill help keep your vehicleperforming most like it did whenthe tires were new. Replacingless than a full set of tires canaffect the braking and handlingperformance of your vehicle.

See Tire Inspection and Rotationon page 5-50 for information onproper tire rotation.

{ CAUTION

Mixing tires could cause youto lose control while driving.If you mix tires of differentsizes, brands, or types(radial and bias-belted tires),the vehicle may not handleproperly, and you could havea crash. Using tires of differentsizes, brands, or types mayalso cause damage to yourvehicle. Be sure to use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels. It isall right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily,as it was developed for useon your vehicle. See CompactSpare Tire on page 5-79.


{ CAUTION

If you use bias-ply tires on thevehicle, the wheel rim flangescould develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could failsuddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace yourvehicle’s tires with those that donot have a TPC Spec number,make sure they are the samesize, load range, speed rating,and construction type (radialand bias-belted tires) as yourvehicle’s original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressuremonitoring system could give aninaccurate low-pressure warningif non-TPC Spec rated tires areinstalled on your vehicle.Non-TPC Spec rated tires maygive a low-pressure warning thatis higher or lower than the proper

warning level you would get withTPC Spec rated tires. See TirePressure Monitor System onpage 5-44.

Your vehicle’s original equipmenttires are listed on the Tire andLoading Information Label.See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-16, for more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation Label and its locationon your vehicle.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are adifferent size than your originalequipment wheels and tires, thiscould affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking, rideand handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle haselectronic systems such as anti-lockbrakes, rollover airbags, traction

control, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.

{ CAUTION

If you add different sizedwheels, your vehicle may notprovide an acceptable level ofperformance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheelsare selected. You may increasethe chance that you will crash andsuffer serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for your vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 5-52and Accessories and Modificationson page 5-3 for additionalinformation.


Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not apply todeep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver, or temporaryuse spare tires, tires with nominal

rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions ona specified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1.5) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differencesin road characteristics andclimate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highestto lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavementas measured under controlledconditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.


Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades areA (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passengercar tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. It should benoted that the temperature gradefor this tire is established for a tire

that is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment andTire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehiclewere aligned and balanced carefullyat the factory to give you the longesttire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment andtire balancing will not be necessaryon a regular basis. However, if younotice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or theother, the alignment might need to bechecked. If you notice your vehiclevibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted or corroded.If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheelleaks air, replace it (except somealuminum wheels, which cansometimes be repaired). See yourdealer/retailer if any of theseconditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know thekind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as theone it replaces.


If you need to replace any of yourwheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,or Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors, replace them onlywith new GM original equipmentparts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheelbolts, wheel nuts, and TPMSsensors for your vehicle.

{ CAUTION

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nutson your vehicle can be dangerous.It could affect the braking andhandling of your vehicle, makeyour tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have acollision in which you or otherscould be injured. Always use thecorrect wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 5-66 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ CAUTION

Putting a used wheel on thevehicle is dangerous. You cannotknow how it has been used orhow far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause acrash. If you have to replace awheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{ CAUTION

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts.The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and you orothers may be injured in a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on thevehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Followthat manufacturer’s instructions.

(Continued)


CAUTION (Continued)

To help avoid damage to thevehicle, drive slowly, readjust orremove the device if it iscontacting the vehicle, and do notspin the vehicle’s wheels. If youdo find traction devices that willfit, install them on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile you are driving, especially ifyou maintain the tires properly. SeeTires on page 5-37. If air goes out ofa tire, It is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if you should everhave a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire willcreate a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your footoff the accelerator pedal and gripthe steering wheel firmly. Steer to

maintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop well out ofthe traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid and mayrequire the same correction youwould use in a skid. In any rearblowout, remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may bevery bumpy and noisy, but you canstill steer. Gently brake to a stop, welloff the road if possible.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place and stopping.

1. Turn on the hazard warningflashers. See Hazard WarningFlashers on page 3-5.

2. Park the vehicle. Set the parkingbrake firmly and put the shiftlever in P (Park).

3. Turn off the engine.

4. Inspect the flat tire.

{ CAUTION

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without the appropriatesafety equipment and training. If ajack is provided with the vehicle, itis designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anythingelse, you or others could be badlyinjured or killed if the vehicle slipsoff the jack. If a jack is providedwith the vehicle, only use it forchanging a flat tire.

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealantand compressor kit. To use the jackand spare tire, see Changing aFlat Tire on page 5-66. To use thetire sealant and compressor kit,see Tire Sealant and CompressorKit on page 5-58.


Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ CAUTION

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 2-30.

{ CAUTION

Over-inflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sure toread and follow the tire sealant andcompressor kit instructions andinflate the tire to its recommendedpressure. Do not exceed therecommended pressure.

{ CAUTION

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or other equipmentin the passenger compartmentof the vehicle could cause injury.In a sudden stop or collision, looseequipment could strike someone.Store the tire sealant andcompressor kit in its originallocation.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in thetread area of the tire. It can also beused to inflate an under inflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tireis too severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 7-6.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.


This vehicle may have one ofthe following tire sealant andcompressor kits. The kit includes:

A. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air orAir Only)

B. On/Off ButtonC. Pressure GageD. Pressure Deflation Button

(If equipped)E. Tire Sealant CanisterF. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)G. Air Only Hose (Black)H. Power Plug

Tire SealantRead and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adheredto the sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expiration dateon the sealant canister. The sealantcanister should be replaced beforeits expiration date. Replacementsealant canisters are available atyour local dealer/retailer. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See“Removal and Installation ofthe Sealant Canister” following.


Using the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit toTemporarily Seal and Inflatea Punctured TireFollow the directions closely forcorrect sealant usage.

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for 5 minutes.This will help to inflate the tire faster.

Always do a safety check first.See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 5-57. Do not remove anyobjects that have penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit Storage onpage 5-66.


2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)and the power plug (H).

3. Place the kit on the ground.Make sure the tire valvestem is positioned close to theground so the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)onto the tire valve stem. Turnit clockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Accessory Power Outlet(s)on page 3-20.If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while usingthe air compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (A)counterclockwise to theSealant + Air position.

9. Press the on/off (B) button toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.The pressure gage (C) will initiallyshow a high pressure while thecompressor pushes the sealantinto the tire. Once the sealant iscompletely dispersed into the tire,the pressure will quickly drop andstart to rise again as the tireinflates with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflation pressureusing the pressure gage (C).The recommended inflationpressure can be found on theTire and Loading Informationlabel. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43.The pressure gage (C) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressoroff to get an accurate pressurereading. The compressormay be turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.


Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 7-6.

11. Press the on/off button (B) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.The tire is not sealed andwill continue to leak air untilthe vehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire,therefore, Steps 12 through 18must be done immediately afterStep 11.Be careful while handling the tiresealant and compressor kit as itcould be warm after usage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valve stem cap.

15. Replace the sealant/air hose (F),and the power plug (H) back intheir original location.

16. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove the maximumspeed label from the sealantcanister (E) and place it in ahighly visible location. Thelabel is a reminder not to exceed55 mph (90 km/h) until thedamaged tire is repaired orreplaced.

17. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location inthe vehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle5 miles (8 km) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

19. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure.Refer to Steps 1 through 11under “Using the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured).”If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 10 psi (68 kPa) belowthe recommended inflationpressure, stop driving thevehicle. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealantcannot seal the tire. SeeRoadside Assistance Programon page 7-6.


If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 10 psi(68 kPa) from the recommendedinflation pressure, inflate thetire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, and vehicle.

21. Dispose of the used sealantcanister (E) and sealant/airhose (F) assembly at alocal dealer/retailer or inaccordance with local statecodes and practices.

22. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from yourdealer/retailer.

23. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take the vehicleto an authorized dealer/retailerwithin a 100 miles (161 km)of driving to have the tirerepaired or replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured)To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:


Always do a safety check first. SeeIf a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-57.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit Storage onpage 5-66.

2. Unwrap the air only hose (G)and the power plug (H).

3. Place the kit on the ground.Make sure the tire valvestem is positioned close to theground so the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the tire valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (G) ontothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all itemsfrom other accessory poweroutlets. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 3-20.If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while usingthe air compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (A)clockwise to the Air Only position.

9. Press the on/off (B) button to turnthe compressor on.The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflation pressureusing the pressure gage (C).The recommended inflationpressure can be found on theTire and Loading Informationlabel. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43.The pressure gage (C) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading.The compressor may be turnedon/off until the correct pressureis reached.


If you inflate the tire higher thanthe recommended pressure youcan adjust the excess pressureby pressing the pressuredeflation button (D), if equipped,until the proper pressure readingis reached. This option is onlyfunctional when using the aironly hose (G).

11. Press the on/off button (B) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.Be careful while handling the tiresealant and compressor kit as itcould be warm after usage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Disconnect the air only hose (G)from the tire valve stem, byturning it counterclockwise, andreplace the tire valve stem cap.

14. Replace the air only hose (G)and the power plug (H) andcord back in its original location.

15. Place the equipment in theoriginal storage location inthe vehicle.

The tire sealant and compressor kithas an accessory adapter locatedin a compartment on the bottomof its housing that may be used toinflate air mattresses, balls, etc.

Removal and Installation ofthe Sealant CanisterTo remove the sealant canister:

1. Unwrap the sealant hose.

2. Press the canister release button.

3. Pull up and remove the canister.

4. Replace with a new canisterwhich is available from yourdealer/retailer.

5. Push the new canister into place.


Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit StorageThe tire sealant and compressorkit is located in the storagecompartment on the driver side,at the rear of the vehicle.

1. Press down on the latch tab andpull the cover off to access thestorage compartment.

2. Press the two tabs on the quickrelease buckle to release thetire sealant and compressorkit strap.

3. Remove the sealant andcompressor kit from its tray.

To store the tire sealant andcompressor kit, reverse the steps.

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 3-5.

{ CAUTION

Changing a tire can be dangerous.The vehicle can slip off the jackand roll over or fall on you or otherpeople. You and they could bebadly injured or even killed. Finda level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

To be even more certain thevehicle will not move, you shouldput blocks at the front and rear ofthe tire farthest away from the onebeing changed. That would be thetire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.


When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel BlockB. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to use the jack and changea tire.

Removing the Spare Tireand ToolsThe tools needed to remove thespare tire are located in the storagecompartment on the driver side,at the rear of the vehicle.

1. Open the jack storagecompartment by pulling on thelatch tab, located toward the rearof the vehicle, and pulling thecover off.

A. Tool BagB. Wing BoltC. Jack

2. Remove the wing bolt (B) byturning it counterclockwise

3. Push the jack (C) up out of theholding bracket.

4. Turn the jack on its side, with thebottom facing toward you.

5. Pull the jack straight out, bottomfirst.

The tools you will be using includethe jack (A) and lug wrench (B).


Removing the Spare TireThe compact spare tire is locatedunder the vehicle, in front of the rearbumper. See Compact Spare Tireon page 5-79 for more informationabout the compact spare.

A. Rear Convenience CenterB. Lug WrenchC. Storage Compartment Cap HoleD. Hoist ShaftE. Compact Spare TireF. RetainerG. Hoist Shaft Assembly

1. Open the storage compartmentdoor of the convenience centerthat is nearest the liftgate andremove the cap on the bottom ofthe storage compartment.

2. Open the carpet cutout that islocated through the hole of thestorage compartment.

3. Attach the lug wrench into thehoist shaft.

4. Turn the lug wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue turning the wrenchuntil the spare tire can be pulledout from under the vehicle.

5. Tilt the retainer and slip it throughthe wheel opening to remove thespare tire from the cable.


6. Turn the wrench clockwise toraise the cable back up afterremoving the spare tire.Do not store a full-size or a flatroad tire under the vehicle.See Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools on page 5-76.

To continue changing the flat tire,see Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire onpage 5-70.

If the spare tire will not lower, thesecondary latch could be engaged.

Do the following to check the cable:

1. Check under the vehicle to see ifthe cable is visible.

2. If it is not visible, see SecondaryLatch System on page 5-74.If it is visible, first try to tighten thecable by turning the lug wrenchclockwise until you hear two clicksor feel it skip twice. You cannotover-tighten the cable.

3. Loosen the cable by turning thewrench counterclockwise threeor four turns.

4. If the spare tire has not lowered,tighten the cable all the way andthen loosen it at least two times.If the spare tire did lower to theground, continue with Step 5under “Removing the SpareTire (Vehicles with the RearConvenience Center)” listedpreviously.

5. If you still cannot lower the sparetire to the ground, see SecondaryLatch System on page 5-74.


Removing the Flat Tireand Installing theSpare Tire1. Do a safety check before

proceeding. See Changing aFlat Tire on page 5-66 for moreinformation.

2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover,loosen the plastic nut caps withthe wheel wrench. They will notcome off. Then, using the flat endof the wheel wrench, pry alongthe edge of the cover until itcomes off. Be careful; the edgesmay be sharp. Do not try toremove the cover with yourbare hands.Store the wheel cover securelyin the rear of the vehicle until youhave the flat tire repaired orreplaced.If the vehicle has aluminumwheels, remove the wheel nutcaps using the wheel wrench.

3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but donot remove them — using the lugwrench. For wheels with a wheellock key, use the wheel lock keybetween the lock nut and lugwrench. The key is supplied in thefront passenger door pocket.

Notice: If this vehicle has wheellocks and an impact wrench isused to remove the wheelnuts, the lock nut or wheel lockkey could be damaged. Do notuse an impact wrench to removethe wheel nuts if this vehiclehas wheel locks.

4. To identify the appropriate jackinglocation, find the triangle (A)about 12 inches (30.5 cm)from the front tire or (B) about10.5 inches (27 cm) from therear tire.The triangle is located near eachwheel on the vehicle’s exterior.


Notice: If a jack is used to raisethe vehicle without positioning itcorrectly, the vehicle could bedamaged. When raising thevehicle on a jack, avoid contactwith the rear axle control arms.

5. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Putthe compact spare tire near you.

{ CAUTION

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{ CAUTION

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damagethe vehicle and even make thevehicle fall. To help avoidpersonal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

6. Attach the lug wrench to thejack, and turn the wrenchclockwise to raise the jack head3 inches (7.6 cm).

7. Place the jack under the vehicleas identified in Step 3. Raise thevehicle by turning the lug wrenchclockwise in the jack. Raise thevehicle far enough off the groundso that there is enough room forthe spare tire to fit under thewheel well.

8. Remove all the wheel nuts andthe flat tire.


9. Remove the plastic spare tireheat shield by pulling therubber latch. Store the plasticspare tire heat shield. SeeStoring a Flat or Spare Tire andTools on page 5-76 for moreinformation.

{ CAUTION

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See Changing a FlatTire on page 5-66.

{ CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle’s wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

10. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

11. Place the spare tire on thewheel mounting surface.

12. Put the nuts on by hand byturning the clockwise untilthe wheel is held against themounting surface. Make surethe rounded end is toward thewheel.


13. Lower the vehicle byattaching the lug wrench to thejack and turning the wrenchcounterclockwise. Lower thejack completely.

{ CAUTION

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by the

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

aftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-94 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and tothe proper torque specification.See Capacities and Specificationson page 5-94 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in acrisscross sequence, as shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton your vehicle’s compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.


Secondary Latch SystemThis vehicle has an underbodymounted tire hoist assembly thathas a secondary latch system. It isdesigned to stop the compact sparetire from suddenly falling off thevehicle if the cable holding the sparetire is damaged. For the secondarylatch to work, the tire must be stowedwith the valve stem pointing down.See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools on page 5-76 for instructionson storing the spare tire correctly.

{ CAUTION

Before beginning this procedureread all the instructions. Failure toread and follow the instructionscould damage the hoist assemblyand you and others could gethurt. Read and follow theinstructions listed next.

To release the spare tire from thesecondary latch:

{ CAUTION

Someone standing too closeduring the procedure could beinjured by the jack. If the sparetire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one isbehind you or on either side ofyou as you pull the jack out fromunder the spare.

1. If the cable is not visible, startthis procedure at Step 3.

2. Turn the lug wrenchcounterclockwise untilapproximately 6 inches (15 cm)of cable is exposed.

3. Attach the lug wrench to the jackand raise the jack at least10 turns.

4. Place the jack under the vehicle,ahead of the rear bumper.Position the center lift point ofthe jack under the center of thespare tire.

All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle shown


5. Turn the lug wrench clockwise toraise the jack until it lifts thesecondary latch spring.

6. Keep raising the jack until thespare tire stops moving upwardand is held firmly in place. Thislets you know that the secondarylatch has released and the sparetire is balancing on the jack.

7. Lower the jack by turning the lugwrench counterclockwise. Keeplowering the jack until thespare tire slides off the jack.

8. Disconnect the lug wrench fromthe jack and carefully removethe jack. Use one hand to pushagainst the spare tire whilefirmly pulling the jack out fromunder the spare tire with theother hand.

9. Tilt the retainer and slip itthrough the wheel opening whenthe spare tire has beencompletely lowered.

10. Turn the lug wrench clockwiseto raise the cable back up if thecable is hanging.

Have the hoist shaft assemblyinspected as soon as you can.You will not be able to store a sparetire using the hoist assembly until ithas been repaired or replaced.


Storing a Flat or SpareTire and ToolsStoring the Spare Tire

{ CAUTION

The underbody-mounted sparetire needs to be stored with thevalve stem pointing down. If thespare tire is stored with the valvestem pointing upwards, thesecondary latch will not workproperly and the spare tire couldloosen and suddenly fall from thevehicle. If this happened when thevehicle was being driven, the tiremight contact a person or anothervehicle, causing injury anddamage to itself. Be sure theunderbody-mounted spare tire isstored with the valve stempointing down.

{ CAUTION

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store the spare tire:

1. Lay the compact spare tire nearthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem down.

2. Reinstall the plastic spare tireheat shield on the compactspare tire.

3. Slide the cable retainer throughthe center of the wheel and startto raise the compact spare tire.Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.

4. When the compact spare tire isalmost in the stored position, turnthe tire so the valve is toward therear of the vehicle.This position helps whenchecking the air pressure in thecompact spare tire.

5. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle. Continueturning the lug wrench until youfeel more than two clicks. Thisindicates that the compact sparetire is secure and the cable istight. The spare tire hoist cannotbe overtightened.


6. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull (A), and thentry to turn (B) the tire. If the tiremoves, use the lug wrench totighten the cable.

Storing the Flat Tire1. Remove the cable package from

the jack storage area.

2. Remove the small center cap bytapping the back of the cap withthe extension of the shaft, if thevehicle has aluminum wheels.

3. Put the flat tire in the rear storagearea with the valve stem pointingtoward the rear of the vehicle.

4. Pull the cable (A) through thedoor striker (E), the center of thewheel (D), and the plastic sparetire heat shield (C), as shown.

5. Hook the cable onto the outsideportion of the liftgate hinges (B).

6. Hook the other end of the cableonto the outside portion of theliftgate hinge (A).

7. Pull on the cable to make sure itis secure.


8. Make sure the metal tube iscentered at the striker. Pushthe tube toward the front of thevehicle.

9. Close the liftgate and make sureit is latched properly.

Storing the Tools

A. Tool BagB. Wing BoltC. Jack

Put back all tools as they were storedin the jack storage compartment andput the compartment cover back on.

1. Ensure that the bottom of thejack is facing toward you.

2. Turn the jack (C) on its side andplace down on the holdingbracket.

3. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) byturning clockwise.

4. To replace the cover, line up thetab at the front of the cover withthe notch in the cover opening.Push the cover in place andmake sure that the rear clips arein the slots and push thecover closed.

Store the center cap or the plasticbolt-on wheel covers until a full sizetire is put back on the vehicle. Whenyou replace the compact spare witha full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-onwheel covers or the center cap.Hand-tighten them over the wheelnuts, using the lug wrench.


Compact Spare Tire

{ CAUTION

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

The compact spare tire, if thevehicle has one, was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, however,it can lose air after a time. Checkthe inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spareon the vehicle, stop as soonas possible and make sure thespare tire is correctly inflated.

The compact spare is made toperform well at speeds up to 65 mph(105 km/h) for distances up to3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you canfinish your trip and have the full-sizetire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best toreplace the spare with a full-size tireas soon as possible. The spare tirewill last longer and be in good shapein case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take the vehiclethrough an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the railswhich can damage the tire, wheeland other parts of the vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

And do not mix the compact sparetire or wheel with other wheelsor tires. They will not fit. Keep thespare tire and its wheel together.

The All-Wheel Drive (AWD)system will be automatically disabledwhen you use the compact spare.To restore the AWD and preventexcessive wear on the clutch in yourAWD, replace the compact spare tirewith a full-size tire as soon aspossible.

Notice: Tire chains will not fitthe compact spare. Using themcan damage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do not usetire chains on the compact spare.


Appearance Care

Interior CleaningThe vehicle’s interior will continueto look its best if it is cleaned often.Although not always visible, dustand dirt can accumulate on theupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet,fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.Regular vacuuming is recommendedto remove particles from theupholstery. It is important to keepthe upholstery from becoming andremaining heavily soiled. Soilsshould be removed as quickly aspossible. The vehicle’s interior mayexperience extremes of heat thatcould cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors mayrequire more frequent cleaning.Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to homefurnishings may also transfer color tothe vehicle’s interior.

When cleaning the vehicle’s interior,only use cleaners specificallydesigned for the surfaces beingcleaned. Permanent damage mayresult from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were notintended. Use glass cleaner onlyon glass. Remove any accidentalover-spray from other surfacesimmediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaningcloth.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage tothe rear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Many cleaners contain solventsthat may become concentratedin the vehicle’s breathing space.

Before using cleaners, read andadhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning thevehicle’s interior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the vehicle’sdoors and windows.

Dust may be removed from smallbuttons and knobs using a smallbrush with soft bristles.

Products that remove odors fromthe vehicle’s upholstery andclean the vehicle’s glass can beobtained from your dealer/retailer.

Do not clean the vehicle using:

• A knife or any other sharp objectto remove a soil from any interiorsurface.

• A stiff brush. It can cause damageto the vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Heavy pressure or aggressiverubbing with a cleaning cloth. Useof heavy pressure can damagethe interior and does not improvethe effectiveness of soil removal.


• Laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers can leave residuethat streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) ofwater is a good guide. Use onlymild, neutral-pH soaps.

• Too much cleaner that saturatesthe upholstery.

• Organic solvents such as naptha,alcohol, etc. that can damage thevehicle’s interior.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with asoft brush attachment frequentlyto remove dust and loose dirt.A canister vacuum with a beater barin the nozzle may only be used onfloor carpet and carpeted floor mats.For any soil, always try to remove itfirst with plain water or club soda.

Before cleaning, gently remove asmuch of the soil as possible usingone of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot theremaining soil with a paper towel.Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can beremoved.

• For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excessmoisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiledarea until the cleaning clothremains clean.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used withplain water.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner orspot lifter is to be used, test a smallhidden area for colorfastness first.If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation mayresult, clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has beencompleted, a paper towel can beused to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.


LeatherA soft cloth dampened withwater can be used to remove dust.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can beused. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry.Never use steam to clean leather.Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Manycommercial leather cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanentlychange the appearance and feelof the leather and are notrecommended. Do not use siliconeor wax-based products, or thosecontaining organic solvents to cleanthe vehicle’s interior because theycan alter the appearance byincreasing the gloss in a non-uniformmanner. Never use shoe polish onleather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl,and Other PlasticSurfacesA soft cloth dampened with watermay be used to remove dust.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot liftersor removers on plastic surfaces.Many commercial cleanersand coatings that are sold topreserve and protect soft plasticsurfaces may permanently changethe appearance and feel of theinterior and are not recommended.Do not use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containingorganic solvents to clean thevehicle’s interior because they canalter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{ CAUTION

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.


WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth.During very cold, damp weatherfrequent application may be required.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-12.

Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve thevehicle’s finish is to keep it clean bywashing it often.

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that itshould not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and it wouldnot be covered by the warranty.

Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight. Use a car washing soap.Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that contain acidor abrasives, as they can damagethe paint, metal or plastic on thevehicle. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’directions regarding correct productusage, necessary safety precautionsand appropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes maycause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 12 inches (30 cm) tothe surface of the vehicle. Use ofpower washers exceeding 1,200 psi(8 274 kPa) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Cleaning ExteriorLamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water,a soft cloth and a car washingsoap to clean exterior lamps andlenses. Follow instructions underWashing Your Vehicle on page 5-83.


Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasiveand made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals from

industrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle’s finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. Ifnecessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. Tohelp keep the paint finish lookingnew, keep the vehicle garagedor covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Bright metal parts should be cleanedregularly to keep their luster.Washing with water is all that isusually needed. However, chromepolish may be used on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim.To avoid damaging protective trim,never use auto or chrome polish,steam or caustic soap to clean

aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbedto high polish, is recommended for allbright metal parts.

Windshield, Backglass,and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshieldand backglass with glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lintfree cloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when you clean theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper bladesif they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without properremoval


Aluminum orChrome-Plated Wheelsand TrimThe vehicle may have eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a softclean cloth with mild soap and water.Rinse with clean water. After rinsingthoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels andother chrome trim may bedamaged if the vehicle is notwashed after driving on roadsthat have been sprayed withmagnesium, calcium or sodiumchloride. These chlorides areused on roads for conditionssuch as ice and dust. Alwayswash the vehicle’s chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

Notice: Using strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, could

damage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use only approvedcleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surface of thevehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,abrasive cleaners, cleaners withacid, or abrasive cleaning brusheson them because they coulddamage the surface. Do not usechrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polishon aluminum wheels coulddamage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Use chromepolish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only onchrome-plated wheels, but avoidany painted surface of the wheel,and buff off immediately afterapplication.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brushwith tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.


Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired or replacedto restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer/retailer.Larger areas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer’s/retailer’sbody and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody parts suchas fuel lines, frame, floor pan, andexhaust system even though theyhave corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbodywith plain water. Clean any areaswhere mud and debris can collect.Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened beforebeing flushed. Your dealer/retaileror an underbody car washingsystem can do this.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Although no defect in the paint jobcauses this, we will repair, at nocharge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this falloutcondition within 12 months or12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.


Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for thevehicle. It appears on a plate in thefront corner of the instrument panel,on the driver side. It can be seenthrough the windshield from outsidethe vehicle. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and the certificates oftitle and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is theengine code. This code helps identifythe vehicle’s engine, specifications,and replacement parts. See “EngineSpecifications” under Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-94 for thevehicle’s engine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label is on the inside of theglove box. It is very helpful if partsneed to be ordered. The labelhas the following information:

• Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and specialequipment

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.

Electrical System

High Voltage Devices andWiring

{ CAUTION

Exposure to high voltage cancause shock, burns, and evendeath. The high voltage systemsin your vehicle can only beserviced by technicians withspecial training.

High voltage devices are identifiedby labels. Do not remove, open,take apart, or modify thesedevices. High voltage cable orwiring has orange covering. Do notprobe, tamper with, cut, or modifyhigh voltage cable or wiring.


Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unless youcheck with your dealer/retailerfirst. Some electrical equipmentcan damage the vehicle and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle’s warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle’s battery, even if the vehicleis not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 1-61.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor isprotected by a circuit breaker and afuse. If the motor overheats dueto heavy snow or ice, the wiper willstop until the motor cools. If theoverload is caused by someelectrical problem, have it fixed.

Power Windows andOther Power OptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse blockprotect the power windows andother power accessories. When thecurrent load is too heavy, thecircuit breaker opens and closes,protecting the circuit until theproblem is fixed or goes away.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses, circuit breakers

and fusible thermal links. This greatlyreduces the chance of fires causedby electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage can betemporarily borrowed from anotherfuse location, if a fuse goes out.Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.

Instrument Panel FuseBlockThe instrument panel fuse block islocated under the instrumentpanel on the passenger side of thevehicle. Pull down on the coverto access the fuse block.


Fuses UsageAIRBAG Airbag

AMP AmplifierBCK/UP/

STOPBack-upLamp/Stoplamp

BCM Body ControlModule

CNSTR/VENT Canister Vent

CTSY CourtesyDR/LCK Door Locks

DRL Daytime RunningLamps

DRL 2GMC HID Only/Rear FogLamps-China Only

DSPLY Display

FRT/WSW Front WindshieldWasher

HTD/COOLSEAT

Heated/CoolingSeats

HVAC Heating, Ventilationand Air Conditioning

Fuses UsageIADV/

PWR/LEDInadvertentPower LED

INFOTMNT Infotainment

LT/TRN/SIG Driver Side TurnSignal

MSM Memory SeatModule

PDM Power Mirrors,Liftgate Release

PWRMODE Power Mode

PWR/MIR Power MirrorsRDO Radio

REAR WPR Rear Wiper

RT/TRN/SIG Passenger SideTurn Signal

SPARE SpareSPARE Spare

STR/WHL/ILLUM

Steering WheelIllumination

Fuse Side


Relays UsageLT/PWR/

SEATDriver Side PowerSeat Relay

RT/PWR/SEAT

Passenger SidePower Seat Relay

Relays UsagePWR/

WNDWPower WindowsRelay

PWR/COLUMN

Power SteeringColumn Relay

L/GATE Liftgate RelayLCK Power Lock Relay

REAR/WSW Rear WindowWasher Relay

UNLCK Power Unlock Relay

DRL2 Daytime RunningLamps 2 Relay

LT/UNLCK Driver Side UnlockRelay

DRL Daytime RunningLamps Relay

SPARE Spare

FRT/WSW Front WindshieldWasher Relay

Underhood Fuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is locatedin the engine compartment, onthe passenger side of the vehicle.

Lift the cover for access to thefuse/relay block.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical components on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

To remove fuses, hold the end of thefuse between your thumb and indexfinger and pull straight out.

Relay Side


Fuses UsageA/C

CLUTCHAir ConditioningClutch

ABS MTR Antilock BrakingSystem (ABS) Motor

AFS Adaptive ForwardLighting System

Fuses UsageAIRBAG Airbag System

AUXPOWER Auxiliary Power

AUX VACPUMP

Auxiliary VacuumPump

Fuses Usage

AWD All-Wheel-DriveSystem

BATT 1 Battery 1BATT 2 Battery 2BATT 3 Battery 3

ECM Engine ControlModule

ECM 1 Engine ControlModule 1

EMISSION 1 Emission 1EMISSION 2 Emission 2

EVENCOILS Even Injector Coils

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps

FSCM Fuel System ControlModule

HORN Horn

HTD WASH Heated WindshieldWasher Fluid


Fuses Usage

HTD MIR Heated OutsideRearview Mirror

HVACBLWR

Heating, Ventilationand Air ConditioningBlower

LT HIBEAM

Left High-BeamHeadlamp

LT LOBEAM

Left Low-BeamHeadlamp

LT PRK Left Parking Lamp

LT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer LeftStoplamp and TurnSignal

ODDCOILS Odd Injector Coils

PCM IGN Powertrain ControlModule Ignition

PWRL/GATE Power Liftgate

PWROUTLET Power Outlet

REARCAMERA Rear Camera

Fuses Usage

RR APO Rear AccessoryPower Outlet

RR DEFOG Rear Defogger

RR HVAC Rear ClimateControl System

RT HIBEAM

Right High-BeamHeadlamp

RT LOBEAM

Right Low-BeamHeadlamp

RT PRK Right Parking Lamp

RT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer RightStoplamp and TurnSignal

RVC SNSR Regulated VoltageControl Sensor

S/ROOF/SUNSHADE Sunroof

SPARE SpareStop Lamps

(ChinaOnly)

Stop Lamps(China Only)

STRTR Starter

Fuses Usage

TCM TransmissionControl Module

TRANS TransmissionTRLR

BCK/UPTrailer Back-upLamps

TRLR BRK Trailer BrakeTRLR PRK

LAMPTrailer ParkingLamps

TRLR PWR Trailer Power

WPR/WSW WindshieldWiper/Washer

Relays UsageA/C

CMPRSRCLTCH

Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

AUX VACPUMP

Auxiliary VacuumPump

CRNK Switched PowerFAN 1 Cooling Fan 1FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2


Relays UsageFAN 3 Cooling Fan 3

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps

HI BEAM High-BeamHeadlamps

HID/LOBEAM

High IntensityDischarge (HID)Low-BeamHeadlamps

HORN HornIGN Ignition Main

LT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer LeftStoplamp and TurnSignal Lamp

PRK LAMP Park LampPWR/TRN Powertrain

Relays Usage

RR DEFOG Rear WindowDefogger

RT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer RightStoplamp and TurnSignal Lamp

Stop Lamps(ChinaOnly)

Stop Lamps(China Only)

TRLRBCK/UP

Trailer Back-upLamps

WPR Windshield Wiper

WPR HI Windshield WiperHigh Speed


Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-12 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label locatedunder the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more

information.Cooling System 11.4 qt 10.8 LEngine Oil with Filter 5.5 qt 5.2 LFuel Tank 22.0 gal 83.3 LTransmission Fluid* 5.3 qt 5.0 LWheel Nut Torque 140 lb ft 190 Y

*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-18 for information on checking fluid level.All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 0.043 in (1.10 mm)


MaintenanceSchedule

Maintenance ScheduleIntroduction ..........................6-1Maintenance Requirements .....6-1Your Vehicle and theEnvironment ........................6-1

Using the MaintenanceSchedule ............................6-2

Scheduled Maintenance .........6-3Additional Required Services ....6-6Maintenance Footnotes ..........6-7Owner Checks and Services ....6-9At Each Fuel Fill ...................6-9At Least Once a Month ..........6-9At Least Once a Year ..........6-10Recommended Fluids andLubricants .........................6-12

Maintenance ReplacementParts ................................6-14

Engine Drive Belt Routing .....6-15Maintenance Record ............6-16

MaintenanceSchedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at theproper level and change asrecommended.

Have you purchased the GMProtection Plan? The Plansupplements the vehicle warranties.See the Warranty and OwnerAssistance booklet or yourdealer/retailer for details.

MaintenanceRequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals,checks, inspections, replacementparts, and recommended fluidsand lubricants as prescribed inthis manual are necessary tokeep this vehicle in good workingcondition. Any damage causedby failure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Your Vehicle and theEnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not onlyhelps to keep the vehicle in goodworking condition, but also helps theenvironment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Impropervehicle maintenance can even affectthe quality of the air we breathe.Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the levelof emissions from the vehicle.

Maintenance Schedule 6-1

To help protect the environment, andto keep the vehicle in good condition,be sure to maintain the vehicleproperly.

Using the MaintenanceScheduleWe want to help keep this vehicle ingood working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it.You might drive very short distancesonly a few times a week. Or youmight drive long distances all thetime in very hot, dusty weather.You might use the vehicle in makingdeliveries. Or you might drive it towork, to do errands, or in manyother ways.

Because of all the differentways people use their vehicles,maintenance needs vary. You mightneed more frequent checks andreplacements. So please read thefollowing and note how you drive.

If you have any questions on how tokeep the vehicle in good condition,see your dealer/retailer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargowithin recommended limits on theTire and Loading Informationlabel. See Loading the Vehicleon page 4-16.

• are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

• use the recommended fuel.See Gasoline Octane onpage 5-5.

The services in ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-3 shouldbe performed when indicated.See Additional Required Serviceson page 6-6 and MaintenanceFootnotes on page 6-7 for furtherinformation.

{ CAUTION

Performing maintenance work ona vehicle can be dangerous. Intrying to do some jobs, you canbe seriously injured. Do your ownmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipmentfor the job. If you have any doubt,see your dealer/retailer to have aqualified technician do the work.See Doing Your Own ServiceWork on page 5-4.

Some maintenance services can becomplex. So, unless you aretechnically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, haveyour dealer/retailer do these jobs.

When you go to your dealer/retailerfor service, trained and supportedservice technicians will performthe work using genuine parts.

6-2 Maintenance Schedule

To purchase service information,see Service Publications OrderingInformation on page 7-15.

Owner Checks and Services onpage 6-9 tells what should bechecked, when to check it, and whatcan easily be done to help keepthe vehicle in good condition.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to use arelisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-12 andMaintenance Replacement Partson page 6-14. When the vehicle isserviced, make sure these are used.All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before youor anyone else drives the vehicle.We recommend the use of genuineparts from your dealer/retailer.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, service isrequired for the vehicle. Have thevehicle serviced as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km).It is possible that, if driving under thebest conditions, the engine oil lifesystem might not indicate thatvehicle service is necessary for overa year. However, the engine oil andfilter must be changed at least oncea year and at this time the systemmust be reset. Your dealer/retailerhas trained service technicians whowill perform this work using genuineparts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is everreset accidentally, service the vehiclewithin 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sincethe last service. Remember to reset

the oil life system whenever the oil ischanged. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 5-15 for informationon the Engine Oil Life System andresetting the system.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message appears, certainservices, checks, and inspectionsare required. Required servicesare described in the followingfor “Maintenance I” and“Maintenance II.” Generally, it isrecommended that the first servicebe Maintenance I, the secondservice be Maintenance II, andthen alternate Maintenance I andMaintenance II thereafter. However,in some cases, Maintenance II maybe required more often.


Maintenance I — UseMaintenance I if the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON messagedisplays within 10 months sincethe vehicle was purchased orMaintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — UseMaintenance II if the previousservice performed wasMaintenance I. Always useMaintenance II whenever the

message displays 10 months ormore since the last service or if themessage has not come on at allfor one year.

Scheduled Maintenance

Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. Reset oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-15. An Emission ControlService.

• •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g). • •

Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-17. See footnote (l). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 5-50 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Monthon page 6-9.

• •


Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)

Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •

Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •

Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •

Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •

Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •

Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •

Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). •


Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17. • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid(severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid(normal service). •

All-wheel-drive vehicles: Changetransfer case fluid (severe service).See footnote (m).

• • •

All-wheel-drive vehicles: Changetransfer case fluid (normal service). •

Replace spark plugs and inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission Control Service. •


Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Engine cooling system service(or every five years, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (k).

•

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect otherbrake parts, including calipers,parking brake, etc. Check parkingbrake adjustment.

(b) Visually inspect front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect power steeringlines and hoses for proper hook-up,binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and havethem replaced if they are cracked,swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect allpipes, fittings and clamps; replacewith genuine parts as needed.To help ensure proper operation, apressure test of the cooling systemand pressure cap and cleaning theoutside of the radiator and airconditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear,cracking, or contamination. Cleanthe windshield and wiper blades,if contaminated. Replace wiperblades that are worn or damaged.See Windshield Wiper BladeReplacement on page 5-36 andWindshield, Backglass, and WiperBlades on page 5-84 for moreinformation.


(e) Make sure the safety beltreminder light and safety beltassemblies are working properly.Look for any other loose or damagedsafety belt system parts. If you seeanything that might keep a safety beltsystem from doing its job, have itrepaired. Have any torn or frayedsafety belts replaced. Also seeChecking the Restraint Systemson page 1-63.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood latch assemblies, secondarylatches, pivots, spring anchor andrelease pawl, hood and door hinges,rear folding seats, and liftgatehinges. More frequent lubricationmay be required when exposed to acorrosive environment. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstrips witha clean cloth will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak.

(g) A fluid loss in any vehiclesystem could indicate a problem.Have the system inspectedand repaired and the fluid levelchecked. Add fluid if needed.

(h) Change automatic transmissionfluid if the vehicle is mainly drivenunder one or more of theseconditions:− In heavy city traffic where the

outside temperature regularlyreaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer

towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police,

or delivery service.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill coolingsystem. This service can becomplex; you should have yourdealer/retailer perform this service.See Engine Coolant on page 5-19 forwhat to use. Inspect hoses. Cleanradiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test thecooling system and pressure cap.

(j) Check system for interferenceor binding and for damaged ormissing parts. Replace partsas needed. Replace any

components that have high effort orexcessive wear. Do not lubricateaccelerator or cruise control cables.

(k) Visually inspect belt for fraying,excessive cracks, or obviousdamage. Replace belt if necessary.

(l) If driving regularly under dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

(m) Change transfer case fluid if thevehicle is mainly driven underone or more of these conditions:− In heavy city traffic where

the outside temperature regularlyreaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer

towing.− Uses such as found in taxi,

police, or delivery service.


Owner Checks andServicesThese owner checks and servicesshould be performed at the intervalsspecified to help ensure vehiclesafety, dependability, and emissioncontrol performance. Your dealer/retailer can assist with these checksand services.

Be sure any necessary repairs arecompleted at once. Whenever anyfluids or lubricants are added tothe vehicle, make sure they arethe proper ones, as shown inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-12.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform theseunderhood checks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level Check

Notice: It is important to checkthe engine oil regularly and keep itat the proper level. Failure to keepthe engine oil at the proper levelcan cause damage to the enginenot covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Check the engine oil level andadd the proper oil if necessary.See Engine Oil on page 5-13.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant leveland add DEX-COOL® coolantmixture if necessary. See EngineCoolant on page 5-19.

Windshield Washer FluidLevel CheckCheck the windshield washer fluidlevel in the windshield washer fluidreservoir and add the proper fluid ifnecessary.

At Least Once a MonthTire Inflation CheckInspect the vehicle’s tires and makesure they are inflated to thecorrect pressures. Do not forget tocheck the spare tire, if the vehiclehas one. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43. If thevehicle has a spare tire, check tomake sure it is stored securely.See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 5-66.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required forhigh mileage highway drivers prior tothe Engine Oil Life System servicenotification. Check the tires forwear and, if necessary, rotate thetires. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 5-50.


At Least Once a YearStarter Switch Check

{ CAUTION

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle could movesuddenly. If the vehicle moves,you or others could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake on page 2-27.Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer/retailer for service.

Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control System Check

{ CAUTION

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle could movesuddenly. If the vehicle moves,you or others could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 2-27.Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition to ON/RUN, but do notstart the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer/retailer for service.

Ignition Transmission LockCheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn toLOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

• The ignition key should come outonly in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer/retailer ifservice is required.


Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ CAUTION

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

• To check the P (Park)mechanism’s holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer/retailer ifservice is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain waterto flush any corrosive materials fromthe underbody. Take care to cleanthoroughly any areas where mudand other debris can collect.

Tire Sealant andCompressor KitIf the vehicle has a Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit, check the sealantexpiration date printed on theinstruction label of the kit at leastonce a year. See your dealer/retailerfor a replacement canister.


Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays theAmerican Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburstsymbol. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle’s engine,see Engine Oil on page 5-13.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 5-19.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806,in Canada 88862807).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.


Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Carrier Assembly — Differential(Rear Drive Module) and Transfer

Case (Power Transfer Unit)

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,in Canada 89021678) meeting GM Specification 9986115.

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door Hinges andRear Folding Seat

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).


Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 —

Engine Oil Filter 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs 12611882 41-107

Wiper Blades

Driver – 24.6 in (62.5 cm) 15254805 —

Passenger – 20.8 in (53.0 cm) 15254804 —

Rear – 11.6 in (30.0 cm) 15276259 —


Engine Drive BeltRouting3.6L V6 Engine


Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-1. Any additionalinformation from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You shouldretain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed


Maintenance Record (cont’d)




CustomerAssistanceInformation

Customer Assistance andInformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure ...........................7-1

Online Owner Center .............7-3Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users .................................7-4

Customer Assistance Offices ....7-5GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram .............................7-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram .............................7-6

Scheduling ServiceAppointments ......................7-8

Courtesy Transportation .........7-9Collision Damage Repair ......7-10

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment ......................7-14

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian Government ....7-14

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors ..................7-14

Service PublicationsOrdering Information ...........7-15

Vehicle Data Recordingand PrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy .............................7-16

Event Data Recorders ..........7-16OnStar® .............................7-17Navigation System ...............7-17Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) ............7-17

Customer Assistanceand Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and to GMC.Normally, any concerns with thesales transaction or the operationof the vehicle will be resolvedby the dealer’s sales or servicedepartments. Sometimes, however,despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings canoccur. If your concern has not beenresolved to your satisfaction, thefollowing steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service orparts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the generalmanager.

Customer Assistance Information 7-1

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call the GMCConsumer Relations Manager at1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782,Customer Assistance prompt).In Canada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Communicationat 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer AssistanceRepresentative:

• Vehicle Identification Number(VIN). This is available from thevehicle registration or title, or theplate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

• Dealership name and location.• Vehicle delivery date and present

mileage.

When contacting GMC, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer’s facility.That is why we suggest followingStep One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and your dealerare committed to making sure youare completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, if youcontinue to remain unsatisfied afterfollowing the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two, you can file withthe Better Business Bureau (BBB)Auto Line Program to enforce yourrights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout of court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofilling out a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and your

case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, you mayreject it and proceed with any othervenue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-free telephonenumber or write them at the followingaddress:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reserves theright to change eligibility limitationsand/or discontinue its participationin this program.

7-2 Customer Assistance Information

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware ofits participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides for thereview of the facts involved by animpartial third party arbiter, and mayinclude an informal hearing beforethe arbiter. The program is designedso that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you fileyour complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors CustomerCommunication Centre,1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Online Owner CenterOnline Owner Center (U.S.) —www.gmownercenter.com/gmcInformation and services customizedfor your specific vehicle — all inone convenient place.

• Digital owner manual, warrantyinformation, and more

• Online service and maintenancerecords

• Find GMC dealers for servicenationwide

• Exclusive privileges and offers

• Recall notices for your specificvehicle

• OnStar® and GM CardmemberServices Earnings summaries


Other Helpful Links:

GMC — www.gmc.com

GMC Merchandise —www.gmccollection.com

Help Center —www.gmc.com/helpcenter

• FAQ

• Contact Us

My GM Canada(Canada) — www.gm.caMy GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable toolsand services you will have access to:

• My Showroom: Find and saveinformation on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

• My Dealers/Retailers: Savedetails such as address andphone number for each of yourpreferred GM dealers/retailers.

• My Driveway: Access quick linksto parts and service estimates,check trade-in values, or schedulea service appointment by addingthe vehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

• My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM Canadasection within www.gm.ca.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use the Text Telephones(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user cancommunicate with GMC by dialing:1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583).(TTY users in Canada can dial1-800-263-3830.)


Customer AssistanceOfficesGMC encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishesto write or e-mail GMC, the lettershould be addressed to:

United StatesGMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.GMC.com1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583)(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)

From Puerto Rico1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994

CanadaGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

All Overseas LocationsPlease contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico andU.S. Virgin Islands)General Motors de Mexico,S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program, available to qualifiedapplicants, can reimburse you upto $1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for your vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.


The offer is available for a verylimited period of time from the dateof vehicle purchase/lease. For moredetails, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or callthe GM Mobility Assistance Center at1-800-323-9935. Text telephone(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada alsohas a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S. purchased vehicles, call1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782);(Text telephone (TTY):1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for AssistanceWhen calling Roadside Assistance,have the following information ready:

• Your name, home address, andhome telephone number

• Telephone number of yourlocation

• Location of the vehicle

• Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

• Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

CoverageServices are provided up to5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner isnot covered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.GMC and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

GMC and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, orthe same type of claim is mademany times.


Services Provided• Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

• Lock-Out Service: Service isprovided to unlock the vehicle ifyou are locked out. A remoteunlock may be available if youhave OnStar®. For securityreasons, the driver must presentidentification before this serviceis given.

• Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest GMC dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was ina crash and cannot be driven.Assistance is also given when thevehicle is stuck in the sand, mud,or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Service isprovided to change a flat tirewith the spare tire. The spare tire,if equipped, must be in goodcondition and properly inflated.It is the owner’s responsibility forthe repair or replacement of thetire if it is not covered by thewarranty.

• Battery Jump Start: Service isprovided to jump start a deadbattery.

• Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. Additionaltravel information is alsoavailable. Allow three weeksfor delivery.

• Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expensesmay be reimbursed duringthe 5 years/100,000 miles(160 000 km) Powertrain warrantyperiod. Items considered arehotel, meals, and rental car.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance• Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.

• Legal fines.

• Mounting, dismounting orchanging of snow tires, chains,or other traction devices.

• Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.


Services Specific to CanadianPurchased Vehicles• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

• Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

• Trip Routing Service: Limit ofsix requests per year.

• Trip Interruption Benefitsand Assistance: Must be over250 kilometres from where yourtrip was started to qualify. GeneralMotors of Canada Limitedrequires pre-authorization,original detailed receipts, anda copy of the repair orders.

Once authorization has beenreceived, the RoadsideAssistance advisor will help youmake arrangements and explainhow to receive payment.

• Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may give youpermission to get local emergencyroad service. You will receivepayment, up to $100, aftersending the original receipt toRoadside Assistance. Mechanicalfailures may be covered, howeverany cost for parts and labor forrepairs not covered by thewarranty are the ownerresponsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer/retailerand request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer/retailer can help minimizeyour inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it untilit can be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please call yourdealership/retailer, let them knowthis, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer/retailer requests you tobring the vehicle for service, youare urged to do so as early inthe work day as possible to allowfor the same day repair.


Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with the Bumperto Bumper (Base Warranty Coverageperiod in Canada) and extendedpowertrain, and hybrid specificwarranty in both the U.S. andCanada.

Several courtesy transportationoptions are available to assistin reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a partof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.A separate booklet entitled “Warrantyand Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideyou with shuttle service to get youto your destination with minimalinterruption of your daily schedule.This includes one-way or round tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters of thedealer’s area.

Public Transportation orFuel Reimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofthe dealer’s shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only beup to the maximum amount allowedby GM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation througha friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonablefuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.


Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card,etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike-vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformationAll program options, such asshuttle service, may not be availableat every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the rightto unilaterally modify, change ordiscontinue Courtesy Transportationat any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuantto the terms and conditionsdescribed herein at its solediscretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, havethe damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collisionparts are your best choice to ensurethat your vehicle’s designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain your GMNew Vehicle Warranty.


Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart, may be an acceptable choice tomaintain your vehicle’s originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts arealso available. These are madeby companies other than GM andmay not have been tested for yourvehicle. As a result, these partsmay fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems,and may not perform properly in

subsequent collisions. Aftermarketparts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, andany vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by thatwarranty.

Repair FacilityWe recommend that you choose acollision repair facility that meetsyour needs before you ever needcollision repairs. Your dealer/retailermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate of the art equipment, or be ableto recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.

Many insurance policies providereduced protection to your GMvehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you assure yourvehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your current insurancecarrier, consider switching to anotherinsurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that assures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.


If a Crash OccursHere is what to do if you areinvolved in a crash.

• Check to make sure that you areall right. If you are uninjured,make sure that no one else inyour vehicle, or the other vehicle,is injured.

• If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help.Do not leave the scene of a crashuntil all matters have been takencare of. Move your vehicle only ifits position puts you in danger oryou are instructed to move it by apolice officer.

• Give only the necessary andrequested information to policeand other parties involved in thecrash. Do not discuss yourpersonal condition, mental frameof mind, or anything unrelated tothe crash. This will help guardagainst post-crash legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance,call GM Roadside Assistance.See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 7-6 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven,know where the towing servicewill be taking it. Get a card fromthe tow truck operator or writedown the driver’s name, theservice’s name, and the phonenumber.

• Remove any valuables from yourvehicle before it is towed away.Make sure this includes yourinsurance information andregistration if you keep theseitems in your vehicle.

• Gather the important informationyou will need from the otherdriver. Things like name, address,phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate,vehicle make, model and modelyear, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurancecompany and policy number, anda general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurancecompany from the scene of thecrash. They will walk you throughthe information they will need.If they ask for a police report,phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the nextday and you can get a copy of thereport for a nominal fee. In somestates/provinces with “no fault”insurance laws, a report may notbe necessary. This is especiallytrue if there are no injuries andboth vehicles are driveable.


• Choose a reputable collisionrepair facility for your vehicle.Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a private collision repairfacility to fix the damage, makesure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have tofeel comfortable with their work fora long time.

• Once you have an estimate, readit carefully and make sure youunderstand what work will beperformed on your vehicle. If youhave a question, ask for anexplanation. Reputable shopswelcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehiclerequires damage repairs, GMrecommends that you take anactive role in its repair. If you have apre-determined repair facility ofchoice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to thefacility that any required replacementcollision parts be original equipmentparts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts.Remember, recycled parts will notbe covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for therepair, but you must live with therepair. Depending on yourpolicy limits, your insurancecompany may initially value therepair using aftermarket parts.

Discuss this with your repairprofessional, and insist on GenuineGM parts. Remember if your vehicleis leased you may be obligated tohave the vehicle repaired withGenuine GM parts, even if yourinsurance coverage does not paythe full cost.

If another party’s insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accepta repair valuation based onthat insurance company’s collisionpolicy repair limits, as you haveno contractual limits with thatcompany. In such cases, you canhave control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stayswithin reasonable limits.


Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSAreceives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer/retailer, orGeneral Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tosafercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington D.C., 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that your vehicle hasa safety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, in addition tonotifying General Motors ofCanada Limited. Call them at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, please notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7


Service PublicationsOrdering InformationService ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on engines,transmission, axle suspension,brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give additionaltechnical service information neededto knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletincontains instructions to assist inthe diagnosis and service of yourvehicle.

Owner InformationOwner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle.The owner manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Current and Past ModelOrder FormsTechnical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, specifyyear and model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. on the World WideWeb at: helminc.com

Or you can write to:


Prices are subject to changewithout notice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: Alllisted prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Canadian residents are tomake checks payable in U.S. funds.


Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, your vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deployment anddeploy airbags in a crash and, if soequipped, to provide antilock brakingto help the driver control the vehicle.These modules may store data tohelp your dealer/retailer technicianservice your vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how avehicle’s systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:

• How various systems in yourvehicle were operating

• Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened

• How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal

• How fast the vehicle was traveling

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type of personallyidentifying data routinely acquiredduring a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required,and access to the vehicle or theEDR is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer, otherparties, such as law enforcement,that have the special equipment, canread the information if they haveaccess to the vehicle or the EDR.


GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: withthe consent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in response toan official request of police or similargovernment office; as part of GM’sdefense of litigation through thediscovery process; or, as requiredby law. Data that GM collects orreceives may also be used for GMresearch needs or may be madeavailable to others for researchpurposes, where a need is shownand the data is not tied to a specificvehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If your vehicle has OnStar and yousubscribe to the OnStar services,please refer to the OnStar Terms andConditions for information on datacollection and use. See also OnStar®

System on page 2-41 in this manualfor more information.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation system operating manualfor information on stored data and fordeletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, and in-vehicletransmitters for garage door openers.RFID technology in GM vehiclesdoes not use or record personalinformation or link with any otherGM system containing personalinformation.


✍ NOTES


AAccessories and

Modifications ...................... 5-3Accessory Power ................. 2-21Accessory Power Outlets ...... 3-20Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-62Additional Required Services,

Scheduled Maintenance ....... 6-6Additives, Fuel ...................... 5-6Add-On Electrical

Equipment ....................... 5-88Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ....... 5-17Air Conditioning ................... 3-22Airbag

Readiness Light ................ 3-36Airbag System ..................... 1-50

Adding Equipment toYour Airbag-EquippedVehicle ........................ 1-62

How Does an AirbagRestrain? ..................... 1-55

Passenger SensingSystem ........................ 1-57

Servicing YourAirbag-EquippedVehicle ........................ 1-61

Airbag System (cont.)What Makes an Airbag

Inflate? ........................ 1-55What Will You See After

an Airbag Inflates? ........ 1-56When Should an Airbag

Inflate? ........................ 1-53Where Are the Airbags? ..... 1-52

AirbagsPassenger Status

Indicator ....................... 3-36All-Wheel Drive .................... 5-35All-Wheel-Drive (AWD)

System ............................. 4-7Antilock Brake System (ABS) ... 4-4

Warning Light ................... 3-39Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-PlatedWheels ........................ 5-85

Care of Safety Belts .......... 5-82Chemical Paint Spotting ..... 5-86Cleaning Exterior

Lamps/Lenses ............... 5-83Fabric/Carpet ................... 5-81Finish Care ...................... 5-84Finish Damage ................. 5-86Instrument Panel, Vinyl,

and Other PlasticSurfaces ...................... 5-82

Appearance Care (cont.)Interior Cleaning ............... 5-80Leather ........................... 5-82Sheet Metal Damage ........ 5-86Tires ............................... 5-85Underbody Maintenance .... 5-86Washing Your Vehicle ........ 5-83Weatherstrips ................... 5-83Windshield, Backglass,

and Wiper Blades .......... 5-84Assistance Program,

Roadside .......................... 7-6Audio System ...................... 3-76

Audio Steering WheelControls ..................... 3-128

Navigation/Radio System,see NavigationManual ....................... 3-105

Rear AudioController (RAC) .......... 3-127

Setting the Clock .............. 3-76Audio System(s) .................. 3-77Audio Systems

Radio Reception ............. 3-128Rear Seat (RSA) ............. 3-125Theft-Deterrent Feature .... 3-127

Automatic TransmissionFluid ............................... 5-18Operation ........................ 2-24

INDEX i-1

BBattery ............................... 5-30

Electric PowerManagement ................. 3-15

Run-Down Protection ......... 3-16Belt Routing, Engine ............. 6-15Bluetooth® ......................... 3-105Brake

Emergencies ...................... 4-5Brake Fluid ......................... 5-27Brakes ............................... 5-27

Antilock ............................. 4-4Parking ........................... 2-27System Warning Light ....... 3-38

Braking ................................ 4-3Braking in Emergencies .......... 4-5Break-In, New Vehicle .......... 2-20Bulb Replacement ................ 5-36

Fog Lamp ........................ 3-13Halogen Bulbs .................. 5-35Headlamp Aiming .............. 5-35Headlamps ...................... 5-35License Plate Lamps ......... 5-36

Buying New Tires ................. 5-52

CCalibration .......................... 3-56California

Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements ................. 5-4

California Fuel ....................... 5-6California Proposition

65 Warning ........................ 5-4Camera, Rear Vision ............ 2-37Canadian Owners ..................... iiCapacities and

Specifications ................... 5-94Carbon Monoxide ................. 2-11

Engine Exhaust ................ 2-30Liftgate ............................ 2-10Winter Driving .................. 4-13

Care ofSafety Belts ..................... 5-82

CargoTie Downs ....................... 2-52

Cargo Cover ....................... 2-52Cargo Management System ... 2-52CD, MP3 .................... 3-94, 3-99

Center Console Storage ........ 2-50Chains, Tire ........................ 5-56Charging System Light .......... 3-37Check

Engine Lamp ................... 3-42Checking Things Under

the Hood ......................... 5-10Chemical Paint Spotting ........ 5-86Child Restraints

Infants and YoungChildren ....................... 1-32

Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children .................. 1-38

Older Children .................. 1-30Securing a Child Restraint

in a Rear Seat Position .... 1-45Securing a Child Restraint

in the Right Front SeatPosition ....................... 1-47

Systems .......................... 1-35Where to Put the

Restraint ...................... 1-36Circuit Breakers ................... 5-88

i-2 INDEX

CleaningAluminum or Chrome-Plated

Wheels ........................ 5-85Exterior Lamps/Lenses ...... 5-83Fabric/Carpet ................... 5-81Finish Care ...................... 5-84Instrument Panel, Vinyl,

and Other PlasticSurfaces ...................... 5-82

Interior ............................ 5-80Leather ........................... 5-82Tires ............................... 5-85Underbody Maintenance .... 5-86Washing Your Vehicle ........ 5-83Weatherstrips ................... 5-83Windshield, Backglass,

and Wiper Blades .......... 5-84Climate Control System ......... 3-22

Outlet Adjustment ............. 3-30Rear Air Conditioning and

Heating System ............. 3-31Rear Air Conditioning

and Heating System,Electronic ..................... 3-32

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic ................. 3-25

Clock, Setting ...................... 3-76Collision Damage Repair ....... 7-10Compact Spare Tire ............. 5-79

Compass ............................ 3-56Compressor Kit,

Tire Sealant ...................... 5-58Content Theft-Deterrent ......... 2-16Control of a Vehicle ............... 4-3Convenience Net ................. 2-52Coolant

Engine ............................ 5-19Engine

Temperature Gage ......... 3-41Engine Temperature

Warning Light ............... 3-40Cooled Seats ........................ 1-6Cooling System ................... 5-19Courtesy Lamps ................... 3-13Courtesy Transportation .......... 7-9Cruise Control ....................... 3-9Cruise Control Light .............. 3-45Cupholders ......................... 2-49Customer Assistance .............. 7-4

Offices .............................. 7-5Text Telephone (TTY)

Users ............................ 7-4Customer Information

Service PublicationsOrdering Information ...... 7-15

Customer SatisfactionProcedure ......................... 7-1

DDamage Repair, Collision ...... 7-10Data Recorders

Event .............................. 7-16Daytime Running Lamps/

Automatic HeadlampSystem ........................... 3-12

Defensive Driving ................... 4-2Delayed Entry Lighting .......... 3-14Delayed Exit Lighting ............ 3-15Delayed Headlamps ............. 3-12Delayed Locking .................... 2-8DIC Compass ...................... 3-56Disc, MP3 ................... 3-94, 3-99Displays

Head-Up ......................... 3-16Doing Your Own

Service Work ..................... 5-4Dome Lamp Override ........... 3-14Dome Lamps ....................... 3-14Door

Delayed Locking ................. 2-8Locks ............................... 2-8Power Door Locks .............. 2-8Programmable Automatic

Door Locks .................... 2-9Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-9

INDEX i-3

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive ................ 5-35

DriverSeat Height Adjuster ........... 1-3

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) .................... 3-47DIC Operation and

Displays ............... 3-47, 3-53DIC Vehicle

Customization ............... 3-67DIC Warnings and

Messages .................... 3-58Driving

At Night .......................... 4-11Before a Long Trip ............ 4-12Defensive .......................... 4-2Drunk ............................... 4-2Highway Hypnosis ............ 4-12Hill and Mountain Roads .... 4-13In Rain and on

Wet Roads ................... 4-11Loss of Control ................ 4-10Off-Road Recovery ............. 4-9Rocking Your Vehicle to

Get it Out .................... 4-16Winter ............................. 4-13

Driving for Better FuelEconomy ........................... 4-1

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System ................. 3-25

DVDRear Seat Entertainment

System ...................... 3-116

EEDR .................................. 7-16Electrical Equipment

Add-On Equipment ............ 5-88Electrical System

Fuses and CircuitBreakers ...................... 5-88

Instrument Panel FuseBlock ........................... 5-88

Power Windows and OtherPower Options .............. 5-88

Underhood Fuse Block ...... 5-90Windshield Wiper Fuses .... 5-88

Electronic ImmobilizerPASS-Key® III+ ................ 2-17

Electronic ImmobilizerOperationPASS-Key® III+ ................ 2-18

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ............... 5-17Check and Service Engine

Soon Lamp .................. 3-42Compartment Overview ...... 5-12Coolant ........................... 5-19Coolant Heater ................. 2-23Coolant

Temperature Gage ......... 3-41Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ............... 3-40Cooling System ................ 5-19Drive Belt Routing ............. 6-15Exhaust ........................... 2-30Oil .................................. 5-13Oil Life System ................. 5-15Overheated Protection

Operating Mode ............ 5-25Overheating ..................... 5-24Starting ........................... 2-22

Entry Lighting ...................... 3-14Event Data Recorders .......... 7-16Extender, Safety Belt ............ 1-29Exterior Lamps .................... 3-11

i-4 INDEX

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ............ 5-17Finish Damage .................... 5-86Flashers, Hazard Warning ....... 3-5Flash-to-Pass ........................ 3-7Flat Tire .............................. 5-57Flat Tire, Changing ............... 5-66Flat Tire, Storing .................. 5-76Floor Mats .......................... 2-51Fluid

Automatic Transmission ..... 5-18Power Steering ................. 5-26Windshield Washer ........... 5-26

Fog LampFog ................................ 3-13

Fog Lamp Light ................... 3-45Fuel ..................................... 5-5

Additives ........................... 5-6California Fuel ................... 5-6Economy Driving ................ 4-1Filling a Portable Fuel

Container ..................... 5-10Filling the Tank .................. 5-8Fuels in Foreign Countries ... 5-7

Fuel (cont.)Gage .............................. 3-46Gasoline Octane ................ 5-5Gasoline Specifications ........ 5-5

FusesFuses and Circuit

Breakers ...................... 5-88Instrument Panel

Fuse Block ................... 5-88Underhood Fuse Block ...... 5-90Windshield Wiper .............. 5-88

GGage

Speedometer ................... 3-35Tachometer ...................... 3-35Voltmeter Gage ................ 3-38

GagesEngine Coolant

Temperature ................. 3-41Fuel ................................ 3-46

Garage Door Opener ............ 2-45Gasoline

Octane ............................. 5-5Specifications ..................... 5-5

Glove Box ........................... 2-49GM Mobility Reimbursement

Program ............................ 7-5

HHalogen Bulbs ..................... 5-35Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 3-5Head Restraints ..................... 1-2Headlamp

Aiming ............................ 5-35Headlamps

Bulb Replacement ............. 5-35Daytime Running Lamps/

Automatic HeadlampSystem ........................ 3-12

Delayed .......................... 3-12Exterior Lamps ................. 3-11Flash-to-Pass ..................... 3-7High/Low Beam Changer ..... 3-7

Head-Up Display (HUD) ........ 3-16Heated Seats ................. 1-5, 1-6Heater ................................ 3-22

Engine Coolant ................. 2-23Height Adjuster, Driver Seat .... 1-3High Voltage Devices and

Wiring ............................. 5-87Highbeam On Light .............. 3-46Highway Hypnosis ................ 4-12Hill and Mountain Roads ....... 4-13

INDEX i-5

HoodChecking Things Under ..... 5-10Release .......................... 5-11

Horn .................................... 3-5How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly .......................... 1-19

IIgnition Positions .................. 2-20Infants and Young Children,

Restraints ........................ 1-32Inflation - Tire Pressure ......... 5-43Instrument Panel

Brightness ....................... 3-13Cluster ............................ 3-34Overview ........................... 3-4Storage Area .................... 2-49

Introduction ........................... 6-1

JJump Starting ...................... 5-30

KKeyless Entry, Remote

Operation .......................... 2-4Keyless Entry System ............ 2-3Keys .................................... 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall .......... 5-38Lamp

Malfunction Indicator ......... 3-42Lamps

Courtesy ......................... 3-13Dome ............................. 3-14Dome Lamp Override ........ 3-14License Plate ................... 5-36Reading .......................... 3-15

Lap-Shoulder Belt ................ 1-24LATCH System for Child

Restraints ........................ 1-38Liftgate

Carbon Monoxide ............. 2-10Liftgate, Power .................... 2-11Lighting

Delayed Entry .................. 3-14Delayed Exit .................... 3-15Entry .............................. 3-14Parade Dimming ............... 3-15

LightsAirbag Readiness ............. 3-36Antilock Brake System

(ABS) Warning .............. 3-39Brake System Warning ...... 3-38Charging System .............. 3-37

Lights (cont.)Cruise Control .................. 3-45Engine Coolant

Temperature Warning ..... 3-40Exterior Lamps ................. 3-11Flash-to-Pass ..................... 3-7Fog Lamp ........................ 3-45Highbeam On ................... 3-46High/Low Beam Changer ..... 3-7Oil Pressure ..................... 3-44Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator ....................... 3-36Safety Belt Reminders ....... 3-35Security ........................... 3-45StabiliTrak® Indicator ......... 3-40Tire Pressure ................... 3-41Tow/Haul Mode ................ 3-46

Loading Your Vehicle ............ 4-16Locks

Delayed Locking ................. 2-8Door ................................. 2-8Lockout Protection .............. 2-9Power Door ....................... 2-8Programmable Automatic

Door Locks .................... 2-9Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-9

Loss of Control .................... 4-10

i-6 INDEX

Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children ...................... 1-38

Luggage Carrier ................... 2-51Lumbar

Manual Controls ................. 1-4Power Controls .................. 1-5

MMaintenance

Footnotes .......................... 6-7Maintenance Schedule

Additional RequiredServices ........................ 6-6

At Each Fuel Fill ................ 6-9At Least Once a Month ....... 6-9At Least Once a Year ....... 6-10Maintenance Record ......... 6-16Maintenance Replacement

Parts ........................... 6-14Maintenance Requirements ... 6-1Owner Checks and

Services ........................ 6-9Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants .................... 6-12Scheduled Maintenance ....... 6-3Using ............................... 6-2Your Vehicle and the

Environment ................... 6-1

Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 3-42Manual Lumbar Controls ......... 1-4Manual Seats ........................ 1-3Memory Seat and Mirrors ....... 1-6Message

DIC Warnings andMessages .................... 3-58

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming

Rearview ...................... 2-31Manual Rearview Mirror ..... 2-31Outside Convex Mirror ....... 2-34Outside Heated Mirrors ...... 2-34Outside Power Foldaway

Mirrors ......................... 2-33Outside Power Mirrors ....... 2-32Park Tilt .......................... 2-34

MP3 ........................... 3-94, 3-99

NNavigation System, Privacy ... 7-17Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual .... 3-105Net

Convenience .................... 2-52New Vehicle Break-In ........... 2-20

OOdometer ........................... 3-35Off-Road

Recovery .......................... 4-9Oil

Engine ............................ 5-13Engine Oil Life System ...... 5-15Pressure Light .................. 3-44

Older Children, Restraints ...... 1-30Online Owner Center .............. 7-3OnStar, Privacy .................... 7-17OnStar® System, see

OnStar® Manual ............... 2-41Operation, Universal Home

Remote System ................ 2-45Outlet Adjustment ................. 3-30Outlets

Accessory Power .............. 3-20Outside

Convex Mirror .................. 2-34Heated Mirrors ................. 2-34Power Foldaway Mirrors .... 2-33Power Mirrors .................. 2-32

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ................ 5-25

Owner Checks and Services ... 6-9Owners, Canadian .................... ii

INDEX i-7

PPaint, Damage ..................... 5-86Parade Dimming .................. 3-15Park

Shifting Into ..................... 2-28Shifting Out of .................. 2-29

Park Aid ............................. 2-34Park Tilt Mirrors ................... 2-34Parking

Assist ............................. 2-34Over Things That Burn ...... 2-29

Parking Brake ...................... 2-27Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator .......................... 3-36Passenger Sensing System ... 1-57Passing ................................ 4-9PASS-Key® III+ Electronic

Immobilizer ...................... 2-17PASS-Key® III+ Electronic

Immobilizer Operation ........ 2-18Perchlorate Materials

Requirements, California ...... 5-4Phone

Bluetooth® ..................... 3-105

PowerDoor Locks ........................ 2-8Electrical System .............. 5-88Liftgate ............................ 2-11Lumbar Controls ................. 1-5Outlet 115 Volt Alternating

Current ........................ 3-21Retained

Accessory (RAP) ........... 2-21Seat ................................. 1-4Steering Fluid ................... 5-26Windows ......................... 2-14

Pregnancy, UsingSafety Belts ..................... 1-29

Privacy ............................... 7-16Navigation System ............ 7-17OnStar ............................ 7-17Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID) ....... 7-17Programmable Automatic

Door Locks ........................ 2-9Proposition 65 Warning,

California .......................... 5-4

RRadio Frequency Identification

(RFID), Privacy ................. 7-17Radio(s) ............................. 3-77Radios

Navigation/Radio System,see NavigationManual ....................... 3-105

Rear AudioController (RAC) .......... 3-127

Reception ...................... 3-128Setting the Clock .............. 3-76Theft-Deterrent ............... 3-127

Reading Lamps ................... 3-15Rear Air Conditioning and

Heating System ................ 3-31Rear Air Conditioning and

Heating System andElectronic ClimateControls .......................... 3-32

Rear AudioController (RAC) ............. 3-127

Rear Door Security Locks ....... 2-9

i-8 INDEX

Rear Seat Armrest ............... 2-52Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

System .......................... 3-125Rear Seat Entertainment

System .......................... 3-116Rear Seat Operation ............ 1-10Rear Vision Camera (RVC) .... 2-37Rear Window Washer/Wiper .... 3-9Rearview Mirror, Automatic

Dimming .......................... 2-31Rearview Mirrors .................. 2-31Reclining Seatbacks ............... 1-8Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ........................ 6-12Recreational Vehicle Towing ... 4-21Reimbursement Program,

GM Mobility ....................... 7-5Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System ............................. 2-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System, Operation .............. 2-4Remote Vehicle Start ............. 2-6Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire ..... 5-70Removing the Spare

Tire and Tools .................. 5-67

Replacement Bulbs .............. 5-36Replacement Parts,

Maintenance .................... 6-14Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ....... 7-14General Motors ................ 7-14

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernment ..................... 7-14

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernment ..................... 7-14

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint

Systems ....................... 1-63Replacing Restraint System

Parts After a Crash ........ 1-64Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) .................... 2-21Roadside Assistance

Program ............................ 7-6Rocking Your Vehicle to

Get it Out ........................ 4-16Roof

Sunroof ........................... 2-54Running the Vehicle While

Parked ............................ 2-30

SSafety Belt Reminders .......... 3-35Safety Belts

Care of ........................... 5-82Extender ......................... 1-29How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly ....................... 1-19Lap-Shoulder Belt ............. 1-24Safety Belts Are for

Everyone ..................... 1-15Use During Pregnancy ...... 1-29

Safety DefectsReporting to

General Motors ............. 7-14Reporting to the United

States Government ........ 7-14Safety Warnings and Symbols .... iiiScheduled Maintenance .......... 6-3

Additional RequiredServices ........................ 6-6

Scheduling Appointments ........ 7-8Sealant Kit, Tire ................... 5-58

INDEX i-9

SeatsDriver Seat Height

Adjuster ......................... 1-3Head Restraints ................. 1-2Heated and Cooled Seats .... 1-6Heated Seats ..................... 1-5Manual Lumbar .................. 1-4Memory, Mirrors ................. 1-6Power Lumbar ................... 1-5Power Seats ...................... 1-4Rear Seat Operation ......... 1-10Reclining Seatbacks ............ 1-8Third Row Seat ................ 1-12

Second Row CenterConsole .......................... 2-50

Secondary Latch System ....... 5-74Securing a Child Restraint

Rear Seat Position ............ 1-45Right Front Seat Position ... 1-47

Security Light ...................... 3-45Service ................................ 5-3

Accessories andModifications .................. 5-3

Adding Equipment to theOutside of the Vehicle ..... 5-5

Doing Your Own Work ........ 5-4

Service (cont.)Engine Soon Lamp ........... 3-42Publications Ordering

Information ................... 7-15Scheduling Appointments ..... 7-8

Service Parts IdentificationLabel .............................. 5-87

Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-61

Setting the Clock ................. 3-76Sheet Metal Damage ............ 5-86Shifting

Out of Park ..................... 2-29Shifting Into Park ................. 2-28Signals, Turn and

Lane-Change ..................... 3-6Spare Tire

Compact ......................... 5-79Installing .......................... 5-70Removing ........................ 5-67Storing ............................ 5-76

Specifications andCapacities ....................... 5-94

Speedometer ....................... 3-35StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ..... 3-40StabiliTrak® System ............... 4-5

Start Vehicle, Remote ............. 2-6Starting the Engine .............. 2-22Steering ............................... 4-8Steering Wheel Controls,

Audio ............................ 3-128Steering Wheel,

Tilt and Telescopic .............. 3-6Storage Areas

Cargo ManagementSystem ........................ 2-52

Center Console ................ 2-50Convenience Net .............. 2-52Cupholders ...................... 2-49Glove Box ....................... 2-49Instrument Panel .............. 2-49Luggage Carrier ............... 2-51Rear Seat Armrest ............ 2-52Second Row Center

Console ....................... 2-50Storing the Tire Sealant and

Compressor Kit ................ 5-66Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,

or Snow .......................... 4-15Sun Visors .......................... 2-16Sunroof .............................. 2-54

i-10 INDEX

TTachometer ......................... 3-35Telescopic Wheel ................... 3-6Text Telephone (TTY) Users .... 7-4Theft-Deterrent Feature ....... 3-127Theft-Deterrent Systems ........ 2-16

Content Theft-Deterrent ..... 2-16PASS-Key® III+ Electronic

Immobilizer ................... 2-17PASS-Key® III+ Electronic

Immobilizer Operation .... 2-18Third-Row Seats .................. 1-12Tilt Wheel ............................. 3-6Time, Setting ....................... 3-76Tire

Pressure Light .................. 3-41Tire Sealant and

Compressor Kit ................ 5-66Tires .................................. 5-37

Aluminum orChrome-Plated Wheels,Cleaning ...................... 5-85

Buying New Tires ............. 5-52Chains ............................ 5-56Changing a Flat Tire ......... 5-66Cleaning .......................... 5-85Compact Spare ................ 5-79

Tires (cont.)Different Size ................... 5-53If a Tire Goes Flat ............ 5-57Inflation - Tire Pressure ..... 5-43Inspection and Rotation ..... 5-50Installing the Spare Tire ..... 5-70Pressure Monitor

Operation ..................... 5-46Pressure Monitor System .... 5-44Removing the Flat Tire ...... 5-70Removing the Spare

Tire and Tools ............... 5-67Sealant and

Compressor Kit ............. 5-58Secondary Latch System ... 5-74Sidewall Labeling .............. 5-38Storing a Flat or Spare

Tire and Tools ............... 5-76Terminology and

Definitions .................... 5-40Uniform Tire Quality

Grading ....................... 5-54Wheel Alignment and

Tire Balance ................. 5-55Wheel Replacement .......... 5-55When It Is Time for

New Tires .................... 5-51

Tow/Haul Mode .................... 2-26Tow/Haul Mode Light ............ 3-46Towing

Recreational Vehicle .......... 4-21Towing a Trailer ................ 4-24Your Vehicle ..................... 4-20

TractionStabiliTrak® System ............ 4-5

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ................ 5-18

Transmission Operation,Automatic ........................ 2-24

Transportation, Courtesy ......... 7-9Turn and Lane-Change

Signals ............................. 3-6Turn Signal/Multifunction

Lever ................................ 3-6

UUltrasonic Rear Parking

Assist (URPA) .................. 2-34Uniform Tire Quality

Grading ........................... 5-54Universal Home Remote

System ........................... 2-45Operation ........................ 2-45

INDEX i-11

VVehicle

Control ............................. 4-3Loading ........................... 4-16Running While Parked ....... 2-30Symbols .............................. iii

Vehicle Customization, DIC .... 3-67Vehicle Data Recording and

Privacy ............................ 7-16Vehicle Data Recording,

Radio Frequency (RFID) .... 7-17Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) ................... 5-87Service Parts Identification

Label ........................... 5-87Vehicle, Remote Start ............. 2-6Ventilation Adjustment ........... 3-30Visors ................................. 2-16Voltage Devices, and Wiring ... 5-87Voltmeter Gage .................... 3-38

WWarning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators ........................ 3-33Warnings

DIC Warnings andMessages .................... 3-58

Hazard Warning Flashers .... 3-5Safety and Symbols .............. iii

WheelsAlignment and

Tire Balance ................. 5-55Different Size ................... 5-53Replacement .................... 5-55

When It Is Time forNew Tires ........................ 5-51

Where to Put theChild Restraint ................. 1-36

Windows ............................. 2-14Power ............................. 2-14

WindshieldBackglass, and Wiper

Blades, Cleaning ........... 5-84Washer ............................. 3-8Washer Fluid .................... 5-26Wiper Blade

Replacement ................ 5-36Wiper Fuses .................... 5-88Wipers .............................. 3-7

Winter Driving ...................... 4-13Wipers

Rear Washer ..................... 3-9Wiring, High Voltage

Devices ........................... 5-87

XXM Radio Messages ........... 3-104

YYour Vehicle and the

Environment ...................... 6-1

i-12 INDEX

Overview ........................................................ 1-1Overview .................................................. 1-2

Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1Features and Controls ................................ 2-2

Navigation Audio System ................................ 3-1Navigation Audio System ............................ 3-2

Voice Recognition ........................................... 4-1Voice Recognition ...................................... 4-2

Index ................................................................ 1

2009 Acadia, Enclave, Equinox, Lucerne, OUTLOOK, Torrent,Traverse, VUE/VUE Two-Mode Hybrid Navigation M

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, BUICK, theBUICK Emblem, GMC and the GMC Truck Emblem,PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem, and the namesEQUINOX, LUCERNE and TORRENT are registeredtrademarks; the names ENCLAVE, TRAVERSE,and ACADIA are trademarks of General MotorsCorporation.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15910137 B Second Printing ©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

ii

SATURN, the SATURN Emblem and the name VUE andVUE Two-Mode Hybrid are registered trademarks; thename OUTLOOK is a trademark of Saturn Corporation.

DTS and DTS DigitalSurround are registeredtrademarks of DigitalTheater Systems, Inc.

Dolby® is manufactured under license from Dolby®

Laboratories. Dolby® and the double-D symbolare trademarks of Dolby® Laboratories.

The information in this manual supplements the ownermanual. This manual includes the latest informationavailable at the time it was printed. We reserve the rightto make changes in the product after that time withoutnotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute

the name General Motors of Canada Limited for BuickMotor Division, Chevrolet Motor Division, GMC, orPontiac Division whenever it appears in this manual.

Keep this manual with the owner manual in the vehicle,so it will be there if it is needed. If the vehicle is sold,leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer or from:



Propriétaires CanadiensOn peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en françaisauprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:



iii

✍ NOTES

iv

Overview .........................................................1-2Navigation System Overview ............................1-2

Getting Started ...............................................1-4Cleaning the Video Screen .............................1-12

Section 1 Overview

1-1

OverviewNavigation System Overview

Screen shown with Map Disc Inserted

1-2

A. Map DVD Slot. See “Installing the Map DVD” underMaps on page 2-4 for more information.

B. FULL MAP Touch Screen Button. See “NAV” under“Hard Keys” under Using the Navigation Systemon page 2-2 for more information.

C. No GPS Symbol. See Symbols on page 2-7 for moreinformation.

D. O (Power/Volume) Knob. See Navigation AudioSystem on page 3-2 for more information.

E. North Up/Heading Up Symbol. See Symbols onpage 2-7 for more information.

F. NAV (Navigation) Key. See “Hard Keys” under Usingthe Navigation System on page 2-2 for moreinformation.

G. DEST (Destination) Key. See Destination onpage 2-13 for more information.

H. RPT (Repeat) Key. See “Hard Keys” under Usingthe Navigation System on page 2-2 for moreinformation.

I. FAV (Favorite) Key. See “Storing Radio StationPresets” under Navigation Audio System on page 3-2for more information.

J. Map Scale. See “Map Scales” under Maps onpage 2-4 for more information.

K. 0 (Zoom In) Touch Screen Button. See “MapScales” under Maps on page 2-4 for moreinformation.

L. Mark Touch Screen Button. See “AddingDestinations to the Address Book” under Destinationon page 2-13 for more information.

M. CD/DVD Slot. See CD Player on page 3-10 or DVDPlayer on page 3-16 for more information.

N. Source (AM, FM, XM, CD, etc.) Touch ScreenButton. See Navigation Audio System on page 3-2for more information.

O. Z (CD/DVD Eject) Key. See “Hard Keys” underUsing the Navigation System on page 2-2 formore information.

P. Auxiliary Jack. See Auxiliary Devices on page 3-22for more information.

Q. Clock Touch Screen Button. See “Setting the Clock”under Configure Menu on page 2-27 for moreinformation.

R. f (Tune/Sound) Knob. See Navigation AudioSystem on page 3-2 for more information.

S. AUDIO Key. See Navigation Audio System onpage 3-2 for more information.

T. MENU Key. See Configure Menu on page 2-27 formore information.

1-3

U. ¨ SEEK Key (Next). See Navigation Audio Systemon page 3-2 for more information.

V. © SEEK Key (Previous). See Navigation AudioSystem on page 3-2 for more information.

W. 1 (Zoom Out) Touch Screen Button. See “MapScales” under Maps on page 2-4 for moreinformation.

X. POI (Point of Interest) Touch Screen Button. See“Displaying Points of Interest (POI) on the MapScreen” under Symbols on page 2-7 for moreinformation.

Getting StartedRead this manual thoroughly to become familiar withhow the navigation system operates.

The navigation system includes navigation and audiofunctions.

While entering the vehicle or when turning the vehicleoff, some DVD Map Disc noise is normal.

Keeping your eyes on the road and your mind on thedrive is important for safe driving. The navigation systemhas built-in features intended to help keep your eyeson the road and mind on the drive. Some features maybe disabled while driving. Note that these functionswill be grayed-out. A grayed-out function indicates it isnot available when the vehicle is moving.

All functions are available when the vehicle is parked.Do the following before driving:

• Become familiar with the navigation systemoperation, hard keys on the faceplate, andtouch-sensitive screen buttons of the navigationsystem.

• Set up the audio by presetting favorite stations,setting the tone, and adjusting the speakers.

• Set up the navigation features before beginningdriving, such as entering an address or a presetdestination.

• Set up your phone numbers in advance so they canbe called easily with the press of a single button ora single voice command (for navigation systemsequipped with phone capability).

{CAUTION:

Taking your eyes off the road too long or too oftenwhile using the navigation system could cause acrash resulting in injury or death to you or others.Focus your attention on driving.

1-4

{CAUTION:

Avoid looking too long or too often at the movingmap on the navigation screen. This could cause acrash and you or others can be injured or killed.Use the turn-by-turn voice guidance directionswhenever possible.

Use the navigation system to:

• Plan a route.

• Select a destination using various methods andchoices.

• Follow turn-by-turn route and map guidance withvoice prompts, only if permitted by traffic laws,controls, and conditions.

You should always be alert and obey traffic and roadwaylaws and instructions, regardless of the guidance from thenavigation system. Because the navigation system usesstreet map information that does not include all trafficrestrictions or the latest road changes, it may suggestusing a road that is now closed for construction or a turnthat is prohibited by signs at the intersection. Because the

system uses limited information, you must alwaysevaluate whether following the system’s directions is safeand legal for the current conditions.

When the navigation system is turned on, a screen mayappear with the information below, and you mustread and acknowledge the information it contains.

{CAUTION:

Taking your eyes off the road for extended periodscould cause a crash resulting in injury or death toyou or others.

To help avoid a crash in which you or others could bekilled:

• Always concentrate on your driving first by keepingyour eyes and mind on the road, and your handson the wheel.

• Follow system directions only if permitted by trafficlaws, controls, and conditions.

• Before using this system, read the owner’s manualand learn how it operates.

• Some system controls cannot be used the whenvehicle is moving.

1-5

After you acknowledge the start up information you willbe able to access the NAV (navigation) and DEST(destination) functions. Once accessed, you can enteror delete information in the navigation system or accessother functions. See instructions later in this section.

Every fifty times the vehicle is started and the navigationsystem is turned on, the Caution screen appears. Afterreading the caution, select OK to load the map DVDinformation. If OK is not selected, all hard keys exceptfor NAV (Navigation) and DEST (Destination) can beaccessed. You can also press the NAV hard key to havethis Caution screen appear.

When getting started, set the navigation system to yourpreference or delete information you may have enteredusing various options.

LanguageFor vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see“DIC Vehicle Customization” in the Index of thevehicle’s owner manual to change the language of thenavigation screens.

For vehicles without a Driver Information Center (DIC),the radio can be used to change the language ofthe navigation screens:

1. Press the O (power) knob to turn the system on.

2. Press the MENU hard key and select the Displayscreen button.

3. Select the language; English, Francais, Espanol.

English/Metric UnitsTo change the navigation screens from English ormetric, see “DIC Operation and Displays” in the Index ofthe vehicle’s owner manual.

1-6

Limit Features While DrivingThe navigation system may have this feature.

Touch the Limit Features While Driving screen button toturn on and off the ability to limit functions whiledriving. When this screen button is highlighted, thefollowing functions are limited while driving:

• Music Navigator Scrolling

• Radio Category Scrolling

• Navigation Menu Scrolling and some functions

See “Category” under Navigation Audio System onpage 3-2 for more information. See “From Map” underDestination on page 2-13 for more information.

Some functions remain limited regardless of the setting.

Deleting Personal InformationThis navigation system can record and store personalinformation such as names and addresses. It isrecommended that stored personal information isdeleted when disposing the vehicle. See “Edit AddressBook — Edit/View” under Configure Menu on page 2-27for deleting information from the address book.

Storing Radio Station PresetsTo set preset radio stations:

1. Press O to turn the system on.2. Press the AUDIO hard key and select the desired

band (AM, FM1, FM2, XM1, or XM2 (if equipped)).

3. Use the f (tune) knob or the SEEK arrows to go tothe desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the five preset screen buttons,at the bottom of the screen, until a beep is heard orsee the station displayed on the selected presetbutton.

5. Repeat the steps for each preset.

See “Storing Radio Station Presets” under NavigationAudio System on page 3-2 for more information.

Setting the Clock1. Press O to turn the system on.2. Press the MENU key to enter the configure menu

options, then press the MENU key repeatedly untilthe time is selected or select the time screen button.

3. Press the Set screen button.4. Press the Hours and Minutes − (minus) and + (plus)

signs to decrease or to increase the time.

See “Setting the Clock” under Configure Menu onpage 2-27 for more information.

1-7

Entering a Destination by UsingAddress, Point of Interest, PreviousDestination, or the Map Method andStoring Preset Destinations

Entering an AddressTo enter a destination by entering the city name first:1. If the radio is on with a map disc inserted, skip

to Step 5.2. Press O to turn the system on.3. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Installing the Map

DVD” under Maps on page 2-4 for more information.4. A caution may appear. Select the OK screen button

to proceed.5. Press the DEST hard key. If guidance is already

active, or if an entry is in place, you will have toselect either the “Add Stopover” button or the “ADD”buttons above or below the entry, depending onwhere you would like to place the next waypoint.

6. Select the 2 Address Entry screen button.

7. Select the state/province screen button, if needed,to change the current state or province.• Enter the name or enter the two-letter

abbreviation. A list displays.• Select the List screen button and select the state

or province.

8. Select the City name button and start entering thecity name.

• If five or less names are available, a list displays.

• If more than five are available, the List screenbutton has a number in it that represents thenumber of available cities. Select this button toview the list and select a city.

9. Once a city has been selected, the Street namecategory is automatically selected for entry.Do not enter directional information or street type.Use the space symbol screen button ( U )between street or city names. For example, thestreet name N. Royal Oak Rd. should be entered asroyal U oak. Use the backspace ( V ) screenbutton if an incorrect character has been entered.• If five or less streets are available for the selected

city, the system displays the list of streets.• If more than five streets are available the system

displays the alpha keyboard. Start entering thestreet name. If five or less names are available, alist displays. If more than five are available, theList screen button has a number in it thatrepresents the number of available streets. Selectthis button to view the list and select a street.

1-8

10. Once a street has been selected, select theHouse # screen button to enter the house number.The system displays the house number rangethat is available for the street.

11. Select the Go screen button. A map screen, withthe destination marked appears.

12. Select the route preference (Fastest, Shortest, orOther). The system calculates and highlights theroute.

13. Select the Start Guidance screen button. Thefastest route will automatically begin if the car startsmoving forward.

See “Address Entry” under Destination on page 2-13 formore information.

Entering a Point of Interest (POI)To set a destination by entering a Point of Interest (POI):

1. If the radio is on with a map disc inserted, skip toStep 5.

2. Press O to turn the system on.

3. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Installing the MapDVD” under Maps on page 2-4 for more information.

4. A caution may appear. Select the OK screen buttonto proceed.

5. Press the DEST hard key. If guidance is alreadyactive, or if an entry is in place, you will have toselect either the “Add Stopover” button or the “ADD”buttons above or below the entry, depending onwhere you would like to place the next waypoint.

6. Select the i Point of Interest screen button.

7. Select the state/province screen button, if needed,to change the current state or province.

• Enter the name or enter the two-letterabbreviation. A list displays.

• Select the List screen button and select the stateor province.

8. Enter the specific title of the POI in the POI namespace (i.e. Washington Monument).

• If five or less names are available, a list displays.

• If more than five are available, the List screenbutton has a number in it, it represents thenumber of available POIs. Select this button toview the list.

9. Select the Go screen button next to the POI. A mapscreen, with the destination marked appears.

1-9

10. Select the route preference (Fastest, Shortest, orOther). The system calculates and highlightsthe route.


See “Point of Interest (POI)” under Destination onpage 2-13 for more information.

Entering Previous DestinationChoose from a list of recent destinations with thismethod:

1. Press the “DEST” hardkey. Press the “PreviousDestination” button to show a list of previousdestinations. This list is empty at first when theradio is new or is erased when the battery isdisconnected.

2. Touch your selection. You may not be able to scrolldown the list while the vehicle is in motion,depending on the settings. See “Limit FeaturesWhile Driving” later in this manual.



Map Method1. Touch the screen where you want to go. The system

shows the location, and possibly an address as well.You can scroll out to a larger view by first using the+ (plus) or − (minus) buttons at the lower left andright of the map to select an appropriate viewingrange.

2. Press the “GO” button that appears when you areready to begin routing.


4. Select the Start Guidance screen button.The fastest route will automatically begin if thecar starts moving forward.

Storing Preset Destinations1. If the radio is on with a map disc inserted, skip to

Step 5.

2. Press O to turn the system on.3. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Installing the Map

DVD” under Maps on page 2-4 for more information.4. A caution may appear. Select the OK screen button

to proceed.5. Press the DEST hard key.

Enter a destination. See Destination on page 2-13for more information on how to enter a destination.

1-10

6. Select the Map screen button after entering thedestination.

7. Select the Mark screen button from the map. Theaddress book screen appears. Five presetdestinations can be stored, but you must set themfrom the Address Book screen. There are other waysto get to the Address Book as well.

8. Select the Name screen button. An alpha-keyboarddisplays. Enter the name. If you have stored thelocation with a name automatically assigned by thesystem, use the “BACKSPACE” button (not “BACK”)to erase the letters and begin typing your preferredtitle for this destination. For example, choosing adestination by address and storing it to the AddressBook will store the actual address, which may not beeasy to display in a short Preset button that has8 digits, so name it something shorter.

9. Press and hold one of the screen buttons at thebottom of the screen until the name appears in thescreen button on the display. A beep may be heard.The name appears in that preset destination screenbutton and is now available to select from theDestination Entry screen. See “Using Your StoredPreset Destinations” next in this section to selectit as a destination.See “Adding or Changing Preset Destinations”under Destination on page 2-13 for more informationon how to add preset destinations.

Using Your Stored Preset DestinationsThese destinations are available for selection whiledriving.

1. If the radio is on with a map disc inserted, skip toStep 5.


3. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Installing the MapDVD” under Maps on page 2-4 for more information.

4. A caution may appear. Select the OK screen buttonto proceed.

5. Press the DEST hard key.

6. Select one of the available preset destinationscreen buttons. A map screen, with the destinationmarked, appears and the system immediatelybegins to route to that destination.The preset destination buttons overwrite andprovides guidance to the selected destination evenif the guidance is in place. Pressing a presetdestination cancels the current route and then,routes to the single preset destination.If more waypoints or stops are desired after thepreset is used, follow the adding stopover methodto load a total of four additional waypoints.

1-11



See “Preset Destination” under Destination on page 2-13for more information.

Canceling GuidanceGuidance is canceled once you arrive at your finaldestination. To cancel guidance prior to arrival at thefinal destination:


2. Select the Cancel Guidance screen button.

3. A pop-up confirmation appears. Select OK to cancelguidance or Cancel to cancel the request.

Guidance VolumeTo adjust the volume of voice guidance prompts:

1. Press the MENU hard key to enter the menuoptions, then press the MENU key repeatedlyuntil Nav is selected or select the Nav screenbutton.

2. Select the Voice Prompt screen button.

3. Select the On screen button if voice guidanceis not on.

4. Select the + (plus) or – (minus) screen buttons toincrease or to decrease the volume of the voiceprompts. The system responds with the adjustedvoice level.

See “Voice Prompt” under Configure Menu on page 2-27for more information.

Turning the O (volume) knob during a voice ornavigation prompt also changes the volume.

Cleaning the Video ScreenUse a soft clean cotton cloth dampened with cleanwater.

1-12

Features and Controls ......................................2-2Using the Navigation System ...........................2-2Maps ............................................................2-4Symbols ........................................................2-7Destination ..................................................2-13Configure Menu ............................................2-27

Global Positioning System (GPS) ....................2-38Vehicle Positioning ........................................2-39Problems with Route Guidance .......................2-40If the System Needs Service ..........................2-40Ordering Map DVDs ......................................2-41Database Coverage Explanations ....................2-41

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-1

Features and Controls

Using the Navigation SystemThis section includes basic information to operate thenavigation system.

Use the hard keys and the touch-sensitive screenbuttons on the navigation screen to operate the system.See Navigation System Overview on page 1-2 formore information.

Once the vehicle is moving, some functions becomedisabled to reduce driver distractions.

Hard Key Operation

O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system onand off.

• Turn O to increase or decrease the volume to theaudio system.

• Press and hold O for more than two seconds toturn off the navigation system, the Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE), and Rear Seat Audio (RSA).If the vehicle has not been turned off, the RSEand the RSA can be turned back on by pressing Oand continues playback of the last active source.

f (Tune/Speaker Adjustment): Press to access theSound screen to adjust bass, midrange, treble, andequalization.

• Turn f to go to the next or previous radio station.See Navigation Audio System on page 3-2 formore information.

Z (CD/DVD Eject): Press to eject CDs and DVDs.

NAV (Navigation): Press to view the vehicle’s currentposition on the map screen.

• Press NAV multiple times to cycle through Full Mapand the tab that displays the current audio source(AM, FM, CD, etc.). Full Map displays the screen infull map view.

• Select the audio tab to split the screen between themap screen and the current audio source screenmenu. See “Audio” under Navigation Audio Systemon page 3-2 for more information.

DEST (Destination): Press to access the DestinationEntry screen to plan a destination. See Destinationon page 2-13 for more information.

RPT (Navigation Repeat): Press to repeat the lastvoice guidance prompt.

2-2

FAV (Favorite): Press to access the preset stations.See “Storing Radio Station Presets” under NavigationAudio System on page 3-2 for more information.

AUDIO: Press to access the full Audio screen tochange AM, FM, XM™ Satellite Radio Service(if equipped), CD, DVD, if equipped, and auxiliary input.See “Audio” under Navigation Audio System onpage 3-2 for more information.

MENU: Press to adjust features for sound, radio,navigation, the display, and for adjusting the time. SeeConfigure Menu on page 2-27 for more information.

¨SEEK / ©SEEK: Press either arrow to seekand scan radio stations, to seek tracks on a CD, or toseek chapters on a DVD, if equipped. See NavigationAudio System on page 3-2, CD Player on page 3-10, orDVD Player on page 3-16 for more information.

Touch-Sensitive Screen ButtonsThese buttons are located on the screen. Whenselected, a beep sounds. Screen buttons are highlightedwhen a feature is available.

Alpha-Numeric KeyboardLetters of the alphabet, symbols, punctuation, andnumbers, when available, display on the navigationscreen as an alpha or numeric keyboard. The alphakeyboard displays when the system requires entry of acity or street name.All characters are touch-sensitive screen buttons. Toucha character to select it.

A-Y (Accent Alphabet): Select to get letters with accentsymbols. This button may toggle to A-Z.

A-Z (Alphabet): Select to get letters from the alphabet.This button may toggle to A-Y.

0-9 (Numbers): Select to get numbers and punctuationmarks.

U (Space): Select to enter a space betweencharacters or the words of a name.

Backspace: Select if an incorrect character has beenentered.To make name selections easier, the system onlyhighlights the characters that can follow the last oneentered. For example, if a Z is entered, a T may not beavailable for selection.If a name does not display after entry, it may need to beentered differently or the map DVD disc may not containthat information. See Database Coverage Explanationson page 2-41 for more information.

2-3

MapsThis section includes basic information about the mapdatabase.

Map CoverageThe maps are stored on a DVD. The United States,Canada, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands arecontained on one disc.Refer to the “Navigation System Map Disc” manual for adetailed explanation of map coverage and detailed citylists in each region. This manual is in the map DVD casewhen the vehicle is delivered from the factory.

Installing the DVD Map DiscYour dealer/retailer may have installed the map DVD. Ifthe map DVD was not installed, do the following to load it:Read the following steps completely.1. Turn the ignition on. The vehicle must be in P (Park)

to perform this operation.

2. Press O (power) to turn the navigation system on.3. Press the NAV hard key.4. Touch the Insert Map Disc screen button. The screen

opens to access the map DVD slot.5. Load the map DVD partway into the slot. The system

pulls it in.The screen cannot be closed until a double beepis heard.

Notice: Pressing directly on the navigation screenmay cause damage. Repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle’s warranty. Do not press directly on thenavigation screen.

6. To close the screen, slightly push up on the twoouter corners until the screen is in position. Thenpush the screen in by pushing on the four outercorners until a click is heard.

7. Set the search area. See “Setting the Search Area”earlier in this section.

2-4

Ejecting the DVD Map DiscThe navigation portion of the system cannot be used ifthe DVD map disc is not loaded.

1. Press the MENU key to enter the Menu options,then press the MENU key repeatedly until Nav isselected or touch the Nav screen button.

2. Touch the Map Database Informationscreen button.

3. Touch the Eject Map Disc screen button. Thescreen tilts, exposing the map DVD slot.

4. Press the eject button, located next to the DVD mapdisc slot, and the disc ejects. Pull the disc out.The screen cannot be closed until a double beep isheard.

Notice: Pressing directly on the navigation screenmay cause damage. Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle’s warranty. Do not press directlyon the navigation screen.

5. To close the screen, slightly push up on the twoouter corners until the screen is in position. Thenpush the screen in by pushing on the four outercorners until a click is heard.

Handling the DVD Map DiscTo properly handle the DVD map disc:

• Handle the disc very carefully to avoidcontamination or flaws. Signals may not read outproperly if the disc gets contaminated or flawed.

• Do not use photographic record cleaner, solvents,or other cleaners if the disc gets soiled. Use a softcloth to gently wipe it out from the center of thedisc to the outside.

• Do not use the disc to rest on while writing ordrawing with any writing utensil. Do not attacha seal to the disc.

• Do not keep the disc in direct sunlight, hightemperatures, or humidity.

• After using the disc, place it back into theoriginal case.

2-5

Map AdjustmentsThe scale of view on the map can be adjusted. Whiledriving, the map scrolls automatically based on thedirection of travel.

Map Scales

0 / 1 (Zoom In/Zoom Out): Touch the zoom in or outscreen buttons or the scale on the bar to change thelevel of map detail. The scale appears on the screenonce the zoom in or zoom out screen buttons areselected.

• The system adjusts the map accordingly. The scaleof a map can range from 1/32 mi. (50 m) to256 mi. (400 km).

• See “Driver Information Center, DIC Controls andDisplays” in the Index of your vehicle’s ownermanual to change between English or metric.

Scrolling the Map

Touch anywhere on themap screen and the scrollsymbol appears. Use thisfeature to scroll acrossthe map.

• Move your finger in any direction on the map screenand the map continues to scroll in that direction.

− If scrolling while the vehicle is in P (Park), thesystem initially scrolls at a slower rate. Thescroll speed increases if you continue touchingthe map screen.

− If scrolling while the vehicle is in motion, thereis one scroll speed and the distance is limited.Keep touching the map screen to scroll for alonger distance.

• Press the NAV (Navigation) key to return to thecurrent vehicle location on the map if the vehicle icondisappears from the screen.

• Use the scroll feature on the map to set a destination.See “From Map” under Destination on page 2-13 formore information.

• Press the GO screen button to calculate the routefrom the current position to the destination mark,while scrolling on the map without a planned route.

2-6

SymbolsThe following symbols are the most common symbolsthat appear on a map screen.

The vehicle is shown asthis symbol. It indicates thecurrent position and thedirection the vehicleis traveling on the map.

The distance to destinationsymbol indicates thedistance to the finaldestination.

The waypoint symboldisplays on the map aftera stopover has beenadded to the route.

The waypoint symbols are numbered one through three,depending on how many stopovers have been set.

This symbol appears whenthe time to the destinationis not available or while youare scrolling on the map.

2-7

The distance and time todestination symbolindicates the distance andthe estimated timeremaining to the finaldestination, depending onthe option selected.

The straight line todistance symbol indicatesthe straight-line distanceto the destination.

This symbol appears before driving begins on the routeor if on a road where navigation guidance cannot begiven.

The north up symbolindicates the map withNorth Up, known as NorthUp mode.

While in North Up mode, the vehicle icon follows the northdirection on the map regardless of which direction thevehicle is traveling. Select this screen symbol to switchbetween North Up, Heading Up, and 3–D view modes.

The heading up symbolindicates that the vehicle istraveling up on the mapand is known as HeadingUp mode.

The shaded triangle indicates the North direction. Whilein Heading Up mode the direction at the top of the screenand the way the vehicle icon is heading indicates thedirection the vehicle is traveling. Select this screensymbol to switch between Heading Up, North Up, and3–D view modes.Three-dimensional (3–D) view mode changes theappearance of the map display to a road level view.

2-8

The No GPS symbolappears when the vehicleis acquiring or notreceiving a GlobalPositioning System (GPS)satellite signal.

See Global Positioning System (GPS) on page 2-38 formore information.

Select the Mark screenbutton to store the locationon the screen in youraddress book.

The system automatically stores the point in theaddress book. See “Adding Destinations to the AddressBook” under Destination on page 2-13 for moreinformation.

Displaying Points of Interest (POI) on theMap Screen

Select the POI screenbutton to display or deletePOI icons from the map.

Displaying POI icons on the map indicates where POIs(e.g. restaurants, gas stations, etc.) are located. Thisscreen appears after selecting the POI screen button.

2-9

1. Select one of the POI categories to display or todelete POI icons from the map screen. Once acategory has been selected the POI icon displaysat the top of the screen.

2. Select up to five categories to display on the mapscreen. When a category is selected those POIicons display on the map.

3. Press the POI screen button again to add morePOI icons.

More: Select to view more POI categories.

POI Close to: Once a category has been selected,touch this button to display the list of available POIs forthe selected POI category. The list provides the POIicon, the name, the direction, and the distance tothe POI from the vehicle’s current position.

1. Use the scroll arrows to move up and down the list.

2. Use the sorting screen buttons: Dist (distance),Icon, Name, and on Route as needed.

3. Select Go, next to the desired POI, to make thisPOI a destination or a stopover.

2-10

4. Select a POI name to receive information about thePOI. From this screen select: Address Book, Go,Map, or Call (if the OnStar® account is active and ifthere are Hands-Free Calling minutes available).

Address Book: Press to add this POI to the addressbook. See “Nav” under Configure Menu on page 2-27 forinformation on editing address book entries.

Go: Select to make this POI a destination or a stopover.

Map: Select to display the map showing the locationof the POI.

Call: Select Call to dial the phone number for the POIusing the OnStar Hands-Free system. The Callbutton is only available if:

• OnStar Hands-Free Calling is activated and callingminutes are available.

• A paired Bluetooth phone is connected. For moreinformation, see OnStar and Bluetooth in theindex of the vehicle’s owner manual.

OK: Select to display the map screen.

Show POI: Select to display or remove the POI iconsfrom the map screen.

List all Categories: Select to list all POIs sortedalphabetically.

Delete: To delete a specific POI category, select thecategory.

Clear All: Select this screen button to clear all selectedPOI categories.

Driving on a RouteWhen a destination has been routed while driving onroute, the map screen automatically displays thenext maneuver.

The pop-up displays thenext maneuver directionand how many milesor kilometers the vehicle isfrom it.

2-11

When you are approximately 1/4 mi (400 m) from thenext maneuver in city driving, the screen displaysthe name and a detailed view of the next maneuver. Onthe freeway, these details appear at 1 mi (1200 m)from the maneuver.

3–D Lane Guidance

Some major metropolitan areas may include a 3–D laneguidance feature for highway exits and junctions. Thisfeature gives a more detailed representation of the exitsand junctions on the route. Cities that include this featureare New York, Los Angeles, Chicago, Detroit, and SanFrancisco, and may also include Philadelphia,Washington D.C., and other major highway junctions.

2-12

Dual Mode

This dual screen symboldisplays when the screenis in dual mode.

Dual mode displays the route (map) on half of thescreen and a maneuver or turn list on the other half.Press this button to switch between dual screen and fullscreen which displays the entire route.

Auto RerouteWhen the destination is set and you are off the plannedroute, the system automatically plans a new routeand begins to reroute. The new route is highlighted onthe screen.

DestinationTo Use the destination feature on the navigationsystem:

1. Press the DEST key to access the DestinationEntry screen.

2. Select one of five destination options from thisscreen.

2-13

Address Entry

2 Address Entry: Enter an address by providingthe system with a city name or a street name.

Enter the city name first:



3. Select the state/province screen button, if thecurrent state or province needs to change.

4. Enter the name or enter the two-letter abbreviation.A list displays. The List screen button could also beselected, then select the state or province.

5. Select the City name button.

• Enter the City Name or select the Last 5 Citiesscreen button. The Last 5 Cities screen displaysa list of the last five city names that had beenentered.

• Select a city from the list and it appears in theCity name area.

6. If using the alpha keyboard, finish entering the cityname. If four or less names are available, a listdisplays. If more than four are available, a numberappears in the List screen button. This numberrepresents the number of available cities.

• Select this button to view the list.

• Select a city.

7. Once a city has been selected the Street namecategory is automatically selected for entry. Startentering the street name. If five or less namesare available, a list displays. If more than five areavailable, a number appears in the List screenbutton. This number represents the numberof available streets.

• Select this number to view the list.

• Select a street name.

2-14

8. Once a street has been selected, select theHouse # screen button to enter the house number.The system displays the house number rangethat is available for the street. Select a housenumber. There is also a Cross Street screen optionat this point.

9. Select the Go screen button. The map screendisplays with the destination marked.

10. Select the route preference (Fastest, Shortest, orOther). The system calculates and highlightsthe route.

11. Select the Start Guidance screen button. The routecan now be started.See “Getting Started on Your Route” later in thissection for more information.

To enter a destination by entering the street name first:



3. Select the state/province screen button, if thecurrent state or province needs to change.


5. Select the Street screen button. Enter the streetname. The Last 5 Streets screen displays a list ofthe last five street names that had been entered.

• Select a street from the list and it appears in theStreet name area.

6. If using the alpha keyboard, finish entering thestreet name. If five or less names are available,a list displays. If more than five are available,a number appears in the List screen button. Thisrepresents the number of available streets.


• Select a street.

7. Once a street has been selected, select the House# screen button to enter the house number. Thesystem displays the house number range thatis available for the street. Select the house number.


9. Once the house number is selected, the city nameautomatically populates. If there is more than onecity available for selection, a list of cities displays.Select the city.


2-15


To enter a destination by entering a cross street:





5. Select the City or Street screen button.The Last 5 Cities or Streets screen button displaysa list of the last five city or street names thathad been entered. Select a city or street from thelist and it appears in the City or Street name area.If using the alpha keyboard, finish entering thecity or street name. If five or less names areavailable, a list displays. If more than five areavailable, a number appears in the List screenbutton. This represents the number of availablecities or streets.

• Select this button to view the list

• Select a city or street.

6. Once a city and a street have been selected, touchthe Cross Street screen button and start entering thecross street name. If five or less names are available,a list displays. If more than five are available, anumber appears in the List screen button. Thisrepresents the number of available streets.


• Select a street.




2-16

Point of Interest (POI)The Point of Interest (POI) destination entry method letsyou select a destination from the POI list.

i Point of Interest: Select this screen button toaccess the POI (Point of Interest) screen. Fromthis screen you have two options to select/enter adestination:

• Enter the name using the alpha keyboard.

• Select a category from the category list.

To use the point of interest destination entry method byentering the name:





5. Enter the POI name.If four or less names are available, a list displays. Ifmore than four are available, a number appears inthe List screen button. This represents the number ofavailable POIs. Select this button to view the list.

6. Select the Go screen button next to the POI. Themap screen displays with the destination marked.



2-17

To use the point of interest destination entry method byselecting a category:1. Press the DEST hard key.


3. Select the Browse POI Categories screen button toview the list of POI categories.

4. Select a category, and then a sub-category. Thesystem displays available POI names in theselected sub-category.

• Select the POI, or once the Browse POICategories button is selected, a List AllCategories screen button displays.

• Select this button to view a list of all categories.

• Select one of the categories and a list of alllocations for the selected category for a particulararea displays.

• Select the location.

5. Select the Go screen button next to the POI. Themap screen displays with the destination marked.


7. Select the Start Guidance screen button. The routeis now ready to be started.See “Getting Started on Your Route” later in thissection for more information.

Address BookThe address book entry method lets you select adestination by selecting an address that has been storedin your address book.

g Address Book: Select this screen button toaccess the Address Book screen. From this screen,select an address that already exists as the destination.

2-18

To use the address book entry method:


2. Select the g Address Book screen button.

A list of your address book addresses display. Usethe arrows on the left side of the screen to scrollthrough the list.

3. Select the Go screen button next to the destination.The map screen displays with the destinationmarked displays.


5. Select the Start Guidance screen button. The routecan now be started.See “Getting Started on Your Route” later in thissection for more information.See “Adding Destinations to the Address Book”later in this section.

OnStar® Destination DownloadThe Destination download lets an OnStar subscriber askthe OnStar call center to download a destination.OnStar will send address information and locationcoordinates of the destination into the navigation system.

OnStar Download Screen

2-19

Using Destination DownloadIf the map disc is not installed and the radio receives adestination download, a message displays showingthat the map disc is required or it accepts the downloadso that it can be added to the address book.

If the navigation radio screen is turned off before adownload, the system automatically turns the screen onand displays a download confirmation message. Theradio remains on after the download.

The navigation system displays Searching – PleaseWait as the address is searched within the mapdatabase.

If the address is not found within the map database, thesystem may use latitude and longitude coordinates tolocate the destination. In this case, “Using Coordinates”displays on the downloaded screen.

If the system is unable to locate the address, theDestination Not Found screen below displays. Somescreen buttons, such as Map and Go, grays out.The Call button grays out when there is no phonenumber available and while connected to OnStar.

Destination Not Found Screen

2-20

Route Guidance Not ActiveIf an OnStar destination is downloaded while routeguidance is not active, the navigation system displays apop-up screen and does the following screen functions:

• Select Go, the navigation system starts routecalculation to the destination(s) received.

• Select Map, the navigation system displays theDestination Map Screen.

• Select Call, the navigation system initiates a callwith Bluetooth Phone (if available) or OnStarPersonal Call.

• Select Add To Address Book, the navigation systemcopies the downloaded destination to the addressbook and display the new address book entry.The destination saves this download even if it isonly partial information such as a phone number.

• Select Back, the navigation system cancelsthe OnStar destination download and returns to theprevious screen. The downloaded address is notadded to the previous destinations.

Route Guidance ActiveIf an OnStar destination is downloaded while routeguidance is already active, the system displays a pop-upscreen and does the following screen function:

• Select Go, the navigation system adds thedownloaded destination before the next waypoint ofthe existing route (closest to the current vehicleposition). If all waypoints are in use before Gois selected, the furthest waypoint (final destination)is automatically deleted.

• All other buttons on the pop-up screen operate asdescribed under Route Guidance Not Active.

Previous DestinationsPreviously downloaded OnStar destinations are savedunder Previous Destinations in the navigation systemwhere they can be accessed or saved to theaddress book.

2-21

Map Destination Screen FunctionsIf the map screen is used to show destination, it hasmap screen capabilities such as Go, Mark, Zoom, Scroll,etc. The address is shown at the top of the screen.

Getting Started on Your RouteOnce a destination has been entered, there are severalfunctions that can be performed. Press the DEST hardkey to access the Route screen.

Destination Map Screen

2-22

Turn List

Turn List: Select to view the list of turn maneuvers forthe entire route and to avoid turns on the route.

r / q (Scroll Arrows): Select the up and downarrow to scroll through the list of maneuvers.

Avoid: Select this screen button, next to the adjacentstreet name, to avoid the maneuver.

The map screen displays. The route recalculateswithout that maneuver.

Route Preview: Select to preview the entire route ineither direction.

t (Reverse Skip): Select to go back to the start pointor previous stopover.

q / r (Reverse Scroll): Select to scroll to the startpoint or previous stopover. The t button changesto a fast reverse screen button.

j (Pause): Select to pause the route preview, while inreverse or fast forward scroll.

2-23

r / [ (Fast Forward Scroll): Select to scroll to thenext stopover or to the final destination. The u buttonchanges to a fast speed fast forward.

u (Fast Forward Skip): Select to go to the nextstopover or to the final destination.

Detour

Detour: Select this button from the Route screen, thenselect to detour 1 mile, 3 miles, or 5 miles (1 km, 3 km,5 km) around the current route. You may also select todetour the whole route if necessary. This option is onlyavailable while you are driving on your current plannedroute.

Voice VolumeSelect this button from the Route screen to turn voiceguidance on or off and to change the volume ofvoice prompts. See “Nav” under Configure Menu onpage 2-27 for more information.

Add Stopover

Add Stopover: Select this button from the Routescreen. This feature lets you add up to three stopoversto the current route, between your start point and finaldestination. Once a stopover has been added, the pointscan be edited or deleted.

2-24

To add a stopover:


2. Select the Add or Add Stopover screen button. Thisbutton only appears if a route has been calculated.

3. Using the desired method of entering a destination,enter the stopover. See “Destination” previously formore information.


5. Select the Start Guidance screen button. The routecan now be started.

6. To add the second and third stopovers, press theDEST hard key, then select the Add screen button,where the next stopover should display on theroute.



To delete a stopover from the current route:

Delete a Stopover From the Current Route1. Press the DEST hard key.

2. Select the Delete screen button for a stopover to bedeleted.

3. The system displays a pop-up confirmationmessage. Select OK to delete the stopover; selectCancel to cancel this operation.



Suspend GuidanceSelect this button from the Route screen to put thecurrent route on hold.

Resume GuidanceSelect this button from the Route screen to resumeguidance on the current route.

Cancel GuidanceSelect this button from the Route screen to cancel thecurrent route.

2-25

Adding Destinations to theAddress BookThere are two ways to add a destination to theaddress book:

• To add the current final destination to the addressbook, select the Mark screen button from the mapscreen. The system automatically saves thefinal destination information in the address book.

• Select the Add to Address Book screen button whenavailable on POI information screens, DestinationEntry screens, or POI screens. The systemautomatically saves this information in theaddress book.

See “Nav” under Configure Menu on page 2-27 forinformation on editing address book entries.

Adding or Changing PresetDestinationsThis feature lets you add or change one of five presetdestinations. When a destination has been added as apreset destination, it is available to be selected from theDestination Entry screen. See “Preset Destination”previously for information on how to select a presetdestination as a final destination.

To store the current final destination as a presetdestination:

1. Select the Mark screen button from the map screento add the current final destination. The AddressBook screen appears.

2. Select the Name screen button. An alpha-keyboarddisplays. Enter the name.

3. Press and hold one of the buttons at the bottom ofthe screen until the name appears in that presetdestination screen button. It is now availableto select from the Destination Entry screen.

To store an address book entry as a preset destination:

1. Press the MENU hard key, then press the MENUkey repeatedly until Nav is selected, or select theNav screen button.

2. Select the Edit/View screen button.

3. Select the address book entry to be stored as thepreset destination. Select the Name screen buttonto add a name, if needed.

4. Press and hold one of the buttons at the bottom ofthe screen until the name appears in that presetdestination screen button. It is now availableto select from the Destination Entry screen.

2-26

Configure Menu

Press the MENU hard key to adjust several of thesystem’s features and preferences. The last selectedmenu screen is the screen that displays; Sound, Radio,Nav (navigation), Display, or Time.

SoundPress the MENU key to enter the menu options, thenpress the MENU key repeatedly until Sound is selectedor select the Sound screen button. To make speakerand equalization adjustments. See Navigation AudioSystem on page 3-2 for more information.

RadioPress the MENU key to enter the menu options, thenpress the MENU key repeatedly until Radio is selectedor select the Radio screen button, to make changesfor radio information displayed, preset pages, XM™categories, and automatic volume control. SeeNavigation Audio System on page 3-2 for moreinformation.

Traffic OptionsRead the following Options descriptions to understandhow the XM NavTraffic™ operates.

Base shown; Uplevel similar

2-27

XM NavTraffic™ (USA and Canada)Your vehicle’s navigation system may have an XMNavTraffic receiver. XM NavTraffic is a subscriptionservice provided via XM™ Satellite Radio. XM NavTrafficprovides real-time traffic information fully integrated to thenavigation system to display current traffic conditions fora driver’s chosen route. XM NavTraffic allows drivers tomake the most informed, timesaving routing decisions.

If the Traffic touch screen button is pressed or if thetraffic display in the Navigation Setup Menu is attemptedto be turned on without a subscription, a warningscreen displays indicating that XM traffic is not activated.

Three types of traffic information for major roadways aredisplayed on the navigation system:

• Unscheduled traffic incident data, such as accidentsand disabled vehicles

• Scheduled traffic incident data, such as roadconstruction and road closures

• Traffic flow information (rate of speed data)

Traffic information is delivered to the vehicle by the XM™Radio satellites. XM NavTraffic makes it possible for thenavigation system to provide continuously updated trafficinformation personalized for a driver’s needs.

2-28

XM NavTraffic currently broadcasts the traffic informationfor many markets nationally, and the service may beavailable in more cities in the future. Visitxmnavtraffic.com for more details on local coverage.

A service fee is required in order to receive theXM NavTraffic service.

Turning XM NavTraffic™ On and OffTo turn traffic on or off:

1. Press the Menu hard key, then press the Menu keyrepeatedly until Nav is selected or press the Navscreen button.

2. Touch the Traffic Options button.

3. Touch the Traffic button. This button is highlightedwhen it is active.Selecting Alert for Approaching Traffic Eventsenables the system to show a pop-up screen thatnotifies of possible traffic issues ahead.When this feature is highlighted, while traveling ona route, you are able to view and avoid accidentsthat are on the route.

Traffic IconThe Traffic Icon appears on the Traffic Tab, next to theword Traffic, when traffic is found in the local area.

The Traffic Icon has three different condition displays.These are:

Condition Traffic Status Icon

• No XM NavTraffic™subscription.

• No Traffic is found inthe local area.

• The Traffic Feature isturned off.

2-29

Condition Traffic Status Icon

Traffic events are in thearea, but none are onroute.

Traffic events are on route.

Locations and Information of TrafficConditionsThe system may take some time to sort the information.The list of traffic conditions display in the order ofdistance from the vehicle, for up to approximately 150 mi(240 km). If traveling on a planned route, the list canbe filtered to see traffic conditions along the plannedroute. Not all traffic conditions may be listed.

To view the traffic condition location and information onthe map:

1. Press the NAV key, then press the NAV keyrepeatedly until Traffic is selected, or touch theTraffic screen button. A list of traffic conditions maydisplay with the direction and how far away thetraffic conditions are from the vehicle’s currentposition.

2-30

2. Select a traffic condition to get more detailedinformation of the event.

Options

Select the Options screen button. A Traffic Optionsmenu displays. Select the desired traffic related option.

Traffic: Select to enable or disable the traffic function.

Show Traffic ICONS: Select to display traffic iconson the map screen. This function allows selection of thetraffic information that is displayed.

Traffic Flow Status — This touch screen button is usedto enable or disable the green, yellow, red andorange arrows shown beside the roads and used toshow the traffic flow or extent of a traffic event.

• Black indicates a closed road segment

• Red indicates significantly impaired traffic flow withaverage speed between 25 and 45 mph.

2-31

• Yellow indicates slightly impaired traffic flow withaverage speed between 25 and 45 mph.

• Green indicates normal traffic flow with averagespeed above 45 mph.

• Orange indicates construction.

Traffic flow data arrows display on the map when scaledup to eight miles.

Closed Road, Traffic Delays, Incidents, andAdvisories — These four touch screen buttons areused to select the traffic event ICONS that appear onthe map screens.

Alert for Approaching Traffic Events: When On, if anapproaching traffic event is within the alert range, oneof two traffic alert pop-up screens display:

• With no route planned, while on expressways,Approaching Traffic Event without Avoid screendisplays.

• With route planned, Traffic Event on Route screendisplays.

If the Alert for Approaching Traffic Events is Off, thealert pop-up screen does not display.

On-RouteSelect the On Route touch screen button to display allevents ahead on the current active route. If no trafficevents have been reported on route, No Traffic EventsReported On route displays.

2-32

NameSelect the Name touch screen button to display trafficevents in the order of distance. The closest eventis shown first.

AvoidWhen a route is active, the Avoid button is used toroute around the listed traffic event. After calculating anew route, the navigation system shows a new route onthe full map screen. The Avoid button is grayed out ifthe traffic event is not on route or no route is active.

RefreshSelect the Refresh touch screen button to update thescreen with all of the latest traffic events, miles, etc.

Scrolling to Traffic Events on the Map

While scrolling the map, traffic condition icons mayappear. To receive information about the traffic condition,place the cross hairs over the traffic condition icon. Afterselecting the INFO (information) screen button, the typeof traffic condition, the street name, and a description ofthe traffic condition displays. See “Scrolling the Map”under Maps on page 2-4 for more information.

2-33

Traffic Event Display CategoriesThe following are traffic condition categories and symbolsthat can appear on the display:

Category 1, Road Closure:

q (Road Closed): Road and/or ramps closed.

Category 2, Traffic Delayed:

o (Stopped Traffic): Traffic stopped, stop and gotraffic, delayed and congested traffic.

Category 3, Incidents:

p (Alert): Object in the roadway, disabled vehicle, ordangerous road conditions.

t (Accident): Roadway obstructed due to accident.

s (Road Works): Delayed traffic due to construction.

Category 4, Advisories:

j / r (Road Condition): Delayed or stopped traffic,lane blocked or closed due to a road condition.

k (Weather): Heavy rain, snow, or fog weathercondition.

m (Parking): Available parking area.

l (Information): Special event, general information, orwarning.

Detailed Traffic Event ScreensThere are three different types of detailed traffic eventscreens. Each screen is a variance of the one shown onthe Traffic Event Screen.

The Traffic Event screen is used when the traffic eventis not being approached on the expressway or on aroute. This screen may display if:

• Scrolling to an event on the map and thenpressing INFO.

• Selecting a traffic event listed on the Traffic EventList screen.

Traffic Event Screen

2-34

Back, Map, More, and AvoidThese buttons have common functions across all threeDetailed Traffic Event screens.

Back: Press to return to the screen used to display theselected detailed traffic event.

Map: Press to show the related traffic event on the map.If selected, the Map Traffic Event Icon screen displays.

Scroll to the new traffic ICON, and the INFO buttondisplays for that traffic event. Press INFO and thedetailed traffic event screen displays. Press the NAVhard key to go back to the Full Map screen.

More: Press to display more of the traffic eventdescription, if the whole event does not fit in the givendisplay.

Avoid: This button is used to avoid the location of anevent on the route. If selected, a new route is calculatedand the related traffic event is avoided. After the newroute has been calculated, the navigation systemgoes to the full map screen and shows the new route.

Traffic Voice PromptsThe traffic voice prompts are part of the currentnavigation voice prompts. If the navigation voice promptsare turned off, all traffic prompts are also turned off.

If the voice prompts are on, whenever an Alert forApproaching Traffic or Alert if Better route Available isdisplayed, the system gives the related voice prompt.The content of the voice prompt depends on actualtraffic event data.

The RPT (Repeat) hard key is for navigation trafficmaneuvers only. It is not used to repeat traffic prompts.During a traffic voice prompt, if RPT is pressed, thecurrent prompt playback cancels.

Anything that cancels the Alert for Approaching Traffic,also cancels the related voice prompt.

Traffic prompts are disabled during OnStar® or VoiceRecognition activity.

Map Traffic Event Icon with Back Screen

2-35

Display

Press the MENU key to enter the menu options, thenpress the MENU key repeatedly until Display is selected,or select the Display screen button.

Display OffSelect this button to turn the display off. Press the Nav,Dest, Fav, or Menu hard key or the f (tone) buttonto view the display.

Brightness/Contrast/Mode

Select this screen button to change the brightness,contrast, and mode of the display.

](Brightness): Select and hold the + (plus)or − (minus) to increase or decrease the brightnessof the screen.

_ (Contrast): Select and hold the + (plus) or − (minus)to increase or decrease the contrast of the screen.

VUE shown

2-36

Auto (Automatic): Select this screen button so thesystem can automatically adjust the screen backgrounddepending on exterior lighting conditions.

Night: Select to make the map background darker.

Day: Select to make the map background brighter.

Rear Vision Camera Options (Acadia,Enclave, OUTLOOK, and Traverse Only)The vehicle may be equipped with a Rear VisionCamera system and/or a Rear Park Assist to enhanceawareness of what is behind your vehicle. Thesesystems engage only when the transmission shiftposition is in R (Reverse). See “Rear Vision Camera”and/or “Park Assist” in the index of the vehicle’s ownermanual for more information.

VIDEO (for camera) and AUDIO (Park Assist) screenbuttons may display. Touch either screen button to turnthese features on or off. Both features are defaultedto on.

Eject Map DiscThis screen option is available when the map disc has tobe ejected for replacement. The map disc should only beaccess when updating with an annual update or whenand if a map disc read error displays during normal use.See “Ejecting the DVD Map Disc” earlier in this section formore information.

LanguageSaturn VUE and VUE Two-Mode Hybrid Only — Selectthe English, Francais or Espanol screen buttons tochange the language of the navigation screens.

If the vehicle has a DIC, see “DIC Vehicle Customization”in the Index of the vehicle’s owner manual to change thelanguage of the navigation screens.

Setting the ClockPress the MENU key to enter the menu options, thenpress the MENU key repeatedly until the time is selected,or select the time screen button, then press the Setscreen button.

Hours: Select and hold the − (minus) or + (plus) todecrease or increase the hours.

Minutes: Select and hold the − (minus) or + (plus) todecrease or increase the minutes.

12/24 Format: Select the 12 screen button for standardtime; select the 24 screen button for military time.

2-37

Global Positioning System (GPS)The navigation system determines the position of thevehicle by using satellite signals, various vehicle signals,and map data.

At times, other interferences such as the satellitecondition, road configuration, the condition of thevehicle and/or other circumstances can interfere withthe navigation system’s ability to determine the accurateposition of the vehicle.

The GPS shows the current position of the vehicle usingsignals sent by the GPS Satellites of the United StatesDepartment of Defense. When the vehicle is notreceiving signals from the satellites, a symbol appearson the map screen. Refer to Symbols on page 2-7.

This system may not be available or interferences mayoccur if any of the following is true:

• Signals are obstructed by tall buildings, trees, largetrucks, or a tunnel.

• Objects are located on the rear shelf of the vehicle.

• Satellites are being repaired or improved.

• After-market glass tinting has been applied to thevehicle’s rear windshield.

Notice: Do not apply after-market glass tinting tothe vehicle’s windows. Glass tinting interfereswith the system’s ability to receive GPS signals andcauses the system to malfunction. The windowmight have to be replaced to correct the problem.This would not be covered by the warranty.

For more information if the GPS is not functioningproperly, see If the System Needs Service on page 2-40and Problems with Route Guidance on page 2-40.

2-38

Vehicle PositioningAt times, the position of the vehicle on the map may beinaccurate due to one or more of the following reasons:

• The road system has changed.

• The vehicle is driving on slippery road surfaces suchas in sand, gravel, and/or snow.

• The vehicle is traveling on winding roads.

• The vehicle is on a long straight road.

• The vehicle is approaching a tall building or a largevehicle.

• The surface streets run parallel to a freeway.

• The vehicle has just been transferred by a vehiclecarrier or a ferry.

• The current position calibration is set incorrectly.

• The vehicle is traveling at high speed.

• The vehicle changes directions more than once, orwhen the vehicle is turning on a turn table in aparking lot.

• The vehicle is entering and/or exiting a parking lot,garage, or a lot with a roof.

• The GPS signal is not received.

• A roof carrier is installed on your vehicle.

• The vehicle is being driven with tire chains.

• The tires are replaced.

• The tire pressure for your tires is incorrect.

• The tires are worn.

• The first time the map DVD is inserted.

• The battery is disconnected for several days.

• The vehicle is driving in heavy traffic where driving isat low speeds, and the vehicle is stopped and startedrepeatedly.

If problems are experienced with the navigation system,see your dealer/retailer.

2-39

Problems with Route GuidanceInappropriate route guidance could occur under one ormore of the following conditions:

• You have not turned onto the road indicated.

• Route guidance may not be available when usingautomatic rerouting for the next right or left turn.

• The route may not be changed when usingautomatic rerouting.

• There is no route guidance when turning at anintersection.

• Plural names of places may be announcedoccasionally.

• It may take a long time to operate automaticrerouting during high-speed driving.

• Automatic rerouting may display a route returning tothe set stopover if traveling to a destination withoutpassing through a set stopover.

• The route prohibits the entry of a vehicle due to aregulation by time or season or any other regulationwhich may be given.

• Some routes may not be searched.

• The route to the destination may not be shown ifthere are new roads, if roads have recentlychanged, or if certain roads are not listed on themap DVD. See Ordering Map DVDs on page 2-41.

If the System Needs ServiceIf the navigation system needs service and the stepslisted here have been followed but there are stillproblems, see your dealer/retailer for assistance.

2-40

Ordering Map DVDsThe map DVD in the vehicle is the most up-to-dateinformation available when the vehicle was produced.The map DVD is updated periodically, provided that themap information has changed.

For any questions about the operation of the navigationsystem or the update process, contact the GM NavDisc Center toll-free phone number, 1-877-NAV-DISC(1-877-628-3472) or go to the center’s website,gmnavdisc.com. For any updates or replacements, callthe GM Nav Disc Center or order a new disc online.Have the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) availablewhen ordering to ensure the correct and mostup-to-date DVD map disc for the vehicle is sent. See“Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)” in the Index of thevehicle’s owner manual for more information.

After receiving the updated disc, replace the old disc inthe navigation system. See “Installing the DVD MapDisc” and “Ejecting the DVD Map Disc” under Maps onpage 2-4. Dispose of the old disc to avoid confusionabout which disc is the most current.

Database Coverage ExplanationsCoverage area depends upon the map detail available.Some areas have greater map detail than others.The navigation system works only as well as theinformation provided on the map disc. See OrderingMap DVDs on page 2-41 on how to obtain updatedmap information.

2-41

✍ NOTES

2-42

Navigation Audio System ..................................3-2CD Player ...................................................3-10DVD Player .................................................3-16

Care of Your CDs and DVDs .........................3-21Auxiliary Devices ..........................................3-22

Section 3 Navigation Audio System

3-1

Navigation Audio SystemNotice: Before adding any sound equipment to thevehicle, such as an audio system, CD player, CBradio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make surethat it can be added by checking with your dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering mobileradio and telephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly. Addedsound equipment can interfere with the operation ofthe vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems, andeven damage them. The vehicle’s systems caninterfere with the operation of sound equipment thathas been added.

Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,parking brake, and other functions of the vehicleoperate through the navigation system. If thatequipment is replaced or additional equipment isadded to the vehicle, the chimes may not work.Make sure that replacement or additional equipmentis compatible with the vehicle before installing it.See “Accessories and Modifications” in the Index ofthe vehicle’s owner manual.

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume):

• Press to turn the audio system on and off.

• Turn to increase or to decrease the volume.

• Press and hold for more than two seconds to turnoff the navigation system, the Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) video screen, and Rear SeatAudio (RSA). If the vehicle has not been turnedoff, the RSE and the RSA can be turned back on bypressing this knob. The last active source resumesplaying.

f (Tuning Knob):

• Turn to go to the next or previous frequency.

• Press to go to the Sound menu.

AUDIO:

• Press to display the audio screen.

• Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM(if equipped), DISC, or AUX (Auxiliary), or selectthe screen button. See CD Player on page 3-10,DVD Player on page 3-16, or Auxiliary Devices onpage 3-22 for more information.

3-2

Finding a StationThere are three ways to find/change stations:

• If viewing a full map screen, use the ¨©SEEKkeys and f knob. Preset stations cannot bechanged from the full map screen.

• If viewing a full map screen, select the sourcescreen (AM, FM, XM, CD, etc.) button. The displaysplits between the audio screen and the mapscreen. All station-changing functions can beperformed from this screen.

• If you do not want to view a split screen or you arenot on a map screen, press the AUDIO hard key toenter the audio menu.

AM/FM/XM: Select the source (AM, FM, or XM, ifequipped) screen button or press the AUDIO keyrepeatedly until the desired source is selected.

AM source shown, other sources similar

FM source shown, other sources similar

3-3

Category:

1. Select the screen button, located in the middle ofthe screen, to receive a list of all of the selectedband stations in the area.

2. Use the up and down arrow screen buttons to scrollthe frequencies.

3. Select the desired frequency.

XM lists also contain a category to select and thestations or channels that pertain to the category. ForXM, select the left and right arrow screen buttonsto change categories. The station information displays.

See “Radio Menu” later in this section to add andremove XM categories from the category list. Whenlistening to XM stations, all of the categories canbe selected when using the right and left arrow screenbuttons on the main audio screen. Categories cannotbe selected from the category list screen whenthey have been removed.

FM lists may also contain a category to select if stationsin the area support Radio Data Systems (RDS).

2 Refresh List: Select this screen button to refreshthe list of stations.

When viewing a map screen the name of the station orchannel displays in the top center tab.

¨SEEK / ©SEEK: To seek stations, press the rightor left arrow keys to go to the next or previousstation.

To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for morethan two seconds. The radio goes to a station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes on to the next station. Tostop scanning, press either arrow again.

FM source shown, other sources similar

3-4

Storing Radio Station PresetsThis feature allows up to 30 preset stations to bestored. You can mix AM, FM, and XM (if equipped).To store presets:


2. If viewing a map screen, select the source screenbutton, press the AUDIO key, or press the FAV(favorite) key.

3. Select the band.

4. Seek, scan, or tune to the desired station, to selectthe station.

5. Press and hold one of the preset screen buttons formore than two seconds or until a beep is heard.

6. Repeat the steps for each preset.

Sound Menu

SOUND: Press this key or press the MENU key toaccess the Sound menu to adjust the treble, midrange,bass, fade, balance, and equalization.

Base shown; Uplevel similar

3-5

Setting the Tone

TREBLE: Select and hold the plus (+) or minus (−) signto increase or decrease the treble. If a station is weak ornoisy, decrease the treble.

MID (Midrange): Select and hold the plus (+) orminus (−) sign to increase or decrease the midrange.

BASS: Select and hold the plus (+) or minus (−) sign toincrease or decrease the bass.

Adjusting the Speakers

L/R (Left/Right) (Balance): To adjust the balancebetween the left and the right speakers, select and holdthe L or R screen buttons.

Front/Rear (Fade): To adjust the fade between thefront and the rear speakers, select and hold the Front orRear screen buttons.

Automatic EqualizationWith automatic equalization customized equalizationsettings designed for Rock, Pop, Country, Classical, andTalk can be selected. Select one of the equalizationscreen buttons to hear the change in sound.

Custom: Select this screen button to adjust the bass,treble, and midrange settings as desired.

The system saves separate settings for each source.

Talk: The Acadia and Enclave has only an equalizationsetting for Talk.

Select Talk to adjust the tone settings to an automaticpreset for talk radio.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)With this feature, if the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) systemhas been turned on, it can be turned off by selecting theRear Seat Audio Off screen button. See “Rear SeatAudio (RSA)” in the Index of your vehicles owner manual.

3-6

Radio Menu

Press the MENU key to enter the configure menuscreen, then press it repeatedly until Radio is selected,or select the Radio screen button to make changesfor radio information displayed, number of preset pages,XM categories, if equipped, and automatic volumecontrol.

Limit Features While DrivingTouch the Limit Features While Driving screen button toturn on and off the ability to limit functions whiledriving. When this screen button is highlighted, thefollowing functions will be limited while driving:

• Music Navigator Scrolling

• Radio Category Scrolling

• Navigation Menu Scrolling and some functions

See “Category” earlier in this section for moreinformation. See “From Map” under Destination onpage 2-13 for more information.

Number of Preset PagesSelect the Number of Preset Pages screen button tochange the number of preset pages, 1 through 6. Eachpreset page can contain five preset stations. Selectthe desired numbered screen button.

3-7

Automatic Volume Control

Automatic Volume Control: With automatic volumecontrol, the audio system adjusts automatically to makeup for road and wind noise while driving.

To use Automatic Volume Control:

1. Set the volume at the desired level.

2. Press the MENU key to enter the menu screen,then press it repeatedly until Radio is selected, ortouch the Radio screen button.

3. Press the Automatic Volume Control screen button.

4. Touch the LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH screenbuttons. Each higher setting allows for morecompensation at faster vehicle speeds.

Then, as the vehicle is being driven, automatic volumecontrol automatically increases the volume, asnecessary, to overcome noise at any speed. Thevolume level should always sound consistent whiledriving. To turn automatic volume control off, touch theOFF screen button.

Remove/Add XM Categories1. Select the Remove/Add XM Categories screen

button to remove or add XM categories whenselecting from the category list screen. The list ofXM categories appear on the screen.

2. Use the up and down arrow screen buttons to scrollthrough the list. The categories to remove highlightsand the categories to add are dark in color.

3. Select the category that you would like to add orremove.

4. Select the Restore All Categories screen button toadd all categories that have been removed.

3-8

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). RDSfeatures are available for use only on FM stations thatbroadcast RDS information. With RDS, the radio can:

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

This system relies on receiving specific information fromthese stations and only work when the information isavailable. In rare cases, a radio station may broadcastincorrect information that can cause the radio featuresto work improperly. If this happens, contact theradio station.

The RDS system is always on. When information isbroadcast from the FM station you are listening to, thestation name or call letters display on the audioscreen. RDS may provide a program type (PTY) forcurrent programming and the name of the programbeing broadcast.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programmingand commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and indigital-quality sound. During the trial or when yousubscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM™ RadioOnline for when you are not in the vehicle. A service feeis required to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™ at xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

When XM™ is active, the channel name and number,song title, and artist displays on the screen.

XM™ Radio MessagesSee “XM™ Radio Messages” in the vehicle’s ownermanual” for a list of possible XM messages.

3-9

CD PlayerThe player can be used for CDs with conventional CDaudio, MP3, or WMA compressed files and mayhave the capability to play DVD audio and DVD video.See DVD Player on page 3-16 for more informationabout DVD audio and video.

With the ignition on, insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it in and the CDshould begin playing. The navigation system can beused while playing a CD.

When a CD is inserted, the CD tab displays. If anequalization setting is selected for the CD, it is activatedeach time a CD is played.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radiois turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,if it was the last selected audio source.As each new track starts to play, the track numberdisplays.If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in thissection.If viewing a map screen, select the CD screen button orthe NAV hard key. The display splits between the audioscreen and the map screen. If you do not want to view asplit screen or you are not on a map screen, press theAUDIO key, then press it repeatedly until CD is selectedor select the CD screen button.

Playing an Audio CD

j / r (Pause/Play):

1. Select to pause the CD. This button then changesto the play button.

2. Select the play button to play the CD.

Random:

1. Select to hear the tracks in random, rather thansequential, order.

2. Select Random again to turn off random play.

3-10

r (Rewind):

1. Select and hold to rewind quickly through a trackselection. Sound is heard at a muted or a reducedvolume.

2. Release this button to stop rewinding. The displayshows the elapsed time of the track.

[ (Forward):

1. Select and hold to fast forward quickly through atrack selection. Sound is heard at a muted or areduced volume.

2. Release this button to stop fast forwarding. Thedisplay shows the elapsed time of the track.

¨SEEK / ©SEEK:

1. To seek tracks, press the up arrow to go to thenext track.

2. Press the down arrow to go to the start of thecurrent track, if more than eight seconds haveplayed.

3. If either arrow is pressed more than once, theplayer continues moving backward or forwardthrough the CD. The sound mutes while seeking.

f (Tuning Knob):

1. Turn counterclockwise one notch to go to the startof the current track, turn it again to go to theprevious track.

2. Turn clockwise to go to the next track.

While playing an audio CD the rear seat operator canpower on the RSE video screen and use the remotecontrol to navigate through the tracks on the CD.

Using a Compressed Audio CD/DVDCompressed Audio CD/DVD FormatThere are guidelines that must be met, when creatingan MP3, WMA, or mixed disc. If the guidelines arenot met when recording a burned disc, the disc may notplay. The guidelines are:

• ID3 tag information is displayed by the radio if it isavailable. The radio supports ID3 tag informationv1.0, v1.1, and v2.0. The radio displays a filename,song name, artist name, album name, anddirectory name.

• Maximum 32 characters, including spaces, in a fileor folder name.

• The recommended maximum number of folders is100 with a maximum hierarchy of three folders.

3-11

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to findsongs while driving. Organize songs by albumsusing one folder for each album.

• All playlist files (.m3u or .pls) must be removed fromdisc contents. Playlists are not supported.

• It is recommended that there is a maximum of192 files on a CD-R(W) disc.

• It is recommended that there is a maximum of200 files on a DVD+R(W) disc.

• The files can be recorded on a CD-R(W) orDVD+R(W).

• Copy protected WMA files are not supported.

Scanning Compressed Audio DiscScanning a compressed audio disc categorizes andallows sorting of songs by folder artist or album.• Select center folder/artist/album button to initiate

scanning mode. The radio plays and a progress bardisplays.

• Background scanning occurs with the radio on andthe compressed audio disc inserted but not beingplayed.

• Only the first 200 songs appears in the compressedaudio music navigator.

• Scanning time varies depending on the number offiles and folders on the disc.

Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audio files, the directory isdisplayed as ROOT. All files contained directly under theroot directory is accessed prior to any root directoryfolders.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in thefile structure that contains only folders/subfolders and nocompressed files directly beneath them, the playeradvances to the next folder in the file structurethat contains compressed audio files and the emptyfolder is displayed or numbered.

No FolderWhen the disc contains only compressed files, the filesare located under the root folder. The next andprevious folder functions have no function on a disc thatwas recorded without folders. When displaying thename of the folder the radio displays ROOT.

3-12

Order of PlayTracks are played in the following order:

• The radio does not support playlist files.

• Order of play differs depending if the compressedaudio disc is fully scanned or unscanned. See“Scanning Compressed Audio Disc” previously inthis section.

• When playing an unscanned disc, the next andprevious screen buttons may be required toswitch away from the current folder when quicklyseeking rather than allowing the last song of a folderto play to completion.

• Play begins from the first track under the rootdirectory. When all tracks from the root directoryhave been played, play continues from filesaccording to their numerical listing. After playing thelast track from the last folder, play begins againat the first track of the first folder or root directory.

• A scanned compressed audio disc in artist/albummodes only play songs within the current category.The next and previous screen buttons changeto different artists or albums.

When play enters a new folder, the display does notautomatically show the new folder name. The new trackname displays.

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the name that iscontained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not presentin the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file namewithout the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or four pagesare shortened. The display does not show parts of wordson the last page of text and the extension of thefilename does not display.

Playing a Compressed Audio DiscAs stated earlier in this section, the player can be usedfor CDs with conventional CD audio, MP3, or WMAcompressed files. Read the information under “CDPlayer” for more information on playing an audio disc.

3-13

j / r (Pause/Play):

1. Select to pause the CD. This button then changesto the play button.

2. Select the play button to play the CD.

Random:

1. Select to hear the tracks in random, rather thansequential, order.

2. Select Random again to turn off random play.

r (Rewind):

1. Select and hold to rewind quickly through a trackselection. Sound is heard at a muted or reducedvolume.

2. Release to stop rewinding. The display shows theelapsed time of the track.

[ (Forward):

1. Select and hold to fast forward quickly through atrack selection. Sound is heard at a muted orreduced volume.

2. Release to stop fast forwarding. The display showsthe elapsed time of the track.

q r (Folder/Artist/Album):

1. Select the left or right arrow to go to the previous ornext folder, artist, or album on the disc.

2. Select the middle screen button, with the folder,artist, or album name, to sort the compressedaudio file by folder, artist, or album. It may take afew minutes for the system to sort the compressedaudio files. See “Scanning Compressed AudioDisc” previously in this section.

3-14

¨SEEK / ©SEEK:

1. Press the up arrow to go to the next track.

2. Press the down arrow to go to the start of thecurrent track, if more than eight seconds haveplayed.

3. If either arrow is pressed more than once, theplayer continues moving backward or forwardthrough the CD. The sound mutes while seeking.

f (Tuning Knob):

1. Turn counterclockwise one notch to go to the startof the current track, turn it again to go to theprevious track.

2. Turn clockwise to go to the next track.

Vehicles with Rear Seat Audio (RSA) can use RSA tochange tracks/chapters. Vehicles with RSE can usethe remote control to change tracks/chapters.

CD MessagesIf Disc Read Error displays and/or the CD comes out, itcould be for one of the following reasons:

• A disc was inserted with an invalid or unknownformat.

• The map DVD disc was installed into the CD slot.See “Installing the Map DVD” under Maps onpage 2-4.

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• The vehicle is being driven on a very roughroad. When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

3-15

DVD PlayerThe player can be used for DVD audio and DVD video.

With this feature, movies/pictures do not appear on thenavigation screen, unless the vehicle is in P (Park). Itoperates on the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) screenwhile the vehicle is moving. The RSE video screenstarts play of the DVD when a DVD is inserted into thenavigation system. The DVD player can be controlledby the buttons on the navigation system, the Rear SeatAudio (RSA) system, and the remote control. The DVDplayer can also be used for the rear seat passengers withthe radio off. The rear seat passengers can power on thevideo screen and use the remote control to navigate thedisc. See “Rear Seat Entertainment System” in the Indexof your vehicle’s owner manual for more information.

The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of theappropriate region code that is printed on the jacket ofmost DVDs.

The DVD slot is compatible with most audio CDs, CD-R,CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, DVD+R/RW singlelayer media along with MP3 and WMA formats. DVD-R,DVD-RW, and DVD+R dual layer media is not supported.

If an error displays, see “DVD Messages” later in thissection.

Navigation DVD Radio with Bose®

Surround Sound System (Acadia andEnclave Only)If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)system, it has a radio capable of playing both CD andDVD discs. See “Rear Seat Entertainment” in theIndex of the vehicle’s owner manual.

The CD/DVD player is the top slot on the radiofaceplate. The player is capable of reading the DTSprogrammed DVD-Audio or DVD-Video media. DTS andDTS 2.0 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems,Inc. AC-3 is Dolby Digital Surround technology.

The system is optimized to use 5.1 audio surroundsound before stereo tracks. Stereo modes are typicallyavailable if manually selected. Press the Optionsbutton, then the Audio button or DVD main or top menu.

3-16

Playing a DVDThere are three ways to play a DVD:

• Once a DVD is inserted, the system automaticallystarts play of the DVD up to the DVD top menu.The r (play) button must be pressed to start themovie from the DVD’s menu screen.

• If you are on a map screen, select the DVDscreen button.

• Press the AUDIO hard key, then select the DVDscreen button.

• The r (play) button must be pressed for the movieto resume play when the vehicle has been turnedOFF and then back ON.

When a DVD is loaded, the rear seat passengers canpower on the RSE video screen and use the remotecontrol to navigate through the DVD.

O (Power/Volume):1. Press to turn the system on and off.2. Turn to increase or decrease the volume of the audio

system.3. Press and hold for more than two seconds to turn off

the navigation system, RSE video screen, and RSA.If the vehicle has not been tuned off, the RSE andthe RSA can be turned back on by pressing this knoband continues play of the last active source.

DVD Menu OptionsOnce a DVD starts to play, the menu options and cursorscreen buttons automatically appear. To display themenu Options screen button while a DVD is playing,touch anywhere on the screen.

Options: Select this screen button to view the menuoption screen buttons. Menu options are available whenthey are highlighted. Some menu options are onlyavailable when the DVD is not playing.

Cursor: Select this screen button to access the cursormenu. The arrows and other cursor options let younavigate the DVD menu options. The cursor menuoptions are only available if a DVD has a menu. Use thecursor menu to start a DVD video from the discmain menu.

q, Q, r, R (Arrow Buttons): Use these arrowbuttons to move around the DVD menu.

Enter: Select to choose the highlighted option.

Return: Select to go back to the previous DVD menu.

Back: Select to go back to the main DVD displayscreen.

Move: Select to move the cursor buttons back andforth from the bottom-right corner to the top-left cornerof the screen.

3-17

j / r (Pause/Play):

1. Select to pause the DVD. This button then changesto the play button.

2. Select the play button to play the DVD.

3. Select this button in a DVD disc main menu to startthe DVD.

c (Stop):

1. Select to stop play of the DVD.

2. Select the play button to continue playing the DVDfrom where the DVD was stopped.

3. Select this button twice to return to the beginning ofthe DVD.

r (Rewind):

1. Select and release to rewind through the scene,chapters, and titles.

2. Select again to increase the rewinding speed.

3. Select the play button to stop rewinding. This buttonmay not work when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

[ (Forward):

1. Select and release to advance rapidly through thescene, chapters, and titles.

2. Select again to increase the fast forwarding speed.

3. Select the play button to stop fast forwarding. Thisbutton may not work when the DVD is playing thecopyright information or the previews.

Hide Options: Select this screen button to remove allmenu options from the display, except Options andCursor.

Top Menu: Select to display the first menu of the DVD.This is not available on all DVDs.

Menu: Select to display the DVD menu of the currentarea of the DVD that is playing. This button is notavailable for DVD audio.

3-18

Audio:

1. Select to display the audio options.

2. Select the audio options that best improve soundquality. This is not available on all DVDs or whenthe DVD is stopped. This button may not beavailable for some DVD audio discs. Acadia only,see “Fading With a Bose® Surround Sound System”later in this section.

Subtitle: Select to play the video with subtitles. This isnot available on all DVDs or when the DVD is stopped.This button is not available for DVD audio.

Angle:

1. Select to adjust the viewing angle of the DVD.

2. Repeatedly select this button to toggle through theangles. This is not available on all DVDs or when theDVD is stopped. This button is not available for DVDaudio.

q (Previous Scene): Select to go to the previousscene. This button does not work when the DVD isstopped. This button is not available for DVD video.

r (Next Scene): Select to go to the next scene. Thisbutton does not work when the DVD is stopped. Thisbutton is not available for DVD video.

Search:

1. Select to display the search screen.

2. Select Title or Chapter Search for DVD video andGroup or Track for DVD audio. The keyboardallows you to type in the title/chapter/group/tracknumber that you would like to watch or listento. This button does not work when the DVD isstopped.

Setup: Select to display the DVD Setup screen. Thisbutton is only available when the DVD is not playing.The DVD Setup screen allows you to change thebrightness, contrast, and the viewing aspect on themonitor.

! (Brightness): Select the up or down screen arrowsto increase or decrease the brightness of thenavigation screen.

_ (Contrast): Select the up or down screen arrows toincrease or decrease the contrast of the navigationscreen.

Monitor: From the DVD Setup screen, select to adjustthe aspect ratio of the DVD on the navigation screen.This is not available on all DVDs. This button is notavailable for DVD audio.

Select e to close the screen in from the left andright sides.

3-19

Select J to fill the screen on the left and right sides.

Select d to fill the screen on the top and bottom.

SEEK ¨(Next Track/Chapter): Press this hard key togo to the next track or chapter if the time elapsed isgreater than 10 seconds. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing the copyright information orthe previews.

©SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter):

1. Press this hard key to return to the start of thecurrent track or chapter.

2. Press again to go to the previous track or chapter.This button may not work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or the previews.

f (Tuning Knob):

1. Turn counterclockwise one notch to go to the startof the current chapter/track, turn it again to go tothe previous chapter/track.

2. Turn clockwise to go to the next chapter/track.

Fading With a Bose® Surround SoundSystem (Acadia and Enclave Only)If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is turned on, the radiodisables fade and mutes the rear speakers.

The following methods allow for switching surroundsound into a 2 channel stereo mode:

• Select a stereo or 2 channel mode using theDVD-Video top menu. Most commercial DVD-Videotop menus contain audio configuration settings.

• While the movie is playing, select OPTIONS toshow all available DVD options, then select theAudio touch key to switch between the multipleaudio sources on the DVD.

• Fade the radio two steps to the rear. When returningto the center area, the surround track will turn onagain if it was on before the rear speakerswere faded.

Select the AUDIO buttons to change current DVD audiotrack.

Some DVD-Video discs only contain Dolby Digital 5.1(AC-3) or DTS 5.1 audio tracks and may not allowconversions into stereo modes.

See “Adjusting the Speakers” under Navigation AudioSystem on page 3-2 for more information.

3-20

DVD MessagesIf Disc Read Error appears on the display and/or the DVDcomes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:

• A disc was inserted with an invalid or unknownformat.

• The disc is not from a correct region.

• The map DVD disc was installed into the DVDaudio/video slot. See “Installing the Map DVD” underMaps on page 2-4.

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the DVD should play.

• The vehicle is being driven on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the DVDshould play.

• The DVD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe DVD.

• The label may be caught in the DVD player.

If the DVD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good DVD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

Care of Your CDs and DVDsIf playing recorded media such as a CD or DVD, thesound quality may be reduced due to CD or DVD quality,the method of recording, the quality of the music that hasbeen recorded, recording speed, max media recordingspeed, and the way the CD or DVD has been handled.There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty in findingtracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If theseproblems occur, check the bottom surface of the CD orDVD. If the surface is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, it will not play properly. If the surface issoiled, see “Care of Your CDs and DVDs” in the Index ofthe vehicle’s owner manual.If there is no apparent damage, try a known goodCD or DVD.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD or DVD, or morethan one CD or DVD is inserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to play scratched or damagedCDs or DVDs, the player could be damaged. Whileusing the CD or DVD player, use only CDs or DVDs ingood condition without any label, load one CD orDVD at a time, and keep the player and the loadingslot free of foreign materials, liquids, and debris.Do not add any label to a CD or DVD, it could get caughtin the player. If a CD or DVD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label is needed, try labelingthe top of the recorded CD or DVD with a soft marker.

3-21

Auxiliary DevicesThe vehicle may have a Rear Entertainment System(RSE). The RSE has audio adapters that lets youconnect auxiliary devices. The audio can be heardthrough the speakers or through the wireless or wiredheadphones. See “Audio/Video Jacks” under “Rear SeatEntertainment System” in the Index of the vehicle’sowner manual for more information.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary devicewhile the vehicle is in P (Park). See “Defensive Driving”in the Index of the vehicle’s owner manual for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To switch the RSE system to use an auxiliary device:

1. Connect the auxiliary device to the RSE system.

2. Press the AUDIO key. Then press it repeatedly untilAUX (auxiliary) is selected, or select the AUXscreen button. A front auxiliary device must beconnected before the front auxiliary device can beselected. The rear auxiliary device can beselected by pressing the REAR AUX button.The rear auxiliary device system requires all videoand audio inputs to be connected to ensureproper audio fidelity of the rear auxiliary device.

The rear seat passengers can also use the remotecontrol to change the functions of the RSE. See “RearSeat Entertainment System” in the Index of the vehicle’sowner manual for more information.

3-22

Voice Recognition ............................................4-2

Section 4 Voice Recognition

4-1

Voice RecognitionThe navigation system’s voice recognition allows forhands-free operation of navigation and audio systemfeatures. Voice recognition can be used when theignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.

The radio commands feature only works if the map DVDis inserted. Bluetooth® and OnStar® functions willwork without the map DVD inserted. See Bluetooth®

and OnStar® in the index of the vehicle’s owner manual.

The system may not hear you or may hear the incorrectword with the windows open or the convertible top downdue to background noise.

To use radio voice recognition:

1. Push and hold the SRCE button on the steeringwheel controls, if equipped, or the AUDIO buttonon the radio faceplate. A beep will be heard and theaudio system mutes.

2. Clearly state one of the commands listed on thefollowing pages. For example, say “Radio SelectFM” or just say, “Radio FM”.

3. The system tells you the command beingimplemented. For example, the system says “RadioSelect FM” and changes the audio system to the FMsource.

You may end voice recognition by not speaking anycommands or by pressing the SRCE again. After aboutfive seconds of silence, the system automaticallycancels voice recognition.

At times, the system may not understand a spokencommand. If this happens, try again. If a spokencommand is not available, the system provides feedbackbased on availability.

While using voice recognition, make sure to keepinterior noise levels to a minimum. Otherwise, thesystem might not recognize voice commands.

The system recognizes commands spoken in English,Spanish, or French depending on the global languagesetting in the vehicle. See the vehicle’s ownermanual for details about changing languages.

Voice Recognition CommandsThe following list shows all of the voice commandsavailable for the navigation system with a briefdescription of each. The commands are listed with theoptional words in brackets. To use the voice commands,refer to the instructions listed previously.

4-2

Voice Tag CommandsThe following are voice tag commands that can beaccessed by clearly stating the commands exactly asthey are written. There can be up to 40 voice tag entriesfor destinations.

Navigation go to [destination], navigation select:These commands instruct the system to select adestination saved under the stored voice tag. Thesystem prompts for a destination name then waits forthe name to be stated.

If you are not currently driving on a route, the systemautomatically creates the voice tag destination as the finaldestination. If you are currently driving on a route, thesystem automatically creates the voice tag destination asa stopover. Up to three stopovers can be created.

Storing Voice TagsFrom the address book entry information page, pressthe Add Voice tag screen button. The system responds“Name Please?” and you will have four seconds torecord a name. The system asks for confirmation of thename before saving it as a voice tag.

Navigation Help

Navigation Help: This command instructs the systemto assist with navigation commands.

Display CommandsTo set the display mode:

Display [set] day [mode]: Sets the display todaytime mode.

Display [set] night [mode]: Sets the display tonight mode.

Display [set] auto [mode]: Sets the display toautomatic mode. The system changes between dayand night mode automatically.

System help: This command instructs the system toassist with display commands.

Radio CommandsThe following are radio commands can be accessed byclearly stating the commands exactly as written.

Radio [band] [select] AM, radio [band] [select] FM,radio [band] [select] XM, radio [band] [select]satellite: Instructs the system to go to either the AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped).

Radio [select] (frequency) AM, radio [select](frequency) FM: Instructs the system to go to a specificfrequency on either AM or FM.

4-3

Radio [select] (channel) XM, radio [select] (channel)satellite: Instructs the system to go to a specificchannel on the XM™ band (if equipped).

Radio help: This command instructs the system toassist with radio commands.

CD CommandsThe following are CD, MP3, and DVD commands thatcan be accessed by clearly stating the commandsexactly as written.

CD, DVD, Disc: Selects a CD, DVD, or disc that iscurrently loaded.

CD, DVD, Disc, [select] track (one, two, three, etc.):Instructs the system to select a specific track number(may not be available during DVD movie play).

CD, DVD, Disc select next folder: Selects the nextfolder on the MP3 or audio DVD.

CD, DVD, Disc select previous folder: Selects theprevious folder on the MP3 or audio DVD.

CD help, DVD help, Disc help: Instructs the system toassist with CD and DVD commands.

Auxiliary CommandsThe following auxiliary commands can be accessed byclearly stating the commands exactly as written.The commands are available when the auxiliary sourceis available.

Aux, Auxiliary: Selects the auxiliary device, when adevice is connected.

OnStar® Command

OnStar®: Instructs the system to connect to OnStar.The OnStar voice recognition system must be entered.Refer to your OnStar® owner guide for moreinformation.

Voice Help

Voice help: Provides a description of help commandsthat can be used.

4-4

AAdding Destinations to the Address Book ........... 2-26Adding or Changing Preset Destinations ............. 2-26Alpha-Numeric Keyboard ................................... 2-3Audio System

Radio .......................................................... 3-2Auto Reroute .................................................. 2-13Auxiliary Devices ............................................ 3-22

CCanadian Owners ............................................... iiiCanceling Guidance ........................................ 1-12Care

CDs and DVDs ........................................... 3-21Care of Your CDs and DVDs ............................ 3-21CD Messages ................................................ 3-15CD Player ...................................................... 3-10CDs

Care .......................................................... 3-21Cleaning the Video Screen ............................... 1-12Configure Menu .............................................. 2-27

DDatabase Coverage Explanations ...................... 2-41Deleting Personal Information ............................. 1-7Destination ..................................................... 2-13Display .......................................................... 2-36Driving on a Route .......................................... 2-11DVD Menu Options ......................................... 3-17DVD Messages .............................................. 3-21DVD Player .................................................... 3-16DVDs

Care .......................................................... 3-21

EEjecting the DVD Map Disc ............................... 2-5English/Metric Units .......................................... 1-6Entering a Destination by Using Address, Point of

Interest, Previous Destination, or the MapMethod and Storing Preset Destinations ............. 1-8

1

FFading With a Bose® Surround Sound System

(Acadia and Enclave Only) ............................ 3-20Finding a Station .............................................. 3-3

GGetting Started, Navigation ................................ 1-4Getting Started on Your Route .......................... 2-22Global Positioning System (GPS) ...................... 2-38Guidance Volume ........................................... 1-12

HHandling the DVD Map Disc .............................. 2-5Hard Key Operation .......................................... 2-2

IInstalling the DVD Map Disc .............................. 2-4

LLanguage ........................................................ 1-6Limit Features While Driving ............................... 1-7

MMap Adjustments .............................................. 2-6Map Coverage ................................................. 2-4Map Scales ..................................................... 2-6Maps .............................................................. 2-4Menu

Configure ................................................... 2-27

NNavigation

Getting Started ............................................. 1-4System Overview .......................................... 1-2Using the System .......................................... 2-2

Navigation DVD Radio with Bose® SurroundSound System (Acadia and Enclave Only) ...... 3-16

2

OOnStar® Destination Download .......................... 2-19Ordering

Map DVDs ................................................. 2-41Overview, Navigation System ............................. 1-2Owners, Canadian .............................................. iii

PPlaying a DVD ............................................... 3-17Playing the Radio ............................................. 3-2Problems with Route Guidance ......................... 2-40Propriétaires Canadiens ....................................... iii

RRadio ............................................................ 2-27Radio Data System (RDS) ................................. 3-9Radio Menu ..................................................... 3-7

SScrolling the Map ............................................. 2-6Setting the Clock ...................................... 1-7, 2-37Sound ........................................................... 2-27Sound Menu .................................................... 3-5Storing Radio Station Presets ...................... 1-7, 3-5Symbols .......................................................... 2-7System Needs Service, If ................................. 2-40

3

TTouch-Sensitive Screen Buttons .......................... 2-3Traffic Options ................................................ 2-27

UUsing a Compressed Audio CD/DVD ................. 3-11Using Destination Download ............................. 2-20Using Your Stored Preset Destinations ............... 1-11

VVehicle Positioning .......................................... 2-39Video Screen, Cleaning ................................... 1-12Voice Recognition ............................................. 4-2Voice Recognition Commands ............................ 4-2

XXM NavTraffic™ (USA and Canada) .................. 2-28XM™ Satellite Radio Service .............................. 3-9

4

2009 gmc acadia owner manual m · 2009 gmc acadia owner manual m. general motors, gm, the gm...

Documents